Get help from the best in academic writing.

Soil and Glaciers admission college essay help

Size grades of soil are named sand, silt, and clay, which includes colloids. Size grades are defined using the metric system. Use Figure 4. 8 from the textbook to fill in the following chart. Specify the type and size and description of the particle. In some cases, particle size will be less than some value or greater than another value. For instance, gravel is greater than 2. 0 mm. Name Size Description Gravel >2. 0 mm A loose aggregation of small water-worn or pounded stones. Sand 0. 05mm A loose granular substance, resulting from the erosion of siliceous and other rocks. Silt 0. 002mm

Fine sand, clay, or other material carried by running water. Clay 0. 0001mm A stiff, sticky fine-grained. Often forming layers in the soil. Colloids 0. 00001mm A homogeneous, noncrystalline substance consisting of large molecules or ultramicroscopic particles of one substance dispersed through a second substance. Part 2 Soils have been classified according to a system developed by soil scientists and the U. S. Soil Conservation Service. Using this classification system of soil orders, pick two locations on Earth, one in your current area and another area, and describe the order and the conditions that define it.

(See Figure 4. 12 in the textbook. ) 1. Entisols – Soils lacking horizons, usually because their parent material has accumulated only recently. 2. Vertisols – Soils of subtropical and tropical zones with high clay content and high base status. Vertisols develop deep, wide cracks when dry, and the soil blocks formed by cracking move with respect to each other. Part 3 The five important soil-forming factors are indicated in the following table. Describe why these factors are important in the formation of soil. Soil forming factor Importance in soil formation Parent material Is soil. Soil is developed from regolith.

Regolith is of two different kind. Residual and transported. Regolith comes from the underlying rock whethers in its place. Transported develops on sediment that has been transported regolith develops on sediment. Climate Soils with poorly or well-developed horizons causes changes in the soil. Living organisms Micro-organisms like bacteria and fungi break the organic matter down. Animals like worms, mice, moles burrow in soil which help mix components and also provide ways for water and air to pass. Topography The slope helps the ability of water to soak into regolith. Time It takes thousands of years for a mature soil to develop. Part 4

Investigate two ways in which water shortages, erosion, water diversion, floods or contamination of a water resource, or other water processes have affected human history. How did humankind meet the challenges of the impacts? Part 5 In 150 words, how do glaciers form, grow, and shrink throughout time? Cite any references used and provide a References page. ~ Glaciers are formed when snow builds up for several years from snowfall that exceeds snow melt. Over time, as new snow compresses the existing snow, the weight causes the snow underneath to turn to ice. The hardening effect is similar to what happens when you pack a snowball in your hand.

The pressure from additional layers of snow builds for up to thousands of years. Glaciers can grow and shrink as a result of changes in the amount of snowfall or changes in the amount of melting because of warming. Changes in snowfall can result because of changes in the overall annual precipitation, or changes in the timing of the precipitation. Changes in melting can occur as a result of increased average annual air temperatures, and/or changes in the solar radiation. Melting will be affected if the glacier is covered by moraine, dust, or soot particles (increases heating, or an insulator).

Breach of contract my assignment essay help london: my assignment essay help london

Can be some cross over – e.g burglar commits tort of trespass and the crime. What is a Contract Legally binding agreement Must have -: -Offer -Acceptance -Consideration (unless contract is in the form of a deed) -is what one party promises to do in return for the other party’s promise -Contractual intention -The parties must intend their promises to be legally binding Similarities between tort and contract -Both civil claims which will be brought in the county court or High Court depending on the value of the claim. -Claimants in actions for breach of contract and in tort will usually damages as the principal remedy -The principal functions of the laws are identical – to compensate the claimant for the wrong doing Differences between tort and contract

-In contract the parties obligations are fixed by the terms of the contract but in tort, on the other hand judge made rules dictate whether the defendant’s wrongdoing constitutes a tort -In contract there has to be a contractual relationship between a claimant and a defendant before an action for breach of contract can be brought.

In tort, the scope of liability is much wider.Obligations in tort are owed to the world at large -Obligations in contract are voluntarily entered into – obligations in tort are imposed on a defendant. -The function of damages is different – in tort – puts the claimant in the position he would have been had the tort not been committed, in contract – the position he would have been in had the contract been performed. Potential Claims in tort and contract

-Can be done – but will only be awarded damages once.

C: FUNCTIONS OF THE LAWS OF CONTRACT AND TORT CONTRACT Compensation Deterrence Consumer Protection Provides a framework in which businesses operate TORT Remedies – damages and/or injunction Compensation Deterrence Justice Vindication of Rights

D: RESTITUTION Restitutionary remedies do not focus on providing compensation for the loss suffered – the purpose is to reverse an unjust enrichment made by the defendant at the claimant’s expense.

E: BURDEN AND STANDARD OF PROOF – The burden of proof lies with the claimant – The burden of defence lies with the defendant – Standards of proof = balance of probabilities

Team Leadership Paper essay help online: essay help online

Entering into a new market segment will be a particularly challenging project to implement into our current structure. Many factors will need to become more apparent when we attempt to initialize a set plan that suits not only the strategical needs of the organization but those of the employee’s involved. Instructing my team to use initiative and putting such faith in my individual members will be crucial for executing within a designated time frame so we can be ready for our new department to take off on its own.

Each and every person involved within our new departmental team will be evaluated and then properly utilized in the implementation of the agreed upon plan. Understanding the way that my team thinks and the way they demonstrate such thoughts into positive outcomes will be of the essence. I had each of them take a Jungian Assessment which can assist me in regulating what role they should identify themselves with and then to adapt to that role according to the situation in question (Human Metrics, 2013).

My first team member is Latish Jenkins; she applies herself constantly in expressing her ideas and recommendations to complete assigned projects. It was determined that Latish is very organized, compulsive, private, trustworthy and practical. The assessment related those traits to a career as an office manager, accountant, business manager, tax agent and public servant. Latish would be most effective in the implementer role in constructing daily work plans and helping to ensure that those plans are effective in meeting our departmental goals (Merchant, 2014).

Only negative affect I can foresee from this role is that if changes do have to be made then it may take more time for her to adapt to these changes due to her personality traits. The next member we will need to evaluate is Adegboyega, he is well liked by his members to produce an above quality experience for all who interact within the team or cross functionally across different departments. It was determined that Adegboyega is realistic, logical, analytical, decisive and has a natural head for business or mechanics.

The assessment related those traits to a career as a corporate executive, medical technologist, curator, health-care administrator, teacher and dentist. Adegboyega would be most effective in the monitor-evaluator role where he would apply his critical thinking skills to assist in our decision making abilities that will secure a positive outcome (Merchant, 2014). Only negative affect this might have in our plans is slowing down our pace to efficiently conduct our plans in a timely manner.

Our third member will be Richard; he has great knowledge on what we need to do as a team to accomplish certain goals without exhausting all of our resources. From the assessment it was determined that Richard is outgoing, unconventional and spontaneous. Richard would be most effective in the shaper role where he would bring a positive attitude towards all employee engagement and possess exceptional communication skills that will accommodate to motivating other employee’s (Merchant, 2014).

Only negative affect this might have is that Richard may not contribute as much towards the productivity we are trying to attain. This could cause conflict among others even though Richard is still playing an important role in keeping everyone upbeat and enthused. I myself also took the assessment to evaluate where I could use improvement and just determine how I fit within my team. The assessment determined that I am people-oriented, creative and highly optimistic. I would be most

effective in the coordinator role where I would listen to my entire team member’s in their opinions, ideas, problems and concerns. I would guide the activities of my team members and delegate the duties of what must be accomplished to be the best in class (Merchant, 2014). Negative effects that could come with this role is becoming too manipulative in directing my team, which could cause members to become futile. A process for culture change The process described below has been applied successfully in a number of organizations to bring about culture change (Thornbury, 2003).

At a very high level, it consists of three phases: 1. The first phase is about establishing the starting point: fully understanding the existing culture of the organization. 2. The second phase is to do with setting the parameters for the culture to which the organization wishes to move. 3. The third phase is the ongoing process of organization development that supports the “new” culture and makes it a reality. If we can acknowledge that our current culture is ineffective we can modify the vision in which we as an organization can adequately relate to this particular market segment.

Organizational or corporate culture covers many facets of organizational life, such as management styles, appraisals, rewards, and communication styles used by employees. If we can adjust too many varying styles of management, which includes myself, I believe that our control over this new market will be so strong that many competitors will attempt to become strategic partners. If this does evolve into new business partnerships then our leading edge towards new and improved innovation will be the benchmark for other corporations to follow.

Not only will we be a leader in our distinct business sector but we will be the foundation for others to follow. There are many leadership theories that we can use to approach certain individuals and situations depending on what constraints we must overcome to efficiently and effectively manage. The Path-Goal model is a leadership theory that says the leader’s job is to assist followers in attaining their goals and to provide direction or support needed to ensure that their goals are compatible with the goals of the group or organization (Robbins & Coulter, 2012).

Most of my current team members believe in goal attainment for themselves, the team and the organizational as a whole. As the leader I must adjust to the environment and follow four behaviors that must be adapted to the certain situations (Robbins & Coulter, 2012). Directive leader: Lets subordinates know what’s expected of them, schedules work to be done, and gives specific guidance on how to accomplish tasks. Supportive leader: Shows concern for the needs of followers and is friendly. Participative leader: Consults with group members and uses their suggestions before making a decision.

Achievement oriented leader: Sets challenging goals and expects followers to perform at their highest level. If these behaviors are upheld with the highest respect for the individual, team and the organization then there will be no error that can’t be resolved. The decision made on what behavior to apply is crucial and can produce flaws with the system if done incorrectly. Say for instance you are being more directive towards an individual team member when they are seeking for more support. It will make that employee believe that you don’t care about their needs and may become hostile towards myself, the team and the organization.

Through our continued efforts to support each other in accomplishing not only our individual goals but those of the company also, we will build relationships that can produce some of the most productive results that will thrive throughout the organization. With my own insistent attempts to being the most creative leader that I can be, with the strong team that I have will only continue to prosper. There will always be room for error but when we do come across such errors we will make sure to use those as an educational tool to properly adjust and then lead the way for continued success.

General Electric Case Analysis college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help

GE used to prefer acquisitions or Greenfield ventures as an entry mode rather than joint ventures. Why do you think this was the case? According to our textbook, a firm can establish a wholly owned subsidiary in a country by building a subsidiary from the ground up, the so-called Greenfield strategy, or by acquiring an enterprise in the target market. Acquisitions have three major points in their favor. First, they are quick to execute. By acquiring an established enterprise, a firm can rapidly build its presence in the target foreign market.

Second, in many cases firms make acquisitions to preempt their competitors. Third, managers may believe acquisitions to be less risky than Greenfield ventures. When a firm makes an acquisition, it buys a set of assets that are producing a known revenue and profit stream. On the other hand, the big advantage of establishing a Greenfield venture in a foreign country is that it gives the firm a much greater ability to build the kind of subsidiary company that it wants. For example, it is much easier to build an organization culture from scratch than it is to change the culture of an acquired unit.

Why do you think that GE has come to prefer joint ventures in recent years? Do you think that the global economic crisis of 2008–2009 might have affected this preference in any way? If so, how? GE now sees joint ventures as a great way to dip its toe into foreign markets where it lacks local knowledge. Also, in certain nations, China being an example, economic, political, legal, and cultural considerations make joint ventures an easier option than either acquisitions or greenfield ventures.

GE believes it can often benefit from the political contacts, local expertise, and business relationships that the local partner brings to the table, to say nothing of the fact that in certain sectors of the Chinese economy and some others, local laws prohibit other entry modes. GE also sees joint ventures as a good way to share the risk of building a business in a nation where it lacks local knowledge. Finally, under the leadership of CEO Jeffrey Immelt, GE has adopted aggressive growth goals, and it feels that entering via joint ventures into nations where it lacks a presence is the only way of attaining these goals.

Fueled by its large number of joint ventures, GE has rapidly expanded its international presence over the past decade. For the first time, in 2007 the company derived the majority of its revenue from foreign operations. A joint venture entails establishing a firm that is jointly owned by two or more otherwise independent firms. Joint ventures have a number of advantages. First, a firm benefits from a local partner’s knowledge of the host country’s competitive conditions, culture, language, political systems, and business systems.

Second, when the development costs and/or risks of opening a foreign market are high, a firm might gain by sharing these costs and or risks with a local partner. Third, in many countries, political considerations make joint ventures the only feasible entry mode. I do think that the global economic crisis of 2008-2009 might gave affected this preference. In 2009, only 22% of all FDI inflows had been in the form of mergers and acquisitions which were reflected of the global economic crisis, which depresses equity values worldwide and made cross-border mergers and acquisitions less attractive as an entry mode.

In the midst of the global economic crisis, the fact that joint ventures risks are shared among the partners is one factor that made joint ventures a preference. 3. What are the risks that GE must assume when it enters into a joint venture? Is there any way for GE to reduce these risks? First, as with licensing, a firm that enters into a joint venture risks giving control of its technology to its partner. However, joint-venture agreements can be constructed to minimize this risk. One option is to hold majority ownership in the venture.

This allows the dominant partner to exercise greater control over its technology. But it can be difficult to find a foreign partner who is willing to settle for minority ownership and GE’s agreements normally give even the minority partner in a joint venture veto power over major strategic decisions, and control issues can scuttle some ventures. However, another option is to “wall off” from a partner technology that is central to the core competence of the firm, while sharing other technology. 4.

The case mentions that GE has a well-earned reputation for being a good partner. What are the likely benefits of this reputation to GE? If GE were to tarnish its reputation by, for example, opportunistically taking advantage of a partner, how might this impact the company going forward? According to the text, GE is well known for its innovative management techniques and excellent management development programs. Many partners are only too happy to team up with GE to get access to this know-how.

The likely benefits of this reputation to GE is that the company builds trust in the market, and looking like an attractive partner which GE can then access knowledge about local markets, driving profits up. If GE were to tarnish its reputation, the company would not look attractive to partners, therefore the company would have a hard time finding other businesses to enter into a joint venture. Also, the value of GE would deteriorate with the lack of trust from other businesses, which could lead to lack of trust of consumers.

Understanding counselling theory common app essay help: common app essay help

In this assignment, I will be explaining in more detail; the person centred model of counselling, used primarily during this Level 3 course. The concepts and principles of the model and who was responsible for them. I will be seeking the value of the person-centred model and pitting it alongside its counterparts. I shall discussing two other models, their key features and uses and compare and contrast with the person-centred model of counselling. In doing so, this will raise my knowledge and awareness, of the person-centred model and other models used within counselling. I feel it is important, to have a solid theory foundation of all the counselling models, methods or techniques and the reasons a chosen model, would inform the practice of a qualified counsellor, before attempting to use them. I hope to discover the value, similarities and differences of these models in more depth and where they can be effective in the counselling environment. Origins of Person-centred Counselling. The beginnings of person-centred approaches can be attributed to the work of an American psychologist Carl Rogers (1902-1987) and the how he developed what he termed as client centred therapy.

His ideas and those of like-minded others were developed in America and then moved across to the UK. One of these like-minded individuals was Abraham Maslow (1908-1970) also an American psychologist influential in what was known as Third Force psychology. This was a movement that attempted to foster a humanistic approach to psychology, focusing on happiness and well-being. Maslow began as a behaviourist and his main contribution is the hierarchy of needs, a theory of needs that govern the human behaviour.

These psychologists sought to move away from scientific and psychoanalysis approaches; of Freud (1856-1939) an Austrian Jewish doctor, who formulated theory of personality and psychological function, relating it to sexual repression in early childhood and his colleague Carl Gustav Jung (1875-1961). Rogers believed that if a client was fully listened to and heard by the therapist, that they had the resources within themselves to find their own solutions to their problems. Rather than being psychoanalysed and treated, as was the prevailing theory of Freud and his counterparts.

Key concepts and principles of person-centred counselling. The key concepts of the person-centred model are:- The organismic or core self, an innate sense of self that we are born with and is authentically and genuinely us. Conditions of worth, these are the conditions placed on us as children, that influence our beliefs. If we do as is expected of us we will be loved and accepted. Self concept, this is the sense of self that develops according to how we are treated by others. This can conflict with our organismic self, which may lead to issues of incongruence and anxiety.

Actualising tendency, is another key concept, it is the belief that all individuals have the resources, within themselves to grow given the right conditions. Such as Rogers comparison of the potato which he found in his cellar, in very poor conditions and yet it had still sprouted and strived, to find a way to reach the light. As would individuals who had faced adversities and negative situations would find their own unique way towards healing and growth. Locus of evaluation, the external locus of evaluation, is a reliance on externals for guidance and affirmation, characterised by ‘shoulds’ and ‘oughts’ and difficulty making decisions.

The internal locus of evaluation, is the ability to trust our own self and own valuing system, less influenced by others opinions. The main principles of person centred model are the core conditions of empathy, congruence and unconditional positive regard. They are vital for building a safe therapeutic relationship, in which the client can explore fully. How does person-centred counselling, influence the understanding of the development of concept of self? Carl Rogers believed that; ‘clients become empowered to find their own solutions and their own unique, personally meaningful path through life.

’ One theory of his client centred psychotherapy was based on the idea that; ‘every person has within an acorn, able to grow into a certain kind of tree, a blueprint for a unique life’ Rogers worked with many others in developing the idea that clients could heal themselves, if only the therapist provided ‘facilitative’ or core conditions of, ‘empathy, congruence and unconditional positive regard. ’ Rogers used the symbolism of concept of self, being like a plant given water, soil, sun, and fertilizer.

In these optimum or ‘facilitative’ conditions the client concept of self can grow and unfold like the plant. The client would become empowered to undertake their own unique journey of self-awareness and discovery. While negative situations could stunt the person, like the potato left in his cellar, the person would always find a way, through the most challenging and arduous conditions, to reach toward the light. Person centred counselling, fosters a shared sense of humanity between counsellor and client.

It offers an arena of reflection and focusing, on innermost thoughts and feelings; that are rarely tapped into, in ordinary day to day circumstances. Using the simple empathic listening model, first developed by Carl Rogers; during the therapeutic process, the client will hopefully feel fully listened to, valued and respected. This humanistic approach will hopefully influence and promote a positive concept of self. How does person-centred approach inform counselling practice? The work of a person centred counsellor is non directive and non-advisory.

At the core of the approach is the theory and belief that instead of analysing, diagnosing and telling clients what to do, the counsellor instead reflects back to the client, what they have said and encourages them, to continue to look more deeply into their thoughts, feelings and answers. Clients then become empowered to find their own solutions and their own sense of self, meaningfulness and unique path through life. Rogers called this technique “reflective listening” or “empathic listening. ” This along with the other key concepts and core conditions, inform the qualified counsellor’s practice in several ways.

The core condition of empathy and empathetic listening; involves entering into the client’s world/frame of reference and experiences. This means the counsellor, has to depart from their own opinions and feelings, to a certain extent and see the world through their client’s eyes. The core condition of congruence relates to the counsellor’s openness. It informs the counselling relationship, as the counsellor’s integrity and transparency, is intrinsic to an effective working relationship with the client. Congruence from counsellor to client informs the relationship, as it enables perceptions of the client, to be offered supportively.

Unconditional positive regard shown by the counsellor towards their client can assist the therapeutic relationship to flourish. This is in essence the value and respect the counsellor conveys to their client. The client is able to feel safe and free from judgement. UPR is gifted to the client, regardless of their behaviour; they can feel at ease and the freedom to explore their innermost feelings. Key features and comparison of different models, with the person-centred model. Psychodynamic Therapy This model was developed due to the work of Sigmund Freud and many other models have developed from this approach.

It is felt today, that Freud’s approach, leads other practitioners or clients to be cautious of Psychodynamic Therapy. Made up of two Greek word Psyche- spirit or mind and Dynamic which meaning changing/alive. Key features of Psychodynamic therapy:- Freud believed the personality had three parts, which co-exist in each person. The ID this is present from birth and is instinctive, self –centred and primitive. It is seen as inherent in a person’s nature or make up. It holds all our basic impulses of sex and aggression and is governed by the pleasure principle and needs regulation.

Speech on Cyberbullying write my essay help: write my essay help

“Sticks and stones may break my bones but words will never hurt me” is false, words hurt, they scar in fact. Fat, Ugly, Worthless…. ”Why are you even alive, nobody likes you! ” How would you feel if that was your brother or your sister? Words have a big effect on people and can haunt them for the rest of their lives. Everyone knows about cyber bullying but no one ever talks about, well ladies and gentlemen it’s time.

Over 25 percent of adolescents and teens have been bullied repeatedly through their cell phones or the Internet and over 80 percent of teens use a cell phone regularly, making it the most popular form of technology and a common medium for cyber bullying and bullying victims are 2 to 9 times more likely to consider committing suicide. Why make someone feel so worthless that they want to take their own life? Does it give you satisfaction to kill someone inside? Did you know that cyber bullying is not illegal in all the states and the states where it is illegal in it is just covered through school policies?

So if the policy states nothing about school policies you are on your own or if you are already graduated you’re on your own as well. What’s the difference between cyber bullying and bullying but the fact that there is a coward hiding behind a phone or computer? They see cyber bullying as a minor problem; it’s a MAJOR problem! Teens die every day just because one person decided to make their life hell. However with one teen, one message, transmitted from one computer or one phone can start a forest fire. One teen, two teens, three teens, four; Crying on the bathroom floor.

Five teens, six teens, seven, eight, and nine; does it look like they’re really fine? One person can comment on someone’s picture or status then bring people in just so they can laugh along with them. One spark, ignites a flame, one flame starts a fire. Imagine checking your phone and seeing 10 new messages, “Is it true what they are saying about you? ” Imagine sitting alone at lunch because no one wants to be your friend, no one wants to sit with you because rumors say you have diseases. Imagine walking into class and everyone laughing at you or even skipping school just because you don’t want to deal with the same pain every day.

You can’t escape this pain, it’s on your phone, and the internet so it’s with you everywhere you go but you get it ten times worse at school. Cyber bullying and bullying are some of the main reasons for dropping out and excessive absences. Cyber bullying basically drives kids out of school, because they aren’t safe, school should be the one place kids look forward to. Although how can you with an unsafe environment? No one realizes that these comments that people make can stay with someone for the rest of their lives.

It’s really sad, how a beautiful girl can’t see her true beauty, inner and outer because a group of mean girls calls her ugly. It is sad how one boy can over dose on steroids because kids at school call him “scrawny”. So when these kids you bully look at themselves in the mirror they won’t see their potential in the future, they will be looking for the end of them, and they will see themselves as ugly or an outsider just because that’s what you told them. They see the messages you sent and will literally cry themselves to sleep.

You might say “why don’t you just change your number, delete you social networking sites or just avoid your phone all together? ” Well the victims of cyber bullying become addicted and it’s like their stuck in a vortex once they see what people are saying about them they want to keep seeing it, they won’t come out of the vortex. However these people will carry your comments on with them with their rest of the life, it will cause permanent damage, and sometimes the pain is too much to where they take their own life all because you bullied them a couple of years back.

Cyber bullying should be illegal everywhere because cyber bullying is basically murder, your murdering someone mentally and for that there should be MAJOR consequences. So let’s make a stand together against cyber bullying, no one should ever feel worthless to the point to they would rather take their own life then live. If that was your brother or your sister getting bullied on the internet you would stand up for them, well what about these other kids constantly getting bullied who have no one there for them?

You should be the brother or sister they never had. Cyber bullying should be illegal everywhere; in every state and not only through school. By ending cyber bullying we are saving lives, imagine all the kids that have committed suicide that could have been mothers or fathers. Stand up for other but as well as yourself. If you ever feel the need to call a bullying hotline, call them! Bullying lines are absolutely anonymous and they are free! Don’t be afraid to get help or help someone because remember words do hurt, they scar in fact.

Article medication ourselves english essay help: english essay help

In the article “Medicating Ourselves,” Robyn Sarah describes how anti-depressants are being used and advertised. Sarah states that anti-depressants are being used to relieve stress. In addition, Sarah mentions that not only adults are talking anti-depressant pills but also children. Sarah wrote how some children are taking anti-depressants because the teacher of the child recommended to the parent that the child should take the pill. Sarah said that she was no stranger to depression.

Sarah mentions how children are being put on anti-depressants such because they’re high-spirited and physically energetic. I believe if the adult who is going to take the anti-depressants pill has a major issue and it’s recommended by a doctor for the adult to take the pill then the adult should follow the instructions. However, if the adult doesn’t need the usage of anti-depressants then the adult should not use the pill. Anti-depressants pills can get addicting at some point. I think that children shouldn’t be taking anti-depressants pills because they’re too young to be on the pill.

First, people should take anti-depressants only if needed. Many adults that consume anti-depressants pills are treated well and some get cured. Most of the adults consuming the anti-depressants pills are consuming them because they’re stress out and feel lonely. They are adults who need anti-depressants pills who are not taking then and they are likely to commit suicide or become ill. It’s better to let adults take anti-depressants pills rather than seeing them dead. For example my mother takes anti-depressants pills because she has depression.

The anti-depressants pills help my mother feel happy and motivated. However, anti-depressants pills have some side effects to them. Some side effects are dry mouth, dizziness, drowsiness, and increase of heart rate. Second, adults taking anti-depressants pills should be responsible for taking the dose indication. If adults take the wrong amount of dose the medication can harm the body physically and mentally. Anti-depressants pills can get addicting at some point it all depends on how high the dose is and how long has the adult being taking the anti-depressants pills.

I believe doctors should be more careful giving out prescriptions because some adults might be consuming anti-depressants pills the wrong way. Sarah states, “If I swallow a pill to conceal my existential problems-an ‘equanimity’ pill—I may be easier to live with, but I may also be masking the need for some fundamental work to be done. ” I agree with Sarah because anti-depressants pills are not the answer to solving live problems. Adults should learn how to manage their problems without anti-depressants pills.

Third, Parents should be careful while putting their child on anti-depressants pills. I believe that it’s a problem when a parent or a doctor decides to give anti-depressants pills to a child because there are physically energetic. The article mentions that some teacher recommend that children use anti-depressants. Sarah article also states that some teachers are recommending the anti-depressants pills to children for the convenience of them and for the classroom to run more smoothly.

I believe it’s inhumane to give a child anti-depressants pills because of the way the child behaves. Anti-depressants should be taken with caution and with authorization of a doctor. For instants, my cousin is a very hyper kid and gets bored easily. I don’t believe that my cousin needs to consume anti-depressants pills to become calm and patient. My cousin is just acting like a kid her age, there is nothing wrong about her being the way she is. Therefore, anti-depressants pills are not something to play with. It is a drug and it should be taken with responsibility not as a joke.

In conclusion, adults and the parents of the children should be careful when consuming and giving their children anti-depressants pills. Why hard the body with toxics that are not needed. There are adults that actually need anti-depressants pills to be happy and see life as a new perspective. There is nothing wrong to be taking anti-depressant pills but adults should realize that they are side effects to the pill and consequences. My point toward this topic is if the anti-depressants pills are not needed then don’t consume them.

Narrative report about immersion admission essay help: admission essay help

Immersion schools come in many different languages. For example, a Spanish immersion school in Milwaukee has a staff of a Spanish blend of Hispanic backgrounds… Mexican, Nicaraguan, Puerto Rican, Ecuadorian, and Colombian. This enhances mulitculturism. Their curriculum consists of learning reading, language arts, mathematics, science and social studies through Spanish. They begin at the kindergarten level where vocabulary, short sentences, and passive comprehension of Spanish is stressed.

The teacher speaks in Spanish while making use of many visual aids and using a great deal of body language. The children may use English when speaking, but they are encouraged to use Spanish vocabulary and expressions that they are comfortable with. They continue into the first grade where they learn to read in Spanish and are expected to make consistent use of the Spanish expressions, vocabulary and structures. Only the special classes of art, music and physical education are taught in English because these specialists to not speak Spanish.

When the children begin to read in English in the second grade, the many skills that transfer from learning Spanish enable the students to catch up in English reading and writing within one to two years. But considering English is encouraged at home, usually the students catch on quickly. In another immersion school, French is the chosen language. The French language was used to teach language arts, mathematics, and science for half the day; English was used to teach the other subjects during the remainder of the day.

The students in this program worked actively at learning centers situated around the classroom. The students were offered a number of different learning activities at each center and were free to choose from among the alternatives. The projects chosen by the students were usually hands-on activities (for example building models, preparing blueprints or gathering objects) along with doing library research. This way most of the student’s second language learning was brought on by actual physical activity.

The students were encouraged to interact in French by working on projects together or consulting each other as their work progressed. They were expected to make oral and written reports in the second language on the progress of their work. This type of classroom was usually full of activity and students were vocal – chattering away in French. The teachers in these classrooms acted more as consultants and advisors then just standing in front of the classroom talking mostly in French. This varies greatly from other versions of immersion schools that are more teacher centered.

The students in the teacher centered classrooms all worked on the same projects at the same time and in the same way; students were offered less activity based learning and much less individual choice in learning activities. Another difference between classroom oriented teaching and teacher centered classrooms is that the teacher centered program provided a full day of teaching in French, where as the classroom oriented sessions used French for only about forty percent of the entire school day.

Immersion schools are successful in teaching children a second fluent language, whether it be Spanish, French or any other language. The reviews of this kind of language learning has shown that the students perform as well or better then children enrolled in regular public schools in that same neighborhood. Mostly though, immersion schools have shown that language minority students enrolled in this two way immersion programs attain higher levels of academic achievement over the long term than students enrolled in other educations programs within the same district.

There is one common problem with immersion students. The errors in grammar tend to be more abundant then students that learn through the later years in basic instruction in high school. The children that learn in the early years tend to be taught just to speak. They are not corrected on their language skills as often as someone in a high school basic foreign language learning class, but their ability to speak clearly and make full statements without having to translate every single word from their native language English into their foreign language is much more skilled.

It has been found that immersion teaching tends to be entirely meaning oriented and does not pay enough attention to the form of the message. Immersion teachers are told that excessive reliance on grammar instruction and error corrections are to be avoided because this slows down the learning process. Immersion schools seem like the best choice in teaching a child a second language if that is the main priority to the parent. Any child will learn a second language later in high school that can either become something they want to continue or something they struggle through.

Learning another language when you are younger makes it the most meaningful and is the only way to be fluent in a second language. It becomes more and more difficult to attain a second language as you become older. Immersion schools make learning a second language fun, not a chore for the children. It opens up more doors when that child graduates high school with a fluency in a second language and gives them a new outlook on another culture. It just has to be a choice for the child, not a requirement from the parent. How to Cite this Page

Best Buy Analysis computer science essay help: computer science essay help

According to the Best Buy’s corporate website, the company’s “unofficial” mission statement is simple, “We’re a growth company focused on better solving the unmet needs of our customers. ”1 Upon reviewing this statement, our team was motivated to construct a unique plan that expands Best Buy brand and influences new target markets, while also continuing to provide growth and development in Best Buy’s products and services. Our initiative is to develop smaller stores that feature a condensed selection of consumer electronics, these stores will be strategically placed in areas where customers have unmet needs.

The products, services, and staff offered will, high quality and knowledgeable service. These condensed stores will focus on the newest and most popular consumer electronics for our youthful audience. Additionally, through these operations, customers will continue to receive helpful information and technological services. These stores will be primarily located in towns with an influx of consumer’s aged 18-30. Our strategy involves targeting college students and their parents. Our customers will still be provided the “Best Buy Renew Experience” with a reputable and knowledgeable staff that can any questions about products and services.

To reinforce out strategy we have provided pricing strategies, estimating the expected rate of return, and other ratios. Our strategy involves expanding Best Buy locations and offerings; reaching a new customer segment, create a new, and powerful revenue stream. As with any new venture, however, there are many risks that our team had to acknowledge. Situational Analysis About Best Buy Best Buy Co. , Inc. (NASDAQ: BBY) together with its subsidiaries is a multinational retailer of consumer electronics, entertainment products, small and major appliances, and cellular phones. Best Buy currently operates on a global scale; its international operations include the U. S. , Canada, China, Europe, and Mexico. This corporation has a multitude of products and services under eleven brand names: Best Buy, Five Star Appliances, Future Shop, Magnolia Audio Video, The Carphone Warehouse, Best Buy Mobile, Audiovisions, and Pacific Sales. Best Buy also offers technology services; this includes support, repair, troubleshooting and installation through the Geek Squad brand.

 Best Buy is currently headquartered in Richfield, Minnesota and has approximately 165,000 employees worldwide and has 4,370 total stores operating worldwide. 2 Best Buy operates with a corporate vision stating, “People, Technology, and the Pursuit of Happiness. ” This vision represents the core values of Best Buy. This company invests in its people, from “unleashing the power” of their employees, to maintaining a clear focus on relationships with customers, vendors, and shareholders alike. Best Buy also remains focused on capturing the market by providing the newest consumer technology.

Best Buy understands the products they sell and the services they provide connect the world. Best Buy additionally, strives toward the pursuit of happiness; this corporation has the unique ability to make its people happy. 2 Best Buy presents a great place to work, and happy workers make customers happy. Correspondingly, Best Buy’s is also influenced by its corporate values that guide the company actions and affect its company image. These values include: 1. ) Have fun while being the best, 2. ) Learn from challenge and change, 3. ) Show respect, humility, and integrity, and 4. ) Unleash the power of their people.

3 Best Buy has business objectives to grow in market share, connect digital solutions, international growth, and to operate as an efficient and effective enterprise. Brief History Best Buy began its operations in 1966, Richard Schulze and Gary Smoliak founded Sound of Music Inc. Originally, this company started as a car audio specialty store, however, in 1971; Schulze bought out Smoliak and began expanding the stores retail to electronics. By the early 1980s, Schulze broadened the product line to include consumer products such as appliances and VCRs to access a wider customer base.

4 After almost 20 years of steady operations, Sound of Music officially adopted the name Best Buy and launched its first superstore in 1983. The super store concept allowed Best Buy to expand rapidly between the years of 1984 and 1987. Additionally, Best Buy became publicly traded in 1985. In that short amount of time Best Buy’s operations went from eight stores to twenty-four and resulted in its sales jumping from $29 million to $240 million. 4 The super-store concept allowed Best Buy to differentiate itself from apart from its competitors.

Additionally, during this transition Best Buy took its sales staff off commission, reducing the competitive nature of the sales staff. This combination of super stores and non-aggressive sales staff was crucial to Best Buy’s becoming the second largest consumer electronics retailer in the U. S. by 1993. 4 Best Buy continued to expand aggressively in the following years and found itself in a significant amount of debt in 1995. By 1997, the company’s earnings dropped significantly; ultimately Best Buy realized it had expanded too quickly.

After such losses the company initiated a massive makeover, scaled back operations and limited the expansion of new stores. 4 After many successful and steady years of operations Best Buy continued to dominate the consumer electronics market. In 2000, Best Buy launched its website, to compete with online competitors and has been somewhat successful in ecommerce ever since. By 2004 Forbes Magazine named Best Buy Company of the year. 2008 was a critical year for the economy, however Best Buy remained in control of the market and was the leader of consumer electronic sales by March 8, 2009.

Best Buy was the biggest player in the consumer electronics industry, however in 2010 the consistent decline in household wealth, rising unemployment rates and unclear economic conditions resulted in low household disposable income. 6 The recession that followed the 2008 market crash caused a slow recovering economy and left individuals with less money to spend on consumer electronics. In December 2010, Best Buy reported a decline in profit, and a decline in its market share. Best Buy insisted these problems resulted because of promotional timing, consumer caution, category weakness, and competition from discounters.

In July of 2011 Best Buy was trading at an all time low, and shares continued to fall. The competitive nature of online sales was causing immense pressure on Best Buy’s market share. 5 Best Buy Today 2011 to 2012 was an unfortunate year for Best Buy. Early into 2012 Best Buy’s profit margin was at an all time low -10. 40%. In August of 2012 Best Buy reported a 91% plunge in profit. Best Buy’s earnings fell from $128 million in 2011 to $12 million in late 2012. 7 Best Buy has also had significant changes within their corporate structure from 2011 to 2012. In 2011 Best Buy lost its Chief Executive Office Brian Dunn, a company success story.

Dunn rose through the ranks from a store salesman to a top executive in his 28 years with the corporation, however after allegations that it was his leadership that caused Best Buy to loose online market-share from competitors, he left the company. 8 In his absence, Director Mike Mikan was named interim CEO for the remainder of the 2011 year. Additionally, Mr. Schulze, Best Buy’s biggest shareholder and founder, resigned as chairman in 2012. 9 Since then, Best Buy has slowly flourished once again under superior management. The company has implemented new innovative concepts in its stores, expanded domestically and internationally.

In early 2013 Best Buy still had a negative profit margin; -8. 86%, however, as of July Best Buy noticed improvements in overall market share. 5 Thus far into 2013, this global corporation has had revenues of $ 45 million, prior to the upcoming and highly profitable holiday shopping season. Financially, Best Buy has been successful in 2013. According to the Wall Street Journal analysis Steven Russolillo, “The stock is up 185% this year as the big-box retailer’s turnaround plans have taken shape much faster than Wall Street anticipated. Best Buy is the S&P 500? s second-best performer this year. ”8 Best Buy Co., Inc. (BBY) – NYSE January 2013 – November 2013 – This chart, provided by Yahoo Finance shows Best Buy’s substantial growth since 201210 Best Buy’s New Leadership and Goals In August 2012, Best Buy named Hubert Joly as its new chief executive. Mr. Joly, assumed the CEO and president role in early September. He resigned as CEO of hospitality and restaurant giant Carlson for the Best Buy position. 9 Mr. Joly, initiated the Renew Blue strategy for Best Buy. This initiative addresses the significant changes needed in Best Buy’s operational goals. 9 Hubert Joly, Best Buy president and CEO, commented,

“In November at our investor meeting, we talked about the two problems we had to solve: declining store sales and declining operating margins. Since that time, the resolution of these two problems has become our Renew Blue rallying cry and the organization’s goals and objectives have been prioritized accordingly. While we are clear there is much more work ahead, we have made measurable progress since we unveiled Renew Blue last year, including near flat comparable store sales, substantive cost take outs, and better-than-expected earnings in the past three consecutive quarters” 9.

Hubert Joly’s Renew Blue Strategy for Best Buy3 Additionally Joly discussed his Renew Blue Strategy financially, “During the second quarter (2012), we continued to make substantial progress on our Renew Blue priorities. This progress included (1) driving a more than 10% increase in Domestic comparable online sales; (2) improving our Net Promoter Score; (3) enriching our retail customer experience through the rollout of our Samsung Experience Shops and Windows Stores; (4) piloting our “buy online – ship from store” initiative in 50 stores; and (5) eliminating an additional $65 million in annualized costs.

” Best Buy’s Organizational Structure Best Buy’s organizational structure is designed to maximize efficiencies across a multitude of business units and service areas, support new business initiatives, advance future digital strategies, and enhance business unit performance. Overall, Best Buy has a newly established structure, which most likely attributes to its recent changes in strategy and leadership. Best Buy’s corporate governance is comprised of the Board of Directors and Corporate Officers. 11 Best Buy’s Board of Directors Hatim A. Tyabji Chairman of the Board, Best Buy Co. , Inc.

Director Since April 1998 Hatim A. Tyabji has served as a Director since April 1998; as Chairman? of the Audit Committee since June 2002 and as Chairman of? the Board since June 2012. Mr. Tyabji has served on a number of other public and private company boards? in enterprise software, payment processing and wireless technologies. He holds a B. S. and M. S. in Electrical Engineering and a M. B. A. Mr. Tyabji is? a graduate of the Stanford Executive Program and was awarded an? honorary doctorate by the State University of New York. 11 Bradbury H. Anderson Former CEO, Best Buy Co. , Inc. Director Since March 2013

Bradbury H. Anderson rejoined Best Buy’s Board as a director in 2013 after retiring in June 2010. Prior to his retirement in 2010, he served as a director since August 1986 and was also Best Buy’s Vice Chairman. Furthermore, Anderson served as Best Buy’s Chief Executive Officer from June 2002 until June 2009, having previously served as President and Chief Operating Officer since April 1991. Anderson’s longevity with the company gives him substantial knowledge of Best Buy’s unique company culture and offers a valuable perspective as the former CEO of a Fortune 100 company with global operations.

11 Lisa M. Caputo EVP of Marketing & Communications, The Travelers Companies, Inc. Former CEO of Citigroup Women & Co. Director Since January 2009 Lisa M. Caputo has extensive experience in politics, media, non-profit organizations and global for-profit companies in the entertainment, media and financial services industries. Caputo brings exceptional leadership, marketing, branding, communications, government affairs, community relations and corporate social responsibility understanding to the board.

Caputo earned degrees from Brown University, where she also serves on the Advisory Council on Media Relations, and Northwestern University, where she serves on the Medill School Board of Advisers. 11 Russell P. Fradin President & CEO, SunGard Director Since April 2013 Russ Fradin brings a wealth of experience to Best Buy. His background in operations, streamlining cost structures, executive compensation and strategic consulting are valuable to Best Buy as it continues the Renew Blue transformation. Mr.

Fradin is the President and Chief Executive Officer of SunGard, a leading software and technology services company, serving approximately 25,000 customers in more than 70 countries. Mr. Fradin holds a degree from the Wharton School of the University of Pennsylvania and an MBA from Harvard Business School. 11 Kathy J. Higgins Victor Founder & President, Centera Corporation Director Since November 1999 Kathy J. Higgins Victor brings forth an extensive knowledge in executive development, human resources, and succession planning to the company.

As Chairwoman of the nominating committee, Victor holds a critical role in helping to shape corporate governance for the company while ensuring the board has optimal composition. Most recently, Victor led the efforts to identify and select Best Buy’s new Chief Executive Officer, Hubert Joly. Victor received a degree from the University of Avila in Kansas City, Missouri. 11 Hubert Joly Chief Executive Officer, Best Buy Co. , Inc. Director Since September 2012 Since 2012 Hubert Joly has been the Chief Executive Officer and a member of its Board of Directors. Hubert was implemented for his track record of successful turnarounds.

He is described as a strategic thinker with deep financial expertise. Hubert also has global experience leading large, international employee groups. Over the past 15 years, Joly has developed growth in the media, technology and services sectors. 11 David W. Kenny Chairman & CEO, The Weather Company Director Since September 2013 David W. Kenny was appointed as a director on Best Buy’s Board of Directors in September 2013. Kenny has served since January 2012 as the chairman and chief executive officer of The Weather Company, the leading provider of weather forecasts and information.

In 1997, Mr. Kenny founded and became the chief executive officer of Digitas, Inc. , a provider of integrated strategy, technology and marketing solutions for internet-based, e-commerce companies. Kenny’s success it attributed to his technology knowledge. 11 Sanjay Khosla Retired EVP & President, Kraft International Commercial Director Since October 2008 Sanjay Khosla provides Best Buy with a strong background in multi-national operations and transformational leadership, as well as a deep knowledge of branding and consumer marketing. Mr.

AP World my essay help uk: my essay help uk

What factors contemporaneous observers attributed the rise and fall of the Muslim empires? which factors made them successful, which factors weakened empires? Discuss overall strengths and weaknesses additional documents to help access rise and fall of Ottomans, Safavids, Mughals? Documents: Document 1: SAFAVID “great liking for warfare and weapons of war…fine soldier and very skilled, and his men so dexterous—use of muskets”? ”realm extended and soldiers receive pay all year” ?

Paul Simon, missionary to Safavid Court of Shah Abbas The Great in the city of Isfaha, 1605—visitor to Safavid court, therefore perhaps biased in treatment of soldiers and men? court has only the best of the best. Plus biased towards Europe, therefore men are “little behind our men in Europe. ” ? success of the empire was its treatment of the recruited slave youth into the army and bureaucracy? backbone of army and loyal to Abbas I. Document 2: MUGHAL Revenues collected “3,960.

3 million dams” while expenditures were “3784. 2 million dams”, a good “187. 4” on the imperial household itself, another 359 for the central military establishment and an astounding 3237. 8 on the imperial nobility. ? most of the population in India lived in poverty, the splendor of the regime mostly the Mughal nobility. ?Bureaucracy and army grown bloated and corrupt, peasants and urban workers have lower living standards? warfare (Aurangzeb) and elaborate architecture (shah Jahan) cost empire against Invaders.

Document 3: OTTOMAN “considers each case on its own merits”—“no distinction is attached to birth among the Turks”? ”honors, high posts and judgeships are the rewards of great ability and good service”: meritocracy in Suleiman the Magnificent’s court: Ottoman Empire has freedom of religion, prevents rebellions from conquered territories. Many advisors to the Sultan, religious scholars, legal experts, dhimmis (people of the book)? underneath ruling class also existed a sizeable merchant and artisan class? however Busbecq, the Hapsburg Ambassador visited the Ottomans during their “golden age”, and Suleiman himself killed his own son when he was afraid of a conspiracy (perhaps very good at hiding corruption? fall of empire increase when Ottoman bureaucracy grows corrupt anyway Document 4: MUGHAL “spend much time in the Hall of Worship in the company of learned men and sheiks…Sufi’s obscenities…learned monks from Europe…Christianity…religion of [Zoroaster], yogis”–> written by opponent of religious policies, therefore biased in Akbar’s openness to religion and could have dramatized his meetings with different religions.

Akbar fostered tolerance for all religions and wished top remove distinctions between Muslims and Non-Muslims in empire (din I llahi), however by the end of the 16th century, relations between religions worsened, causing conflict that would attribute to the Hindu-Muslim enmity (empire decline) Document 5: MUGHAL “have an authority almost absolute over the peasantry…nothing can be imagined more cruel and oppressive than the manner in which it is exercised” –lived in Ottoman Empire, India, foreign employee of Mughal emperor and French? easily could have been biased and fed-up with the many officials that made peasants and laborers work their lands for the oppressive demands? caused peasant uprisings and flights that resulted in abandonment of cultivated lands that led to social dislocations that further drained the empires resources—contributed to both the fall of the Ottoman and Mughal empire. (for Mughal empire: peasant uprisings and revolts by muslims and hindu princes in the north? growing autonomy of local leaders) Document 6: OTTOMAN “foreign commerce of the Turks is comparatively trifling…

They have few bills of exchange, or any of the modes of transacting business… the watchful avarice of the government produce upon commerce, are striking” ? british consul and merchant (Europeans have better money standards/trade networks) therefore likely to be biased against the Ottoman Turks and their methods of trade; Ottoman Turks are filled with merchant and artisan classes, therefore “greed” is likely to be abundant throughout the empire00> government inspecters employed to ensure standard weight were used and would also regulate the entry of apprentice artisans and quality of goods produced—overall trafe was supposed to have been incredibly good, despite Eton’s commentary, but the ottoman wealthy soon did become corrupt and in need for more expensive goods, leading to the demise of the empire Document 7: SAFAVID “monarch was effeminate and inefficient…intoxication of absolute power…love of wine, in which this prince often indulged to excess, was the cause of all the evils of his reign”? “to the public officers of government he was severe” –the ambassador to the Safavid Court was British, and during the mid-1600s was when England was still undergoing religious conflicts from the earlier 15th century—most likely religious, therefore could have dramatized the account of Shahs Safi and Abbas the II’s indulgence.

Overall, however, the practice of confining the princes to the atmosphere of luxury and intrigue that permeated the court led to a sharp fall in the quality of Safavid rulers. The imperial administration declined, factional disputes and rebellions shook the empire, and the Safavids had little to gain from their treasury? besieged by Afghani tribes Document 8: OTTOMAN “poor peasants should not be troubled”? For it has been said that the basis of the ruler’s system is the man of consequence, and the raising of troops requires the paying of ready money by the Treasury…. granting of justice and the punishment of oppressors”—Turkish official, biased towards the Sultan? in the early centuries, Ottoman sultans were capable (effective administration and tax relief for people annexed to empire; regulation of trade was helpful to economic prosperity of empire, but growth of corruption among ottoman officials leads to regional and local officials obtaining revenue for own purposes + oppression of poor = fall of Ottoman empire; overall fall due to growing problems at the center of imperial administration Additional Documents that could help would be accounts from local leaders on the treatment of peasants, more accounts of expenditures throughout the empires, accounts from a non-muslim leader in the government, a military leader who had risen through meritocracy

Nomads and their effects on China and Egypt college application essay help online: college application essay help online

Nomads have been known to roam the eastern hemisphere since the beginning of time. The nomadic people and their incursions had affected China and Egypt both, however there impact varied greatly from region to region. China and Egypt both share that the nomads brought chariots to either region and cultural diffusion, but they differ in the fact that in Egypt most people were forced to become nomadic and driven out of their homes, while China did not. The nomads of China and Egypt mainly brought cultural diffusion to each region.

From each place the nomads traveled from, apiece of that culture got incorporated into China and Egypt, bringing new ideas, and improving society. Chariots were also a similarity that the nomads brought to both China and Egypt. Mainly nobles, and the military used the chariot as a way of transportation. The chariot was also a way of showing social hierarchy, and also improved warfare tactics. In warfare tactics both regions greatly adopted the use of archery (cross bow) because of the chariot.

The chariot was a mobile archery platform, and also great for protection since there wasn’t much armory in either region at the time. Not only did the chariot improve warfare tactics, it brought new hunting games and races to the regions, as more peaceful and pleasurable events. These similarities greatly impacted and improved the great societies of China and Egypt. The effects of the nomads and their incursions on China and Egypt differed in many ways. The Chinese living near the Yellow River had to become nomadic due to agricultural reasons and because of incursions with the nomads.

Then, while in Egypt the nomadic life style was forced upon them. If they did not believe in the nomadic ways or “convert” they would be kicked out of their homes as a threat or way of showing nomadic power. Due to the Chinese becoming nomadic because of agricultural reasons and incursions, many issues formed between the non-nomadic Chinese people and the nomadic Chinese people. For 2,000 years the nomads harassed, invaded, and even conquered the settled agricultural civilizations of the Chinese empire causing many unnecessary incursions. Counter to that the nomad people helped flourish the Egyptian life style along the Nile, raising its population tremendously. They started to make large farms, increasing irrigation over time, and then because of the improvement of irrigation they no longer needed farms. When there weren’t as many farms because of irrigation, people started to gear towards specialized jobs, truly forming the Egyptian civilization by improving writing.

Lastly one other difference of the effect of nomadic people and their incursions on both Egypt and China was, in China the nomadic people concentrated on herding their animals, and in Egypt not so much. They truly focused more on herding in china rather than Egypt, because of the geographical region, where irrigation was not promising. I think the differences between the way the nomads affected China and Egypt were do to the way the different empires were run. The governments were ran differently, there for making it tough for the similar attributes the nomads brought hard to affect them both in the same way.

Mainly due to clime, government, and history there is no way the nomads could impact China and Egypt in the same way. In the end whether the effect of the nomads and their incursions were similar in both China and Egypt or different, those attributes that were brought to the societies by the nomads helped form those two top regions today. Student name: ___________________ AP Generic Rubric Comparison Essay Basic core Competence Requirements Points 1. Has acceptable thesis. Addresses comparison of the issues or themes specified. 2.

Addresses all parts of the question, though not necessarily evenly or thoroughly. (Addresses most parts of the question: for example, deals with differences but not similarities) 3. Substantiates thesis with at least five pieces of appropriate historical evidence. (Partly substantiates thesis with appropriate historical evidence) 4. Makes at least two relevant, direct comparisons between / among societies (at least one similarity and one difference) 5. Analyzes at least one reason for a similarity or difference identified in a direct comparison

Coordinate business resources assignment help sydney: assignment help sydney

What is the link between resource acquisition and quality outputs? High quality inputs with constant monitoring and controls equals high quality outputs. By having a sound action plan, the necessary processes for a smooth running project can be developed. This involves agreeing on expectations, budgets, suppliers and skilled staff with appropriate training to name a few. 4. Are the customers for the outputs of a team/section/division/plant different from the customers for an organisation? Explain. No. They all expect a quality item/solution on time and within budget.

They both have needs that they need to have met and are dependent on your leadership skills to ensure this happens. Having said that, external customers usually have agreed on an output and signed off with a contract. It is my experience, that internal people can often ‘move the goal post’, and internal customers should be tied down with a similar type of agreement. Assessment Activity 2 1. What might the consequences be of failing to involve a wide range of people in resource planning? It would be a foolish planner to think that they ‘know it all’.

The involvement of others with relevant skills and knowledge means that opportunities are not missed and over expenditure or underestimation of requirements does not occur. By not consulting with a rich knowledge base available, it could lead to average approaches not being replaced with exceptional ideas. 2. When planning resource use and acquisition what methodologies can be used to consult with customers, other stakeholders and employees? Organising meetings with customers/clients, stakeholders and employees to determine agreement, expectations, best practice and availability.

Also the use of surveys and questionnaires, both new and historical, and analysing the resulting data. Reviewing historical information of a similar plan with similar resource requirements allows a view of changing requirements and the advancements made in technology. Assessment Activity 3 1. Explain how procedures can support effective resource management. By having procedures in place, such as requisitioning, recording, and reporting, a greater control of the flow and use of resources can be kept. This helps eliminate over ordering, waste and theft.

By maintaining control of resources, future requirements can be estimated and ordering to meet future project demands can planned for. In the case of capital expenditure items, the asset register can also be checked for the location of major resources, or decisions made on the acquisition of extra resources. 2. Create a procedure that an organisation could implement for their employees to submit a resource proposal – proposed resource purchase or expenditure item. -Assess the current situation and evaluate the need for the resource.

Gather data -Cost vs. benefit evaluation -Risk assessment, highlighting if necessary the benefits of change/upgrade -Recommendation -Present a report with all written evidence pointing out the need for acquisition/change Include: Quotes (3 if possible, including preferred supplier, if available) Alternatives (items or procedures) Impact of non-acceptance (to company, safety, morale, production, profit etc. ) Assessment Activity 4 1. Why is hiring the right people for the job a critical factor for resource management?

The right selection to meet the job requirement will assist in maintaining a quality output. The wrong selection can cost time and money, as well as often causing dissention or low morale in current staff, where their expectation of the new hire is not met. As with any resource management, current stakeholders have a vested interest in the correct acquisition. The employer must also be aware that they have also specified the job correctly, so that new hires personal goals and objectives can be met and that they can see a growth path within the organisation. 2.

How does measuring and monitoring individual or work group performance link with the management of effective business resources? Measuring and monitoring performance works for both the organisation and the individual. Evaluations can highlight gaps and allow for the opportunity for training, coaching or mentoring. A ‘poor’ evaluation in some areas should not be seen as failure, but rather a path to improvement, which offers employees motivation and further commitment to the organisation. This measuring and monitoring can also help with group performance, by evaluating where there is a skill gap that cannot be filled by current staff (usually through constraints of time or commitment to other projects), and needs to be filled with employment of extra resources. It may be found after full analysis of incoming data that, rather than physical resources, equipment change/upgrade is a better option. The saying ‘You cannot control that which you cannot measure’ should be observed, so that calculated, rather than opinionated, decisions can be made in the arena of resource management. Assessment Activity 5 1.

How important is it to the achievement of objectives, targets and goals is the management of human resources? Explain. By managing human resources effectively, and ensuring that teams remain motivated, the successful execution of goals is almost guaranteed. Praising achievements, monitoring their actions and making sure they have the necessary skills and tools to perform their tasks leads to a happy, loyal and productive team. This is achieved through good leadership skills and it can be seen in organisations that nurture these values have teams that become a formidable force, always seeking improvement for their own and companies benefit.

2. What is likely to happen if information is not freely shared in an organisation, or is not available when it is needed? The first casualties of secrecy and non-disclosure in an organisation are mistrust, fear, disloyalty and resentment. This in turn leads to low morale, stress, anger and mistakes. These are effects directly affecting employees. The organisation then suffers from costly ill-informed decision making, unnecessary reproduction of tasks, loss of business and poorly motivated teams, to name a few. Assessment Activity 6 1. Why must stock be controlled and, if required, rationalised?

To provide a well-managed production/order plan by having stock when needed and not holding onto costly unused stores. Excess stock is a cost to organisations, tying up finances for other projects, reducing supply and profitability. It is as important to not over-order as it is to under-order. Over-ordering (for instance where ‘use by dates’ must be strictly adhered to) causes waste and financial loss. Stock control and monitoring usage helps to control this. Rationalisation on inventory is essential to ensure that organisational costs (of holding excess inventory), does not lower profit and returns on investment capital.

2. What inventory management systems are commonly used in organisations? There are many available, depending on the type and size of the organisation. JIT (Just in time) is a method where goods arrive when needed rather than be held in inventory. This is a double edged and often criticised system as some companies abuse it and cause high cost to the supplier as they have to ‘wear’ the cost of warehousing. It is not uncommon in today’s environment for penalties to be imposed for every day commitment is not met (both to the company ordering and the supplier).

Fixed point re-ordering is usually a software solution that triggers an order when certain reduction in inventory is realised. This can be used in supermarkets through to large production environments needing raw materials to produce their own products. Fixed interval recording is similar to the above but is triggered on a time line rather than quantity. This type of ordering depends on accurate forecasting and analysis by qualified staff. Economic order quantity (EOQ) is based on a calculation using the 4 costs involved in inventory and determining the square root.

This is established by determining (twice the forecast demand multiplied by ordering cost) divided by (the value price multiplied by the carrying cost of total inventory) and then calculating the square root of the answer. This can be used to balance purchase quantity against ordering and carrying costs and determining the most economic ordering size. 3. How can an organisation ensure quality outsourced resource supplies? Firstly by research, both internal and external, as to the satisfaction of performance and supply by others who have dealt with them.

After a supplier is decided the ongoing relationship must be maintained. By involving suppliers in the quality monitoring loop, whereby a relationship is built to mutual benefit, where they are preferred supplier, ensuring they understand your requirements and want to maintain a ‘preferred supplier’ status. This is mutually beneficial as they have continuity of custom and the organisation is usually ensured discounts through their loyalty along with products that meet their predetermined standards. 4. What action can be taken to build effective, quality-based relationships with suppliers?

Regular meetings with suppliers where a free flow of information is exchanged. Outlining to them your on-going needs, and conversely listening to some of their concerns regarding dealing with your organisation. This could involve late/short deliveries, unreasonable expectations or continuing late payment. Whatever concerns, on whichever side must be addressed swiftly to enable a continued mutually beneficial relationship. 5. What are the benefits of building such relationships? Apart from saving an organisation time and lowering costs, a good relationship usually enhances quality control, reliability and trust.

The supplier respects and understands the organisational needs, often offering better or cost effective solutions through this understanding. 6. Is it best to use external suppliers with whom you have built effective relationships, or should you constantly shop aroud for the cheapest deal? Explain. Yes. However, activities and advancements in the chosen sector must always be monitored. Better solutions/models may be available that your supplier cannot offer. In the case of solely monitoring price, it should be stated to your current preferred supplier to see if he can match or better it.

This does not mean that you should abandon a supplier over a few dollars, but in the case of a major asset, the alternative must be considered if it is substantially lower (say 7% of a million dollar purchase). Assessment Activity 7 1. Explain how resource management is related to quality management and to continuous improvement. Poor quality management systems result in resource wastage. By having good resource management, increases in organisational effectiveness and profitability are seen, standards are met across all relationships, resources meet and match requirements.

Continuous improvement raises the potential for increased profit and market share, and enhances the company’s ability to hold onto a competitive edge. These issues, interacting, overall would be the result of good quality management systems being in place and constantly examined. 2. Describe a situation with which you are familiar where you encountered a resourcing problem. What impact did it have on you being able to achieve your goals? How did you overcome the problem? Problem: A large mining company moved the deadline for completion of a Reclaimer.

This was moved forward from the agreed date that had previously been signed off. The initial impact was the time taken in contract re-negotiation and adjusting the project plan. Solution: The project plan was adjusted and a new critical path circulated to all management involved. More physical resources were employed (from a large company resource database) and other resources obtained through the company’s asset register and through hire from trusted suppliers. A committed core team of managers, with teams that respected and trusted them, ensured it happened and the new deadline was met with no impact on the quality of result.

Attitudes to Language free essay help: free essay help

Language clearly plays a major role in all aspects of society. The most obvious is its social role of allowing people to relate to each other in all facets of their lives: to share information, emotions and ways of life. We use language as a means of navigating our daily lives and it plays an integral role in most of our interactions. Perhaps for this reason, French is regarded as an elegant and romantic language, while German is considered to be guttural.

Additionally, ever since mankind evolved into different language communities, it is commonplace for people to adopt various attitudes towards the language(s) spoken by others, as well as towards the dialects of the language they speak. These attitudes are motivated by different factors, including pride in or shame regarding one’s own language, confidence or embarrassment about how one sounds, nationalism and a sense of personal dignity, one’s status and values as well as the prestige some languages are given in international interactions.

A well known attitude is the desire for foreign speech patterns; another is the rejection of certain dialects. People form impressions of your personality, emotional state, geographic origin, education, experiences, age or socioeconomic status from the language you use and the way you use it. We often witness the amusement of an audience when someone speaks in the creole, for not only does the system of sound evoke laughter, but the assumption that the speaker is an uneducated serf is then made.

Ridicule and contempt for the vernacular, creoles and dialects are common responses from some members of society, even within the Caribbean society, where dialects are rich, strong and the first language. Dialects develop under various circumstances as well as geographical locations and are varieties of languages. A creole could be a dialect within a language. Because of our history, people of the region tend to place a high premium on the standard languages (the language of power and economic might). Many people believe that upward mobility is largely dependent on one’s ability to fit in with the predominant socioeconomic class, and language is the main signifier of this fit. Many Caribbean writers have described scenarios of people who went overseas, were generally expected to return with a new command of the target language and often demonstrated their new found ‘status’ by emphasizing their foreign accent of ‘twang’. While some might be impressed by the ‘twang’, others view such pretensions with derision.

Attitudes to language may vary from one sector of the society to another and some people demonstrate self-conscious behavior when speaking the standard language. This is largely a result of the fact that in most societies one is often judged on the basis of the variety of language that one speaks. This is even more prevalent in societies with a colonial legacy, like the Caribbean, where certain dialects are associated with the institution of slavery or conquest.

Increasingly, educators are becoming aware that a person’s native language is an integral part of who that person is and marginalizing the language can have severe damaging effects on that person’s psyche. Many linguists consistently make a case for teaching native languages alongside the target languages so that children can clearly differentiate among the codes ( a term used synonymously with language or dialect but generally refers to a linguistic system of communication. A code can also be non-linguistic such as a dress code or code of conduct) and hence be less likely to mix the two.

This approach has been adopted in Haiti, where schools teach both Standard French and French Creole (Haitian) and children are expected to be fluent in both. Additional prominence has been given to Caribbean Creoles with the publication of Creole dictionaries and with the translation of the New Testament from the Christian Bible into French Creole in St. Lucia. A similar project is under way in Jamaica. While attitudes to local dialects have been slowly changing, many people still associate the use of Creole with negative images and believe that its use should be relegated to specific circumstances and occasions.

However, the fact that non-standard language varieties are the most widely spoken in the Caribbean makes them the choice of persons trying to get information to large sections of the society. For example, many advertisers use the Creole language to ensure that their message appeals to most people. At the same time, because of the prestige attached to the standard language, it tends to be the language of choice on formal occasions, like church services. A language variety is usually chosen because of its perceived social functions.

You may have noticed that, the more formal the occasion, the more likely the use of the standard language, while for everyday interaction, popular music or emotional appeals, people tend to gravitate towards the non-standard varieties. You would have noticed that, even in a formal situation, non-standard dialect might be used for anecdotes, to inject humour or in a quotation. In the Caribbean, people switching from one code of language to another, often without thinking.

However, there are times when the use of standard langue would seem totally out of place and would even interfere with semantics. For example, folk stories, folk songs and proverbs seem to lose a certain essence when translated into standard. The role of language as a vehicle for sharing culture is indisputable. Caribbean writers, singers and oral poets have played a major part in fostering acceptance of the Creole languages of the region, by incorporating them into their work and exposing them to the world. Nonetheless, negative attitudes to these languages persist in the minds of many.

Fruit and Pomegranate college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help

According to Mark Twain, “When one has tasted pomegranates, he knows what the angels eat”. The Pomegranate is a fruit considered to have originated in Iran. It has been cultivated since ancient times, and it is imported to the United States from Spain. In many countries this fruit is consumed as a medicine due to its rich content of vitamin C and vitamin K. However, In my house this fruit is not only purchased and consumed because of It’s benefits, but because of its delightful taste, smell, and texture inside. The pomegranate is a delicious and unique fruit, that has to be eaten appropriately in order to enjoy it.

A word that characterizes pomegranate is unique. The first thing you see when grabbing a pomegranate is an attractive shrub or small tree decorating it at the top. The leaves are evergreen, opposite or in rolls of five or six. When the pomegranate is completely open, you can see the shape of a flower, with every leaf covered with red seeds. It looks like a honeycombed has been cut into slices and the honey in this case are the seeds. Also, pomegranates are wide and characterized by the thick, tubular, red petal having five fleshy, pointed sepals forming a vase from which emerge the three to seven crinkled, red, or white petals enclosing the numerous stamens. Pomegranate has a tough leathery skin and it is basically yellow more or less overlaid, with light or deep pink or rich red. The interior is separated by membranous walls and white spongy tissue into compartments packed with transparent sacs filled with tart, flavorful, fleshy, juicy, red, or pink pulps. In each sac, there is one white or red angular soft seed. When is open you can notice that the seeds is the weight of the whole fruit.

The best way a person can enjoy pomegranate is by eating it by hand. Going through the process of de-seeing it makes it more enjoyable. Eating pomegranates can be very messy, so ones have to know how to eat it appropriately. The first step is to make a shallow slit at the top of the pomegranate where the knob/stem is and then, pull the crown of the pomegranate off . When that is done, a bunch of seeds can be seen. Some seeds are going to be red and some pink. Both seeds (red, pink) filled with juice and perfectly united, as it was mechanically formed.

The irresistible smell sort of cranberry is not going to make you proceed with the process of de-ceeding and it’s going to force you eat a seed. Instantly, the sweetness of the juice is going to rapidly passed to your gland making you feel right away the softness of the seed. Then, cut three shallow slits through the outer rind to make large sections. This will make the pomegranate fragments look as divided leaves dressed in white. Finally, submerge the sections in a large bowl of cold water. Break apart the sections underneath the water, separating the seeds from the rind and pith. As you remove the seeds, they will sink to the bottom of the bowl like an anchor on the sea.

When a person eats a pomegranate, he/she remembers how delicious a fruit can be. Eating pomegranate is like eating happiness from a fruit, since the first tablespoon of seeds you take in your mouth, till the last one. By the first tablespoon of seeds you eat, you can taste the tart and sweet flavor of the seeds dancing in your mouth. While you are eating pomegranate the cranberry sort of flavor starts to get all over your lips, making your lips turn red. Each chewed you give, you will feel the different components of the pomegranate. You can feel the juice running in your teeths and tongue, while the soft seeds who no longer have juice hug your grinders. Ones would not want to stop eating it, because every bite taste like heaven.

The fruit pomegranate reminds me of my childhood. When little, my sister and I, used to eat pomegranates every time we went to my grandmother’s house. She always surprised us having a bag full of pomegranates in the table. Every time she visited us, she would come with a bag of this delicious fruit. Also, when my family and I went to hotels in the Dominican Republic, there were always pomegranate juice in the restaurants, and at the bars near the pool areas. Eating pomegranates in my house has always been a tradition, and I will make sure to make the tradition last.

In a nutshell, pomegranate is a fascinating fruit that everyone should try. This fruit can be eating in many ways, but the most popular ways is either making it a juice or eating it by hand. Pomegranates differs from others fruits due to its unique texture inside. Also, pomegranates can be very messy when eating it, so people need to know how to eat it correctly. When one eats pomegranates would not want to stop, because its taste is so delicious and beneficial. With all this being said, Would you like to eat a pomegranate?.

Assignment sandwich blitz essay help 123: essay help 123

1. How would creating a new position between the CEO and the location manager help the business to grow? i. Creating a new position between the CEO (Dalman Smith) and the location managers would help Sandwich Blitz, Inc. grow by freeing up the CEO’s time to focus on the expansion. Currently, Dalman is visiting locations and addressing issues that each shop’s manager has accumulated. If there was an area or regional manager assigned to these existing shops, this manager would be able to address these issues and visit each of the locations as needed.

The regional manager could ultimately take over the training for new locations, as well. The CEO and CFO will be able to look for additional expansion opportunities and look into other strategic decisions such as whether patents or franchising makes sense. This would allow for additional growth of the company. 2. Is promoting an existing manager the best option to fill this position? If not, what is an alternative source to fill the position? i.

Though promoting an existing manager would be beneficial due to the manager’s familiarity with the company, there are several risks that need to be considered. The habits and preferences, whether good or bad, that the particular shop had may be projected onto all of the other shops. You might have the area manager imposing as a rule what should be merely a preference for a particular sandwich shop. Also, the other managers could become jealous and be less inclined to request help or listen to instruction from someone that was recently considered a peer.

An alternative is hiring an individual with regional management experience from the outside and having that individual work with each of the shops for at least a week to become familiar with them. I believe this is the best option. Perhaps Lei Lee, CFO, would have some connections from her days in the insurance industry to contact for potential regional managers. Sometimes hiring someone that you know well and have worked with before turns out to be a good fit. 3. Who within the company should make these decisions? i.

The hiring of the regional manager should be done by both the CFO and the CEO, since both of them are owners and the regional manager will be answering to them. It is important that the philosophy and culture of the company be maintained by the new regional manager, so the owners definitely need to be selective and pour some time and energy into getting the best fit for this position. It would be acceptable to get input from location managers on their take of a potential regional manager, as it is important to keep them happy. The decision for regional manager, though, should remain with the CEO and CFO.

The regional manager will be responsible for addressing issues at the various locations and making decisions that agree with the CEO and CFO’s philosophy. 4. List the levels of authority (management) that Sandwich Blitz, Inc. would have if the new position is created. i. The CEO and CFO are assisted by an accountant and regional manager. The location managers answer to and take issues to the regional manager. The location managers oversee the team supervisors for each location. The team supervisors oversee the team that operates the sandwich shop.

Manage Human resources computer science essay help: computer science essay help

1. Outline the difference between strategic plans and operational plans Strategic plans are the long term plans and goals of an organisation, whereas operational plans are shorter term; more about detailing the day to day operations of the organisation. Operational plans need to keep the strategic goals in mind so that the organisation will reach their longer term goals. HR requirements are necessary both in strategic and operational plans. Within operational plans, the HR strategies are important to enable the employees and human sector of the organisation to function appropriately.

The human element of an organisation must be aware of their roles, adequately trained and treated fairly to ensure they carry out operational tasks. This, is turn, enables the strategic plans to work. 2. Explain how performance management works Performance management is successful when the expectations and obligations of employees align with the strategic plan of the organisation. Performance management should ensure that employees’ behaviour and outputs are consistent with the long term goals of the organisation and that the two complement each other.

If an employee is not meeting the objectives set out by the strategic and operational plans, then it is up to the HR manager to performance manage the employee to fit into these plans or seek employment elsewhere. Therefore, performance management is not only a way to ensure that employees are supporting the organisation towards its strategic goals, but also a way in which an employee can develop skills and learn more about their own career goals. 3. Why do HR personnel need to be aware of relevant legislation?

There is a lot of legislation which HR personnel need to be aware of and it is important that it is enforced and taken into account when making HR decisions. Employees need to be treated fairly and have confidence in the organisation that they work for. This can be ensured if the relevant employment and workplace legislation is followed. If this legislation is not followed, it can also be costly for the organisation in the form of fines and compensation. The legislation which applies to human resource operations are: Fairwork Act 2009 National Employment standards

Long service leave act Superannuation legislation Taxation legislation and fringe benefits Workplace Health and Safety Anti-discrimination legislation Workers compensation The Fair Work Act 2009 establishes a safety net of employee entitlements with the National Employment Standards (NES) and modern awards. In some cases, an employee’s entitlements change to meet the minimum entitlements under the NES, which prevail over any instrument (including former State awards and State agreements) that is less beneficial than the entitlements under the NES.

This means that if an employee is covered by an award, agreement, former State award or State agreement or contract of employment, it cannot provide less than the NES entitlements. Rules relating to other employment matters governed by the Fair Work Act 2009 also apply to those employers and employees new to the national system from 1 January 2010. This includes (but is not limited to): 1 – termination of employment 2 – enterprise bargaining 3 – industrial action 4 – right of entry 5 – general protections 6 – record-keeping requirements. 4. What is the aim of WHS legislation and what responsibilities does it place on employers?

The Occupational Health and Safety Act 2004 is the legislative and administrative measures to improve occupational health and safety in Victoria. The Act sets out the key principles, duties and rights in relation to occupational health and safety. The general nature of the duties imposed by the Act means that they cover a very wide variety of circumstances, do not quickly become outdated and provide flexibility to determine what needs to be done to comply. As an employer you must provide a safe and healthy workplace for your workers and contractors.

This includes: providing and maintaining safe plant(such as machinery and equipment) and safe systems of work (such as controlling entry to high risk areas, controlling work pace and frequency and providing systems to prevent falls from heights) implementing arrangements for the safe use, handling, storage and transport of chemicals (such as dangerous goods and other harmful materials) maintaining the workplace in a safe condition (such as ensuring fire exits are not blocked, emergency equipment is serviceable, and the worksite is generally tidy) providing workers and contractors with adequate facilities (such as clean toilets, cool and clean drinking water, and hygienic eating areas) making sure workers have adequate information, instruction, training and supervision to work in a safe and healthy manner.

An employer must also: adequately monitor your workers’ health (such as providing hearing tests for workers exposed to high noise levels, providing blood tests for workers exposed to lead and monitoring fatigue levels of transport and other workers) keep information and records relevant to your workers’ health and safety (such as records of biological monitoring, asbestos assessments, first aid records and relevant medical information) employ or engage people with the necessary qualifications or expertise to advise you on health and safety issues affecting your workers Consult with employees on matters that may directly affect their health, safety or welfare.

Where the employees are represented by a health and safety representative (HSR), the HSR must also be involved in the consultation nominate a senior management representative (or yourself) to deal with workers and their health and safety representatives in resolving health and safety issues at the workplace provide your workers with information in the appropriate languages about your workplace health and safety arrangements, including the names of those to whom the workers can make an inquiry or complaint. When hiring new employees you should inform them, in writing, of the nature of the work and ask if they have any pre-existing injury or illness that may be affected by the work. You should also inform them, in writing, that failing to notify or hiding a pre-existing injury or illness which might be affected by the nature of the proposed employment, could result in that injury or illness being ineligible for future compensation claims.

Employers must ensure that other people (such as their customers, visitors and the general public) are not endangered by the conduct of your business (for example, by providing protection from falling debris around construction sites, controlling traffic access to your workplace and limiting public access within the workplace). Employers have additional specific obligations if their business involves the: manufacture, importation, transportation, supply, storage, handling or use of dangerous goods design, manufacture, importation, supply, erection or installation of plant manufacture, importation, or supply of substances. Employers also have obligations to: meet particular licensing, registration and certification requirements immediately notify WorkSafe of certain dangerous incidents co-operate with WorkSafe Inspectors omply with Inspector’s Notices and Written Directions issued by Worksafe inspectors Relevant legislation must be included in induction processes for new staff and HR must provide training within the specific areas. Employees should be made aware of their legal rights and responsibilities, as well as their employers. Policies and procedures must ensure to be in line with all relevant legislations, referring to the specific legislative requirements when needed. Policies and procedures must also take into account both emotional and physical health aspects when it comes to WHS legislation. Assessment 3 Project 1 1. I have chosen to undertake delivery of recruitment services for Cooinda Hill.

The services which will be provided are: Development of position descriptions Advertising of vacant positions Interviewing process Induction process The aim of my services will be to recruit professionals as required to Cooinda Hill who fit the needs of the organisation and who can assist Cooinda Hill to reach its strategic goals. Client needs assessment form Client name: Services required (please tick): Development of position descriptions Advertising vacant positions Interview process Induction process Performance reviews Performance management Please answer the questions below relevant to your services required. Do you currently have position descriptions for all positions within the organisation?

I will be creative in the advertising medium used to try to attract relevant possible appointees and promote the less tangible attributes of the positions, such as “tree change” or excellent community facilities and support for the organisation. Timelines Within the first two months all Position Descriptions will be reviewed and a gap analysis done on the current workforce. Succession plans will also be reviewed and considered in the process. A vacant position will be advertised within two weeks of the vacancy being identified. Closing date for applications will be three weeks from advertising date. First round interviews will be held within one week from closing date of applications. Applicants will be informed of outcome within one week.

The second round interviews and reference checks will occur within one week of this. Successful applicants will be informed within one week of last interview. An appointment will be made approximately 4 weeks after closing date of applications. This may dependent on availability of applicant. If the process is to take longer than 4 weeks, this will be only considered in conjunction with Cooinda Hill. KPIs Adherence to the above timelines Consultation with Cooinda Hill at times indicated Successful appointment of people into vacant positions Adherence to legislative requirements Provision of services for 12 months Provision of services as outlined in this proposal

Vision and Scope Document for E-Learning argumentative essay help online: argumentative essay help online

E-Learning can cover a spectrum of activities from supporting learning, to blended learning (the combination of traditional and e-learning practices), to learning that is delivered entirely online. Whatever the technology, however, learning is the vital element. E-Learning is no longer simply associated with distance or remote learning, but forms part of a conscious choice of the best and most appropriate ways of promoting effective learning. Therefore, the proponents decided to create an E-Learning System that will helped the School of Mount St.

Mary in providing a good and better education for their students. Where in the students can take online exams, quizzes and activities. The System will enhanced the old process of Learning making it more convenient and user-friendly rather than taking exams manually. Well, in some cased Time is highly essential in the lives of the students. Thus with an E-Learning System even when the student was feeling ill at the comfort of their home. Still, they can have the feeling of a relief upon taking the said exams through online. 1. 2 Business Opportunity

The proposed system (E-Learning) will fit in the market trends especially when a company or a school was having some changes in their traditional teaching or traditional approach. This system will be valuable to the project sponsors because it adds value to existing teaching method of SMSM and develop it in the most productive way of E-Learning. 1. 3 Business Objectives and Success Criteria The business objectives and success criteria has no exact measure, but the system software will give the SMSM a high emblem education for all their students 1. 4 Customer or Market Needs

Specifically, the completed system will satisfy the following requirements: 1. ) The software system will run as an online website for E-SMSM 2. ) The software system will have a log-in for the students and also to the administrator. 3. ) The software system will also provide a registration for the student who doesn’t have an account on E-SMSM 4. ) The software system will have the ability to handle a lot of registration submission. 5. ) The software system will not accept a duplicate account so (one student one account) . 6. ) The software system will give the full access to the administrator in managing the system.7. ) The software system will provide a well description about the School (About SMSM) 8. ) The software system will automatically check the student exam/quiz/activity. 9. ) The software system will also update the student on schedule of exam/quiz/activity through the reminders that was created by the admin. 1. 5 Business Risks No major business risk identified through out the development of the software system. 2. Vision of the Solution 2. 1 Vision Statement Students of School of Mount St. Mary are increasingly using ‘always-connected’ devices to surf the web, to download apps, read and interact with others.

Meanwhile Students must now also embrace personalized and collaborative learning. In that way the E-Learning System will provide an effective quality of education for all the students for them to become an efficient learner and more progressive. 2. 2 Major Features Functional requirements: 1. ) Student must Log-in 1. 1 The student should input his/her Student_ID and Password 1. 2 The system will have validation for login. 2. ) About SMSM 3. 1 The student can view all the details about SMSM 3. 2 The administrator can change some of the details 3. ) My Subject 4. 1 The student can take exam/quiz/activity4. 2 The student can also download the reviewer 4. 3 The administrator prepares exam/quiz/activity/reviewer for the student 4. ) My Profile 5. 1 The student can view and manage some information in his/her own account settings 5. 2 The student can also view his/her grades 5. ) Settings 6. 1 The administrator can Log-in 6. 1. 1 The administrator can view all the activities that goes around the system 6. 1. 2 The administrator can also manage the whole system 6. 2 The help will give some guide or more information about how to use the system Non-functional requirements 1. ) Design to be created in PHP.

2. ) Written as an online project using PHP scripting language. 3. ) It must support large amount of data 4. ) It must support ability to work with different data stores (e. g. Pdf, SQL DB or text file) 5. ) it must support the addition of new components (if needed) 6. ) it must support its end user 7. ) The approximately hardware is 2. 2 GHz of processor and RAM is 4GB 8. ) Code must be readable and understandable 2. 3 Assumptions and Dependencies The software must be compatible with the following MySQL SQL Server 2008 Any web browser (Chrome,Firefox,Internet Explorer) Scope and Limitations 3. 1 Scope of Initial Release An initial release was been planned to serve as a proof-of-concept for the final deliverable product. The initial release will consist of a working demonstration of the framework on which the remainder of the project will be build. This will include: Iteration 1: January 7th 2014 Complete system design for the system . Instructions for installation and integration was created Software Students can participate or take an exams, quizzes and activities online Works only when you’re online or connected to the Internet.

Database integration Testing 3. 2 Scope of Subsequent Releases Iteration 2: January 30th 2014 Suggest more evaluated question on exams Using multiple function on exams answering Unit Testing for all written code Iteration 3: February 15th 2014 Completing the system Supporting the Administrator settings Additional tools in the help or user guide GUI Configuration tool Iteration 4 (time permitting) Learning or exploring the finished system. (E-Learning for School of Mount St. Mary) 3. 3 Limitations and Exclusions The proponents will deliver a working website for (E-SMSM).

And also the Team E-Warriors will take care of everything around the system. 4 Business Context 4. 1 Stakeholder Profiles Stakeholder Major Value Attitudes Major Interests Constraints School Administrator Increased Revenue Influential, business minded see product as avenue to increase market shares richer feature set than competitors; time to market N/A IT Teacher Integration with existing software Desire a product that is intuitive, maintainable, and customizable Good documentation, no undue complexity, and reliability of services N/A Team E-Warriors Students

Educational Value comply to the subject on E-Learning Consider project an opportunity to apply academic and co-op expertise Maintain rules, Participate on the activities Completion of objectives using learned software engineering disciplines E-Learning System(software) must be simple or easy to use 4 months team E-Warriors project duration N/A 4. 2 Project Priorities Dimension Driver (state objective) Constraint (state limits) Degree of Freedom (state allowable range) Schedule Release 1 to be available by 1/7/14 Features 100% of base functionality must be implemented in R1;50 % of features must be included in release 1. 0 Adaptability E-SMSM must be compatible with any web browser and support the other database software system Maintainability E-SMSM must be developed to be easily modified and maintained by Admin Staff Performance E-SMSM must perform the features that needed by administrators and students Staff Team size is 3 Time 4 months 4. 3 Operating Environment The E-Learning System for School of Mount St. Mary will run on a Windows based Computer System and MySQL, it is also compatible with any web browser.

The one essay help from professional writers: essay help from professional writers

Technology advancement through the years have changed people’s lives and opened new horizons. Technology is fast paced and it is becoming more advanced and sophisticated day by day. Game design and production is a fast paced, hit-driven, technology-based field. Hardware used in game consoles and personal computers continues to improve, getting faster and cheaper at a dizzying pace. This new project with increases the computational resources, and a long list of cool features they liked to incorporate.

As it is widely reported across many media, computer and video games are increasingly popular. The computer is one of the toolsused in the upgrading of our technology which is one of the products of high-quality technologies. Information technology plays a big role in economic growth and development worldwide. Computer innovations are rampant but it is not only the hardware component that keeps pace with the fast changing technology, but also the software that underlies it. Now, mobile games are part of rapidly evolving mobile technology.

Users become interested of the aid of mobile graphics, which are used to create design and mobile animation. Many individuals are fond of playing mobile games to spend their free time. Android is a fast emerging platform for cell growth and have a really fast rising mobile market; this raises the bar as one needs to be technically sound and imaginatively progressive to seize some of its share. Every single day, everyone sees new and fresh innovative ways on how an organization can make it big by the social media markets. Project Context

Android is a fast emerging platform for cell growth and have a really fast rising mobile market; this raises the bar as one needs to be technically sound and imaginatively progressive to seize some of its share. Every single day, everyone sees new and fresh innovative ways on how an organization can make it big by the social media markets. The game will be supported by an android OS that can give knowledge and enjoyment to the users. This game entitled “Aquatic Quest: An Edutainment Android Game” it will be develops not only to entertain but also to test the intellectual ability of user.

Purpose and Description The proposed study introduced a platform which can be used in developing a game. The development of this game provides proofs on the efficiency of using the Android OS, and it serve as an entertainment yet an educational tool, for the players. Aside from fun and entertainment, studies say that playing this kind of game can give anti-aging benefits. Solving a game problem can exercise the player’s mind. This game can help enhance and test the scheme in terms of word gathering. This also teaches young individuals to become a computer literate and help them to improve their concentration.

To the developers, this study enhanced their activity and programming skills using Java Language in developing a mobile game. In the entire development of the game, the developers elaborated every aspects of the study such as design, game play, and interface as well as the software documentations. Furthermore, this study would help the researchers to their future endeavors in the real world-that is outside the school, after their graduation. To the gamers, this mobile game does not isolate from social contact but promotes social interactions. Playing this game develops the learning process in a form of leisure that is entertaining.

To the future developers, this study could serve as an additional reference for those who are interested to develop a mobile game and as a guide for other researchers engaging the same topic. This study can improve the new perceptions of an open platform accessible for carriers and establish an open platform for developers to build innovative mobile applications. But the main beneficiaries of the study are the students, teachers, and researchers as they are provided with pleasant and new kind of technology in mobile activities. Objectives of the Study The general objective of this study is to develop an Educational Game for Android OS.

The following are the specific objectives: To study existing games related to marine life. To develop an android game that is educational, enjoying and entertaining. To test and evaluate the functionality of the developed game as to its: Game Play Game story Game Mechanics Game Usability Conceptual Framework Figure 1 IPO of the Current System Figure 1 shows the Conceptual Framework of the proposed game. The Input shows where to begin the game. At the process the game starts and you should beware of destruction and earn points. As the product, it display the high score and start again.

Scope and Limitations of the Study This proposed study focus mainly in developing a game using Android OS. The developers used Android OS because it is very in demand in the market. Using this OS is very effective for the developer objectives. The game developed to promote a quick thinking, fast analysis, hand-eye coordination and motor skills. The game is platform game type which deals with different platform and obstacle to encounter in each level. The game is made available only for mobile devices which uses the Android platform. Aquatic Quest was designed into 2d computer graphics.

The game application used Java as the programming language, Eclipse as the software development environment, Java and android as the development kits and the Adobe Fireworks as the graphics editor. The game is designed to run on Android devices with version 2. 3 (Gingerbread) or higher. The screen resolution should be 1024 x 600 pixels; the game features are limited on the performance based of the capability of the tablet and its specification to have this game available for the users. The game can only played by a single player and It is non-network game. Definition of Terms

In designing and developing the proposed system, the researcher was able to identify some terminologies that may be useful in order for the client to understand some of the terms that are used here. Technical Terms Technical Terms of the study are the following: Adventure Game- It is a computer-based game in which the player assumes the role of the character in an interactive story driven by exploration and puzzle-solving instead of physical challenge. The genre’s focus on story allows it to draw heavily from other narrative-based media such as literature and film, encompassing a wide variety of literary genres(Buzzle, 2012).

Educational Game-It is game that had been designed to teach people about a certain subject, expand concept, reinforced the development, understand an historical event or culture, or assist them in learning a skill as the user play. It serves as educational tool for the user (Galoor, 2012). In this study, the game is said to be educational because of the word that the player must complete to pass to next stage. Edutainment- This term is created by the developers, part of the title of this study to emphasize that aside from being educational; it also gives entertainment to the user or player.

Edu is the shortened term for educational and tainment for entertainment. Game- It is a structured or semi-structured activity, usually undertaken for enjoyment and sometimes used as an educational tool (Buzzle, 2012). IDE- (Integrated Development Environment) Itis a software application for software development (IDE, 2012). Map Editor -It is used to edit the maps of the game. We used Tiled Map Editor for designing the map. Single Player- It refers to the variant of a particular game where input from only one player is expected throughout the course of the gaming session.

Touch Screen-It is typically found on larger displays, in phones with integrated PDA features. Most are designed to work with either your finger or a special stylus. Tapping a specific point on the display will activate the virtual button or feature displayed at that location on the display (Buzzle, 2012). User- It is the person who uses or plays the game. Undersea- It is the large area of saline water that composes a large part of a planet’s hydrosphere. It serves as the map of the game. CHAPTER II REVIEW OF RELATED LITERATURE AND STUDIES

This chapter presents a discussion of the existing systems that motivates the developers in pursuing this study. It also covers the related literature and technical background related to study at hand. RELATED LITERATURE The researchers have searched the internet and have read several books to collect information needed to complete the related local and foreign literatures symmetrical to this study. Foreign Literature The game Treasure Ocean developed by flash arcade in 2006 A very exciting yet nice game, to pass to next level the player must collect all the treasures.

An underwater photography is the only way to convince the government that new funds are needed. It was developed in java and one of the best ocean adventure game in that time. The game Fish Tales developed by BigFishgame in 2011 Meet sunny, a small fish vast ocean. Eat the fish smaller that yourself. It is so fun you must have eye and hand coordination to get to the next level. It also develop by the used of java. The game Sprill: Aqua Adventures Underwarter developed by MyPlayCity in 2011. The cat, the main hero, may be bored on the way so we decided to provide it with a funny assistant-a green fish which may be of a great help.

A spectacular underwater game challenges you to gather coloured balls in threes to make them disappear. Be careful and don’t let the balls fill in all the playing field, or else you The Game 4 pics. And 1 word, a game created by LOTUM gmbh that is available in the adroid market, according to a blog , It’s incredibly easy to get into 4 Pics 1 Word, with no instruction required. It quickly becomes addictive, 4 Pics 1 Word is a smooth, fun and well-designed game that’s free to play and can offer hours upon hours of entertainment. With now millions of downloads in the Play Store, this game is certainly doing something right.

Players of any age can get hours of entertainment out of this game, and the price is certainly right. One of the success of the game application 4 pics. And 1 word is that they bring a great enjoyment for the users/players who love to play trivial games. Just like 4 pics and 1 word the proponents wants to bring such experience from the proposed game application pics for a million. Local literatures Zeenoh games released and introduced Patintero Playtime in November of 2011. It is an IPhone and android game app patterned to the traditional Patintero street game that most Filipinos know how to play.

Zeenoh purposely designed this app in order for Filipino children who forgot to play the game and also for those who unfortunately missed the chance of experiencing the game itself Patintero Playtime for…(GDAP, 2011). Patintero Playtime offers a unique gameplay , a 2 dimensional game, though the rules of the original Patintero games apply power ups and human vs. human play are some of its amusing features. With this to consider, Filipinos are now more than ready to take on markets like the IPhone app store and others alike. Sipa literally meaning “kick” in Filipino is one of Philippines’ many traditional games.

It involves an object which is made out of rubber and washer sometimes a 5 centavo coin and a piece of candy wrapper. The objective of the game is to kick the object upwards as long as it takes without the object hitting the ground, the one who kicks the object the longest time wins. Since this game is widely played by Filipinos in their childhood days the developers of this game Team Buthchokoy were inspired to make “Sipa”, a mobile app to show their love for the game itself and to cater their nationalistic efforts in introducing Filipino culture to the global market.

Sipa according to their main website “The inspiration here is not just to develop a mobile game but to prove and inspire other Filipinos that even with limited resources and know-how, one can create something if you put your heart and soul for it” Every Filipino is…( Butchokoy. com, 2011). Sipa also features different levels that show different landmarks found in the Philippine like the Luneta, University of the Philippines, Quiapo Church and Mt. Pulag. The game was featured in both television and on multiple sites and blogs, according to an interview by Tj Manotoc in TV

Patrol one of Team Butchokoy’s leader Dale David “We developed this game most probably for them to be encouraged to play Sipa in the streets even sometimes(translated)” Larong ‘sipa’ patok…(ABS CBN News, 2012). Sipa is currently available in Apple’s App Store and in the Android Market as well. Tongits is a card game that originated in the Philippines. It involves players to pair up cards according to suites, the objective of the game is to take turns drawing a card from a deck and releasing a card from a player’s hand until the player’s hand is empty.

Since the advent of Poker app games on Facebook, developers reach out to Filipinos and made Tongits Wars. There is also Tongits game available on Adobe Air which was developed by Rico Zuniga. The game can be downloaded as a trial version and is available for $15 for unlimited play. Zuniga also made the same game using C++ and is playable on mobile phones according to Zuniga An Open Source…( Zuniga,2011) “The biggest problem during those times was, you guessed it right, device fragmentation. Developers had to deal with different screen resolutions”.

Even though the mobile game did not quite sell it led him eventually to develop Tongits in Adobe Air which became popular and sold to fans of the game. (Macutay, 2007) mentioned 2 games that are made by Filipino game developers. Anito: Defend a Land Enraged was released by Anino Games is an RPG game for PC and features 16th century Asia as its setting. The game won 2004 Role Playing Game of the Year in the 2004 Independent Games Festival. Another game that was developed by Filipinos was Terra Wars: NY Invasion released Ladyluck Digital Media.

It is a first person shooter game that involves aliens as enemies. Unfortunately however for Terra Wars IGN had given them a 2 out of 10 review, according to IGN Terra Wars:…(Bitton, 2006) “Terra Wars is simply the latest addition to the horde of generic first person shooters available on the market today. Even though Terra Wars did not quite work for Ladyluck Digital Media but through the years they eventually worked with clients such as Activision, Ubisoft , Sony, EA and many more proving that Filipinos has already reached its potential in the field of game development. RELATED STUDIES

This section presents the writing of different personalities conduct by the developers during their research, which have relevance to the present study. Local Studies The study of Agito, Cuevas, and Lago (2012) the Treasure Hunter 3D an educational game which is mind game. The developers came up with the title because it is a mind game with treasure seeking quest in 3D (three dimensional). The concept of the game is General Information and the setting is in the forest. The game concentrated on different aspects of learning. It aimed to help the users to enhance their ability and knowledge to play this game.

Treasure Hunter 3D is developed using JavaScript, Adobe Photoshop as the images editor, while Unity and Auto Desk Maya is used in scripting and creating 3D objects. Both have used Adobe Photoshop for image editing and both are somewhat have the process if the game play. The thesis game developed by Borbon and Mendoza (2011), the Sassy Treasure Quest is an adventure type of game that was designed for touch mobile unit with a platform of Flash Lite 3. 0. The game has six stages and each stage has treasures, which are guarded by monster, which must be collected by the protagonist to clear the game.

Movement are classified as up, down, left and right wherein interaction from the user corresponds on the four sides of the mobile unit’s screen. The player must guide “Sassy” through different places where she faces obstacles along the way to the treasure. The quest is non-turn based and the player can’t attack, throw spell, retreat or defend. Every stage adds extra point to Sassy’s stamina. The game keep has a very stylish art concept and can keep you entertained for a few good minutes. Both games are intended to get the safety box to pass on the next stage.

And obtain the high Score. Sassy Treasure Quest use Macromedia Fireworks The study of Abel and Paglinawan (2007) entitled Herbarrio which is a fascinating adventure game where the town Herbarrio has been cursed by the evil spirit. The game made use of Filipino concept for uniqueness and used Netbeans Mobility Pack 5. 5 in developing a set of modular software components called modules, J2ME platform for configuration of Macromedia fireworks NX for designing the user interface. Map Editor is also used for the structure of the map which has the drag and drop tool features.

Both games are adventurous type game and can give excitement to the players. This study also used Map Editor to create map for the game. The study of Capuz and Ortega (2007) – The Adventure of Pedro Penduko that features three exciting levels and three environment to explore. The study considers the need to reinstate and promote Filipino Superhero. This is an amusement that facilities psychological health by relieving stress and depression. In this study, both games feature an excitement, alertness and strategic skills in playing it.

The features of the game have the same objectives and that is to successfully complete each level. Both games can be installed in mobile devices and today tablet devices can serve as mobile devices. The thesis of Olimba, Reyes and Robles (2009), entitled Freaky Maze of Babel. This study targets to develop a mobile game intended to gain the interest and would entertain user. The game is consists of adventure in a form of a board and mini-games to add excite and fun factor. Movement of the main character is based on rolling the dice, the numbers on the dice will decide on how many steps or platform you will end up.

Platforms or blocks will be the way in following the maze and each platform will generate or represent a mini-game that you must accomplish, the faster you finish the mini-games the faster you will gather treasures and gains its goal. Both games give excitement and entertainment it also gives strategy to finish the game. Moreover, these games also can be installed in mobile devices and today tablet devices can also serve as mobile devices. Foreign Studies The study of Rich Molloy and Pat Griffith (2005) entitled Voyage a round Catalina. This game provides a unique and fun way to learn an ancient topic.

Playing VAC will compliment most nautical learning experiences, whether these are an organized courses or independent study. Learners are those interested in the objectives. While, anyone with some interest in learning nautical terms and navigational rules can play VAC, the game will be most fun for those who have some reason or context in which to learn the material (e. g. , learning to sail, thinking of buying a boat, own a boat but know little about subject matter, joining the Coast Guard or Navy, etc…). Both games provide fun and adventure, the ocean is serves as the map of the game.

Both games use 2D graphics design with cool colors, object blending effects, and animated menus with drop shadows; they also require developers to get down and dirty with pixels, lines, curves, rectangles, polygons, and all kinds of other graphics primitive. The game Endless Ocean developed by Arika. The game boasts a large expansive ocean with 100 creatures to “collect” in the players’ aquarium. When the player is on the boat they can do one of several things, they can check up on seals, dolphins, booby’s or penguins hanging around on the boat.

The player can change the location of the boat via the steering wheel; the player can also teach one of their dolphin companion tricks by touching a fin/mouth and wiggling the Wii-mote at the screen. The player can also check email, skip time, and talk to the marine biologist who can’t swim or listen to music while staring at the sky. But once the player dives the “endlessness” begins, the player can go anywhere once they are released down to dive within a certain large perimeter around the boat. They can also dive with a partner [dolphin], draw things with an underwater pen and pet fish.

Most of the game is about petting fish and exploring the sea, every-time the user see an area while diving the area is drawn in on your map, while every-time the pet/rub a fish the fish is put as a sticker in a brown book in the cabin. The map of the games is both in the ocean, the proponents’ main character is a submarine. Both games feature an exciting, alertness and strategic skills in playing it. The features of the game have the same objectives and that is to successfully complete each level. Lepper, M.

R. & Gurtner, J (2000), states that prolonged and excessive use of these games can cause, mainly upon children, a number of physical and psychological problems which may include obsessive, addictive behaviour, dehumanization of the player, desensitizing of feelings, personality changes, hyperactivity learning disorders, premature maturing of children, psychomotor disorders, health problems (due to lack of exercise & tendonitis), Development of anti-social behaviour and loss of free thinking and will.

Anderson and Bushman (2001), found that across 54 independent tests of the relation between video game violence and aggression, involving 4262 participants, there appear to be five consistent results of playing games with violent contents. Playing violent games increase aggressive behaviors, increases aggressive cognitions, increases aggressive emotions, increases physiological arousal, and decreases pro-social behaviours. Since most electronic games are violent, children below legal ages are emotionally disturbed and caused several changes on their behaviour.

John Kirriemuir (2009), Applications (android or iOS) are today an important part of most children’s leisure lives and increasingly an important part of our culture as a whole. We often, as adults, watch in amazement as children dedicate hours to acting as football coaches, designers of empires, controllers of robots, wizards and emperors. In the past, computer games have been dismissed as a distraction from more ‘worthy’ activities, such as homework or playing outside. Today, however, researchers, teachers and designers of learning resources are beginning to ask how this powerful new medium might be used to support children’s learning.

Rather than shutting the door of the school against the computer game, there is now increasing interest in asking whether computer games or playing their tablets might be offering a powerful new resource to support learning in the information age. This review is intended as a timely introduction to current thinking about the role of mobile games in supporting children’s learning inside and out of school. It highlights the key areas of research in the field, in particular the increasing interest in pleasurable learning, learning through doing and learning through collaboration that games seem to offer.

At the same time, the review takes a measured tone in acknowledging some of the obstacles and challenges to using games within our current education system and within our current models of learning. SYNTHESIS The related studies and literature that the researchers gathered are collected from various books, magazines, articles, journals, blogs and thesis from online research and library research. The information collected by the researchers is significantly related to the proposed study. The related studies and literature was created to help researchers properly understand and support the conclusion of the study.

Android games extended its lead in the overall mobile phone market, as the competition is still up, developers developed many different games like adventure, racing, sport, strategy. Adventure game is very entertaining among them because of the excitement and the fun playing throughout the game. The thesis game developed by Borbon and Mendoza (2011), the Sassy Treasure Quest is an adventure type of game with similar goal of the researcher’s present study. The game has the same stages and each stage has treasures, which are guarded by monster, which must be collected by the protagonist to clear the game.

In the proposed game Aquatic quest will have 10 stages and has treasure hunting in each level. Inside the treasures are letters and some are points. Collecting the letters of the given word of the map will complete the map and will proceed to the next level of the game, but it’s not that easy to finish the stage because destructions are all over each stages. Another similar study entitled: “Treasure Ocean” A very exciting yet nice game, with the same goal of collecting all the treasures to proceed to the next level of the game.

Another game design Entitled: “Fish tale” developed by big Fish Game year 2011 that Meet sunny, a small fish vast ocean. Eat the fish smaller that yourself. It is so fun you must have eye and hand coordination to get to the next level. With the same purpose of searching a treasure to complete the game level. The above mentioned studies and literatures greatly contributed to the present study because they served as guide in the development of the Game (Aquatic Quest). The development between the researchers study and above mentioned is noticeable in terms of innovative ideas and process involved.

Child Abuse Essay essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu

Child Abuse is harm done to a child; this person causing the abuse can be either a child or an adult. Sadly, child abuse has been practiced in all cultures, and in all ethics throughout the world. In certain places child abuse started to be noticed and considered as one of the major problems in society. It is normally caused by stress or an economic problem, the average of child abuse is frightfully high, which is unacceptable we should unite as a society to make this end throughout the entire world.

Experts attribute to the recent increase in reporting that we need greater public awareness of child maltreatment, but societal groups don’t realize that this is a huge problem. There are several points of view on this certain type of issue, as some people think that it is absolutely right that a good portion of attention is being paid to children abuse and also to protect them from harm. However, others suggest that people focus more attention to other unimportant situations and they deny the fact that those certain situations contribute to the unbelievable behavior towards children.

Child abuse is actually more than bruises, name calling, and emotional stress. While physical abuse is unpleasant due to the scars it leaves, not all type of abuse is as obvious as it seems. Ignoring children’s necessities, putting them into dangerous situation, or making a child feel worthless by blaming them for everything. Regardless of the type of abuse, the result is emotionally harmful rather than physically. It is also true that abused children are most likely to repeat this cycle as adults and treat their own children the same way.

Nevertheless, repeating what they experienced won’t help in any matter; it’s just a demonstration that they try to maintain a certain type of control over their own children. On the other hand, adult survivors of child abuse have a strong motivation to protect their own children against what they went through when they were small in order to not make their own kids suffer the same abusive way. It’s easy to say that only “bad people” abuse their children, but it’s not always that way. Not all abusers intentionally harm their kids, many of them have been victims of abuse themselves, and they make this an excuse and abuse their own kids, they just don’t know any other way to parent their own children. Others may be struggling with economic issues or a substance abuse problem, it doesn’t only happen in poor families, it crosses all ethic, economic, and cultural biases. Sometimes, families who seem to have it all always end up hiding the real story of child abuse. Several types of child abuse and the core element that ties them together is the emotional effect that causes on the child.

Children need predictability, structures, clear boundaries, and the knowledge that their parents are looking out for their own safety. Abused children cannot predict their parents actions towards them; the fact that children live their own world unpredictably and in a frightening place with no rules makes them more vulnerable against their parent’s aggressions. Whether the abuse is a slap or a simple side comment, the result is a child that feels unsafe. The different types found in child abuse are, physical, emotional, verbal, and sexual abuse.

It is not hard to follow up with these types of abuse. Those children who are being physically abused are mostly hurt by repeated injuries , bruises, and burns, some of them show the object of which they were assaulted with, like for example with a belt, electric cord, or anything that is at the abusers reach. Recently there have been cases of cigarette marks on children’s back and hands. Some of these physical injuries are done to small children and it is more noticeable to find out at their young age.

In physical abuse the child never knows what is going to set the parents in a bad mood or in a situation that it might lead to aggression towards the kid. Children don’t know how to cause a physical assault, physical abuse parents act out of anger and the desire to assert control and domination against their own children, but the truth is that they teach their children from right to wrong and that’s why in the future they follow the same steps with their own kids, it’s like following up with the same cycle all over again.

Some kids may also notice that the angrier the adult is the harsher the abuse will be, those parents who are usually abusive may believe that their children need to fear them in order to feel like there the max authority around their home. While emotional abuse is defined as constant attack of a child. It is important to recognize that the word is ‘constant’ meaning repeatedly. In this sort of abuse the children receive only negative messages and this leads to a bad influence in their life.

This abuse always tend to result in psychological growth, other forms of abuse are the most difficult one of child abuse to stop but emotional abuse is by far the most hard on to identify, because it doesn’t result in physical evidence, it can be very hard to diagnose. Regardless if it’s hard to identify or not as a parent it should be their responsibility to notice something wrong on their own children, that’s basically the main of a parent. Although visible signs of emotional abuse can be difficult to identify, the hidden scars of this type of abuse show p in different behavioral ways.

Emotionally abused children often grow up thinking that they are worthless, a tragedy case by this is that these children grow up thinking that they are worthless, a tragedy cause by this is that, these children grow up thinking that this is the right way to treat their own children but they are wrong about this type of mentality they grown upon the time they have been being abused, for some reason the abuse way parents treat their children also leads to children being bullied but that’s another type of matter that should also be discussed in a proper way.

One of the hardest experiences for children is mainly sexual abuse; the signs can be so evident for surrounding adults. For example the child can tell to himself if he/she have been sexually abused or not but they won’t have the courage to tell anybody else because they are afraid to do so. The certain signs towards sexually abused are difficulty walking or sitting, stained underwear, genital pain, even some kids wet there bed at night or some even might even not be able to sleep at all because there too scared on being sexually abused again.

The emotional signs on being sexually abused are difficulty eating, hard time sleeping, acting like a much younger kid in order to catch the parents attention depending if the parents or any family member is abusing the kid, and they may also not be sociable because they decide to stay apart from other children or even from their own parents if they aren’t the ones abusing the child. Children are innocent and vulnerable of we can even say gullible they are too afraid to report that they are being abused, or they might also don’t know how to report this incident either.

The best way to opt out in this abuse is to always have the confidence on speaking about it with a close relative or with a best friend it’s most likely that they might have the answer to help out with this sort of case, if not calling the authorities is always the best way to handle this painful situation. The situation is that children usually tend dot feel embarrassed if they have to answer questions about sexual activity or their behavior might have a slight change while talking about this subject.

Statistics show that children with disabilities are 4 to 10 times capable to being sexually abused, because they can’t defend themselves and are most likely to talk into doing something inappropriate without them wanting too. Those children that are being sexually abused feel fear, depression, anger, and, poor self-esteem. However; young age girls, who were forced to have sex or forced to inappropriate actions are three times more likely to develop some psychiatric disorders or become alcohol and drugs addict when becoming adults than those who were not sexually abused.

Boys always end up choosing the wrong path because they tend to hold more anger towards whoever caused them harm. But both girls and boys, who were sexually abused, may also develop some eating disorders and behavioral problems. Sexual and physical abuses in early childhood influence adult men and women negatively, they usually from disturbances, and they constantly have nightmares and flashbacks. Recent studies for this matter show that they may also have a low concentration in their education.

However;; girls are sexually abused three times more than boys, and boys have a greater risk of emotional neglect and injuries than most girls. Sexual abuse is by far the most dangerous assault caused to children. Another type of abuse is child neglect which is very obvious because it’s just the lack of attention to a child. When children are emotionally abused, he/she are afraid to come back home, talk to their parents also the lack of concentration on their education, they may also show aggressiveness behavior towards other kids or even to adults.

Among other things, verbal abuse an affect your child’s self-worth, damage his ability to trust others, and disfigure academic and social skills. A child experiencing verbal abuse may not be physically or sexually abused. Despite the opposition of physical aggression most people probably view this as wrong better than right. Verbal Abuse is a form of psychological maltreatment, and it may be the most destructive part of kid’s life. The problem of child abuse depends on the family members.

Abuse may actually happen in any type of family, disregarding the characteristics. But there are also certain families, where the abuse is more likely to happen when they are separated from society, have no friends, financial problems, or more likely when they are under a lot of stress. The main risk is with families where parents are alcoholics of drug addicts, they come from any ethnic or income levels and backgrounds and their problems have devastating impact on children’s healthy and development or also environment.

We could talk even about some certain type of substance abuse, meaning that they children of alcoholics are at highest risks of becoming chemically dependent, their mental status, social life, and physical development are also influenced. This problem is never to be excluded from the list of major social and family problems; all kinds of physical and emotional abuse are hard to overcome. Adults should be attentive towards all children, not only to their own problems; because this is their duty to stop the abuse caused to all type of children but specially to their own children at home.

The best way to prevent it is to contact or report it to child support services and local health departments. Children are the future to this nation and their healthy development growth should be the basis of every parent’s main matter of focus. Personally, I understand how difficult it is to overcome the situations our parents may have. During many years of my life as a child I had gone through seeing my father’s sexual, physical, and emotional abuse towards my mother, and specially the abandonment of me and my sisters. I think it’s better to just maintain excuses to my father’s actions to try to forget what we would see him do to my mother.

I think everyone goes throughout life with feeling, and fears, and low self-esteem. The police always popped out in my head at the acts of my father towards my mother, beating her and almost trying to hit us too. I usually tend to judge others at the acts of aggression but I know that I went through the same thing and now I think twice before I judge someone who has been abused. Whatever we went through in our childhood, serves as a purpose in life it like a defense mechanism, so we won’t commit any sort of abuse towards nobody.

If we take on our parents flaws and make them our own we will fall and take there same route of overcoming our fears towards life. Children are the screen receiving the projection of what we make them follow and therefore the cycle continues over again until someone makes a different to break this endless cycle. To prevent child abuse, the main causes must be identified first. However; alcohol is one of the biggest causes of abuse. Alcohol abuse was found to be in 40 of child abuse cases. Many times parents react under the stress and always say that any harm they had cause to their child is not considered abuse.

Parents lose control of their temper; a cause of child abuse that often overlooked is also parental inexperience. In conclusion, the four types of child abuse; physical, sexual, emotional and verbal abuse and their effects are long lasting and damaging. To maintain our children safe from child abuse all over the world, the main causes need to be identified, and taken into consideration before it’s too late and death could be the consequences of parent’s actions. Child abuse is an extreme situation facing many families in our nation, and a solution based on society awareness needs to be contrived to stop this endless cycle.

A Visit to Cherating essay help fairfax: essay help fairfax

During the school holidays, we were in high spirits when our parents informed us that we would be going to Cherating, a beautiful island on the East Coast of Peninsular Malaysia. We went there by a chartered air-conditioned bus. We painted the town red at there. Cherating was situated in the East Coast of Peninsular Malaysia. It had a breathtaking, scenic and clean beach. There were many chalets and hotels which dotted the coast and they were surrounded by lush greenery. We stayed in Grand Continental Hotel which had the ideal facilities for family vacation.

Cherating was a haven for an adventurous person like me. It had many activities for the tourist such as swimming, water sports, snorkeling and jet skiing. I tried everything and was over the moon to be able to go snorkeling. I was overjoyed to have this golden opportunity to discover the underwater world. I also used an underwater camera to capture amazing shots of the fishes and corals. Initially, I was petrified about going on the jet ski but the instructor gave me pointers to ensure I felt absolutely safe.

At night, we had a barbecue under a myriad of sparkling stars at the beach. The food was scrumptious and mouthwatering. Many local and foreign tourists including me visited the world-renowned turtle sanctuary. I felt very disappointed because I didn’t see any turtles on the beach. After three wonderful days, we decided to call it a day and went home. Cherating was indeed a great place for a holiday vacation. I had fun during the children’s club party. I think my family and I will be visiting Cherating again.

The google popular mba argumentative essay help: popular mba argumentative essay help

Isalin ang pahinang ito As if it was just yesterday, but actually it had been about 15 or so years already since I first stepped into high school. Being in high school in the Philippines is … High SchMga Resulta sa Paghahanap High School, the Best Four Years of My Life | Teen Opinion Essay www. teenink. com › Opinion › School / College? Isalin ang pahinang ito A belief that I have come to hold after starting high school is that private schools fall short of the most important benefits that public schools have to offer. High School Memory essays https://www. megaessays. com/… /95512.html – Isalin ang pahinang ito High School Memory essaysI do not think my best memory of my life has approached me yet. However, I feel my high school years have been the most … Essay #3: My Favourite High School Year : the13thgeek™ www. the13thgeek. net/… /essay-3-my-favourite-hi…? Isalin ang pahinang ito Ene 30, 2012 – Many people, including myself – agree that high school is one of life’s … and forged many strong memories, may it be happy or not, that I can still … HIGH SCHOOL MEMORY ESSAY – Carolinadlp’s e-Portfolio https://sites. google. com/… /9-high-school-memory-…

Isalin ang pahinang ito May 15, 2012 – I will always remember my years of high school. All the people I met, the moments I lived, and the guys I have loved during this time have been … Free Essays on School Memories 1 through 30 – Essay Depot www. essaydepot. com/… /school-memories/1? Isalin ang pahinang ito 30+ (na) item – Free Essays on School Memories. Get help with your … School MemoriesSchool Memories School days were the same … My High School MemoriesEnglish 101 23 January 2013 High School … High School Memories – Free Essays – Best Free Essays allbestessays. com/… /High-School-Memories/1145…?

Isalin ang pahinang ito Set 29, 2011 – High School Memories. During my 3 years at E. C. Goodwin, I have had many good and bad experiences such as freshman year, Posi day, and … English E Essay : My High School Memories and Experiences – Scribd www. scribd. com/… /English-E-Essay-My-High-Sc…? Isalin ang pahinang ito Peb 2, 2011 – English E, Writing Task Writing Paper 2, Task Type : Article by Victoria Thorner, TE08 My high school experience was. filled unreceived love … High School Memories – Essays – Tong4587 – StudyMode. com www. studymode. com › Home › Biology? Isalin ang pahinang ito

As if it was just yesterday, but actually it had been about 15 or so years already since I first stepped into high school. Being in high school in the Philippines is … High School Memories Free Essays 1 – 20 – StudyMode. com www. studymode. com/… /high-school-memories-p…? Isalin ang pahinang ito Free Essays on High School Memories for students. Use our papers to help you with yours 1 – 20. Memories of childhood – High School English essays www. englishdaily626. com/high_school_english_…? Isalin ang pahinang ito Memories of childhood. The memories of childhood have their own kind of nostalgia.

With the passage of time, one feels more attached to this childhood, theMga Resulta sa Paghahanap High School, the Best Four Years of My Life | Teen Opinion Essay www. teenink. com › Opinion › School / College? Isalin ang pahinang ito A belief that I have come to hold after starting high school is that private schools fall short of the most important benefits that public schools have to offer. High School Memory essays https://www. megaessays. com/… /95512. html – Isalin ang pahinang ito High School Memory essaysI do not think my best memory of my life has approached me yet. However, I feel my high school years have been the most …

Essay #3: My Favourite High School Year : the13thgeek™ www. the13thgeek. net/… /essay-3-my-favourite-hi…? Isalin ang pahinang ito Ene 30, 2012 – Many people, including myself – agree that high school is one of life’s … and forged many strong memories, may it be happy or not, that I can still … HIGH SCHOOL MEMORY ESSAY – Carolinadlp’s e-Portfolio https://sites. google. com/… /9-high-school-memory-… – Isalin ang pahinang ito May 15, 2012 – I will always remember my years of high school. All the people I met, the moments I lived, and the guys I have loved during this time have been …

Free Essays on School Memories 1 through 30 – Essay Depot www. essaydepot. com/… /school-memories/1? Isalin ang pahinang ito 30+ (na) item – Free Essays on School Memories. Get help with your … School MemoriesSchool Memories School days were the same … My High School MemoriesEnglish 101 23 January 2013 High School … High School Memories – Free Essays – Best Free Essays allbestessays. com/… /High-School-Memories/1145…? Isalin ang pahinang ito Set 29, 2011 – High School Memories. During my 3 years at E. C. Goodwin, I have had many good and bad experiences such as freshman year, Posi day, and …

English E Essay : My High School Memories and Experiences – Scribd www. scribd. com/… /English-E-Essay-My-High-Sc…? Isalin ang pahinang ito Peb 2, 2011 – English E, Writing Task Writing Paper 2, Task Type : Article by Victoria Thorner, TE08 My high school experience was. filled unreceived love … High School Memories – Essays – Tong4587 – StudyMode. com www. studymode. com › Home › Biology? Isalin ang pahinang ito As if it was just yesterday, but actually it had been about 15 or so years already since I first stepped into high school. Being in high school in the Philippines is …

High School Memories Free Essays 1 – 20 – StudyMode. com www. studymode. com/… /high-school-memories-p…? Isalin ang pahinang ito Free Essays on High School Memories for students. Use our papers to help you with yours 1 – 20. Memories of childhood – High School English essays www. englishdaily626. com/high_school_english_…? Isalin ang pahinang ito Memories of childhood. The memories of childhood have their own kind of nostalgia. With the passage of time, one feels more attached to this childhood, theMga Resulta sa Paghahanap High School, the Best Four Years of My Life | Teen Opinion Essay www.

teenink. com › Opinion › School / College? Isalin ang pahinang ito A belief that I have come to hold after starting high school is that private schools fall short of the most important benefits that public schools have to offer. High School Memory essays https://www. megaessays. com/… /95512. html – Isalin ang pahinang ito High School Memory essaysI do not think my best memory of my life has approached me yet. However, I feel my high school years have been the most … Essay #3: My Favourite High School Year : the13thgeek™ www. the13thgeek. net/… /essay-3-my-favourite-hi…?

Isalin ang pahinang ito Ene 30, 2012 – Many people, including myself – agree that high school is one of life’s … and forged many strong memories, may it be happy or not, that I can still … HIGH SCHOOL MEMORY ESSAY – Carolinadlp’s e-Portfolio https://sites. google. com/… /9-high-school-memory-… – Isalin ang pahinang ito May 15, 2012 – I will always remember my years of high school. All the people I met, the moments I lived, and the guys I have loved during this time have been … Free Essays on School Memories 1 through 30 – Essay Depot www. essaydepot. com/… /school-memories/1?

Isalin ang pahinang ito 30+ (na) item – Free Essays on School Memories. Get help with your … School MemoriesSchool Memories School days were the same … My High School MemoriesEnglish 101 23 January 2013 High School … High School Memories – Free Essays – Best Free Essays allbestessays. com/… /High-School-Memories/1145…? Isalin ang pahinang ito Set 29, 2011 – High School Memories. During my 3 years at E. C. Goodwin, I have had many good and bad experiences such as freshman year, Posi day, and … English E Essay : My High School Memories and Experiences – Scribd www.scribd. com/… /English-E-Essay-My-High-Sc…? Isalin ang pahinang ito Peb 2, 2011 – English E, Writing Task Writing Paper 2, Task Type : Article by Victoria Thorner, TE08 My high school experience was. filled unreceived love … High School Memories – Essays – Tong4587 – StudyMode. com www. studymode. com › Home › Biology? Isalin ang pahinang ito As if it was just yesterday, but actually it had been about 15 or so years already since I first stepped into high school. Being in high school in the Philippines is … High School Memories Free Essays 1 – 20 – StudyMode. com www.studymode. com/… /high-school-memories-p…? Isalin ang pahinang ito Free Essays on High School Memories for students. Use our papers to help you with yours 1 – 20. Memories of childhood – High School English essays www. englishdaily626. com/high_school_english_…? Isalin ang pahinang ito Memories of childhood. The memories of childhood have their own kind of nostalgia. With the passage of time, one feels more attached to this childhood, theMga Resulta sa Paghahanap High School, the Best Four Years of My Life | Teen Opinion Essay www. teenink. com › Opinion › School / College?

Isalin ang pahinang ito A belief that I have come to hold after starting high school is that private schools fall short of the most important benefits that public schools have to offer. High School Memory essays https://www. megaessays. com/… /95512. html – Isalin ang pahinang ito High School Memory essaysI do not think my best memory of my life has approached me yet. However, I feel my high school years have been the most … Essay #3: My Favourite High School Year : the13thgeek™ www. the13thgeek. net/… /essay-3-my-favourite-hi…? Isalin ang pahinang ito

Ene 30, 2012 – Many people, including myself – agree that high school is one of life’s … and forged many strong memories, may it be happy or not, that I can still … HIGH SCHOOL MEMORY ESSAY – Carolinadlp’s e-Portfolio https://sites. google. com/… /9-high-school-memory-… – Isalin ang pahinang ito May 15, 2012 – I will always remember my years of high school. All the people I met, the moments I lived, and the guys I have loved during this time have been … Free Essays on School Memories 1 through 30 – Essay Depot www. essaydepot. com/… /school-memories/1? Isalin ang pahinang ito 30+ (na) item – Free Essays on School Memories. Get help with your … School MemoriesSchool Memories School days were the same … My High School MemoriesEnglish 101 23 January 2013 High School … High School Memories – Free Essays – Best Free Essays allbestessays. com/… /High-School-Memories/1145…? Isalin ang pahinang ito Set 29, 2011 – High School Memories. During my 3 years at E. C. Goodwin, I have had many good and bad experiences such as freshman year, Posi day, and … English E Essay : My High School Memories and Experiences – Scribd www. scribd. com/… /English-E-Essay-My-High-Sc…?

Isalin ang pahinang ito Peb 2, 2011 – English E, Writing Task Writing Paper 2, Task Type : Article by Victoria Thorner, TE08 My high school experience was. filled unreceived love … High School Memories – Essays – Tong4587 – StudyMode. com www. studymode. com › Home › Biology? Isalin ang pahinang ito As if it was just yesterday, but actually it had been about 15 or so years already since I first stepped into high school. Being in high school in the Philippines is … High School Memories Free Essays 1 – 20 – StudyMode. com www. studymode. com/… /high-school-memories-p…? Isalin ang pahinang ito

Free Essays on High School Memories for students. Use our papers to help you with yours 1 – 20. Memories of childhood – High School English essays www. englishdaily626. com/high_school_english_…? Isalin ang pahinang itossdMga Resulta sa Paghahanap High School, the Best Four Years of My Life | Teen Opinion Essay www. teenink. com › Opinion › School / College? Isalin ang pahinang ito A belief that I have come to hold after starting high school is that private schools fall short of the most important benefits that public schools have to offer. High School Memory essays https://www. megaessays. com/…/95512. html – Isalin ang pahinang ito High School Memory essaysI do not think my best memory of my life has approached me yet. However, I feel my high school years have been the most … Essay #3: My Favourite High School Year : the13thgeek™ www. the13thgeek. net/… /essay-3-my-favourite-hi…? Isalin ang pahinang ito Ene 30, 2012 – Many people, including myself – agree that high school is one of life’s … and forged many strong memories, may it be happy or not, that I can still … HIGH SCHOOL MEMORY ESSAY – Carolinadlp’s e-Portfolio https://sites. google. com/… /9-high-school-memory-…

– Isalin ang pahinang ito May 15, 2012 – I will always remember my years of high school. All the people I met, the moments I lived, and the guys I have loved during this time have been … Free Essays on School Memories 1 through 30 – Essay Depot www. essaydepot. com/… /school-memories/1? Isalin ang pahinang ito 30+ (na) item – Free Essays on School Memories. Get help with your … School MemoriesSchool Memories School days were the same … My High School MemoriesEnglish 101 23 January 2013 High School … High School Memories – Free Essays – Best Free Essays allbestessays. com/… /High-School-Memories/1145…?

Isalin ang pahinang ito Set 29, 2011 – High School Memories. During my 3 years at E. C. Goodwin, I have had many good and bad experiences such as freshman year, Posi day, and … English E Essay : My High School Memories and Experiences – Scribd www. scribd. com/… /English-E-Essay-My-High-Sc…? Isalin ang pahinang ito Peb 2, 2011 – English E, Writing Task Writing Paper 2, Task Type : Article by Victoria Thorner, TE08 My high school experience was. filled unreceived love … High School Memories – Essays – Tong4587 – StudyMode. com www. studymode. com › Home › Biology? Isalin ang pahinang ito

As if it was just yesterday, but actually it had been about 15 or so years already since I first stepped into high school. Being in high school in the Philippines is … High School Memories Free Essays 1 – 20 – StudyMode. com www. studymode. com/… /high-school-memories-p…? Isalin ang pahinang ito Free Essays on High School Memories for students. Use our papers to help you with yours 1 – 20. Memories of childhood – High School English essays www. englishdaily626. com/high_school_english_…? Isalin ang pahinang ito Memories of childhood. The memories of childhood have their own kind of nostalgia.

With the passage of time, one feels more attached to this childhood, theMga Resulta sa Paghahanap High School, the Best Four Years of My Life | Teen Opinion Essay www. teenink. com › Opinion › School / College? Isalin ang pahinang ito A belief that I have come to hold after starting high school is that private schools fall short of the most important benefits that public schools have to offer. High School Memory essays https://www. megaessays. com/… /95512. html – Isalin ang pahinang ito High School Memory essaysI do not think my best memory of my life has approached me yet. However, I feel my high school years have been the most …

Essay #3: My Favourite High School Year : the13thgeek™ www. the13thgeek. net/… /essay-3-my-favourite-hi…? Isalin ang pahinang ito Ene 30, 2012 – Many people, including myself – agree that high school is one of life’s … and forged many strong memories, may it be happy or not, that I can still … HIGH SCHOOL MEMORY ESSAY – Carolinadlp’s e-Portfolio https://sites. google. com/… /9-high-school-memory-… – Isalin ang pahinang ito May 15, 2012 – I will always remember my years of high school. All the people I met, the moments I lived, and the guys I have loved during this time have been …

Free Essays on School Memories 1 through 30 – Essay Depot www. essaydepot. com/… /school-memories/1? Isalin ang pahinang ito 30+ (na) item – Free Essays on School Memories. Get help with your … School MemoriesSchool Memories School days were the same … My High School MemoriesEnglish 101 23 January 2013 High School … High School Memories – Free Essays – Best Free Essays allbestessays. com/… /High-School-Memories/1145…? Isalin ang pahinang ito Set 29, 2011 – High School Memories. During my 3 years at E. C. Goodwin, I have had many good and bad experiences such as freshman year, Posi day, and …

English E Essay : My High School Memories and Experiences – Scribd www. scribd. com/… /English-E-Essay-My-High-Sc…? Isalin ang pahinang ito Peb 2, 2011 – English E, Writing Task Writing Paper 2, Task Type : Article by Victoria Thorner, TE08 My high school experience was. filled unreceived love … High School Memories – Essays – Tong4587 – StudyMode. com www. studymode. com › Home › Biology? Isalin ang pahinang ito As if it was just yesterday, but actually it had been about 15 or so years already since I first stepped into high school. Being in high school in the Philippines is …

High School Memories Free Essays 1 – 20 – StudyMode. com www. studymode. com/… /high-school-memories-p…? Isalin ang pahinang ito Free Essays on High School Memories for students. Use our papers to help you with yours 1 – 20. Memories of childhood – High School English essays www. englishdaily626. com/high_school_english_…? Isalin ang pahinang ito Memories of childhood. The memories of childhood have their own kind of nostalgia. With the passage of time, one feels more attached to this childhood, thesdMga Resulta sa Paghahanap High School, the Best Four Years of My Life | Teen Opinion Essay www.

teenink. com › Opinion › School / College? Isalin ang pahinang ito A belief that I have come to hold after starting high school is that private schools fall short of the most important benefits that public schools have to offer. High School Memory essays https://www. megaessays. com/… /95512. html – Isalin ang pahinang ito High School Memory essaysI do not think my best memory of my life has approached me yet. However, I feel my high school years have been the most … Essay #3: My Favourite High School Year : the13thgeek™ www. the13thgeek. net/… /essay-3-my-favourite-hi…?

Isalin ang pahinang ito Ene 30, 2012 – Many people, including myself – agree that high school is one of life’s … and forged many strong memories, may it be happy or not, that I can still … HIGH SCHOOL MEMORY ESSAY – Carolinadlp’s e-Portfolio https://sites. google. com/… /9-high-school-memory-… – Isalin ang pahinang ito May 15, 2012 – I will always remember my years of high school. All the people I met, the moments I lived, and the guys I have loved during this time have been … Free Essays on School Memories 1 through 30 – Essay Depot www. essaydepot. com/… /school-memories/1?

Isalin ang pahinang ito 30+ (na) item – Free Essays on School Memories. Get help with your … School MemoriesSchool Memories School days were the same … My High School MemoriesEnglish 101 23 January 2013 High School … High School Memories – Free Essays – Best Free Essays allbestessays. com/… /High-School-Memories/1145…? Isalin ang pahinang ito Set 29, 2011 – High School Memories. During my 3 years at E. C. Goodwin, I have had many good and bad experiences such as freshman year, Posi day, and … English E Essay : My High School Memories and Experiences – Scribd www. scribd.com/… /English-E-Essay-My-High-Sc…? Isalin ang pahinang ito Peb 2, 2011 – English E, Writing Task Writing Paper 2, Task Type : Article by Victoria Thorner, TE08 My high school experience was. filled unreceived love … High School Memories – Essays – Tong4587 – StudyMode. com www. studymode. com › Home › Biology? Isalin ang pahinang ito As if it was just yesterday, but actually it had been about 15 or so years already since I first stepped into high school. Being in high school in the Philippines is … High School Memories Free Essays 1 – 20 – StudyMode. com www. studymode.com/… /high-school-memories-p…? Isalin ang pahinang ito Free Essays on High School Memories for students. Use our papers to help you with yours 1 – 20. Memories of childhood – High School English essays www. englishdaily626. com/high_school_english_…? Isalin ang pahinang ito Memories of childhood. The memories of childhood have their own kind of nostalgia. With the passage of time, one feels more attached to this childhood, theMemories of childhood. The memories of childhood have their own kind of nostalgia. With the passage of time, one feels more attached to this childhood, the

People had become extremely dependent on technology essay help fairfax: essay help fairfax

People had become extremely dependent on technology. Nowadays, people have laptops, eBooks, etc. Life has come way easier than before because of all this new technology. People are just commonly fascinated in all that has been created in today’s world that makes the one task little bit easier by the push of a button. People cannot imagine their lives without technology. People start feeling anxious when hand phone and laptops are not with them. Dependent too much on technology has caused people to lose the ability to think for themselves.

Instead of having to figure out the answers, they just go on the internet and find the answer that way. Everyone does it because they like to take the easy way out. Besides, some people would not be able to study without some form of technology and they could not continue study for more than a minute without checking their smart phone and laptops. For instance, many people no longer memorize phone number because they cell phone have a contact list which make memorization unnecessary. If these people didn’t have their cell phone when emergency, they would not be able to contact the people they would need.

If they lost their cell phone and all of the contact, it’s very possible have no idea how to get in contact with anyone. Technology was invented to help people. But, instead people are using it as an excuse to be lazy. Nowadays, people are using the latest technology to make life just a little easier. The people take their cell phone added with high speed internet. So that they can deposit checks, make credit card payment and pay utilities bills by pressing some button on their smart phone. Due to the excessive use of texting and online chatting, people writing skill have plummeted.

Instead of writing letter to communicate with people far away, they can just send a quick text. Cell phone and similar devices are allowing access to websites that allow family and friends stay connected instead of visit them even though it is near or using their phone to make a call. Besides that, people also can buy groceries, clothing, electrical appliances from internet at home. So, they didn’t go out to buy the things. Many people said that technology on jobs is easy nowadays too. Society is pushed in learning new technology to keep their jobs.

Men and women that have been working for that certain career that now allows a machine or knowledge of a device to run it. For the new generation, they would not know what it is like to actually build with their hands and will be lost if the machine break out. Some industries had to have parts inspected and checked by hands. But now they have machine to do it. Technology is replacing life, and it is not a beneficial exchange. People also try not to depend on technology so much, therefore it’s encouraging positive thinking. Besides, the factories in encouraged not too depend on machinery so that people will not be unemployed.

Forces affecting the gaming industry essay help: essay help

Legal and Regulatory – what legal or regulatory trends or changes coming that will impact IT/gaming sectors Video game regulations that look to reduce representation of filth, pornography, violence, sex and perversion in video games. This would have a huge impact on the industry especially on the producers of title such as GTA, COD, and many ohers. Proposed ban on violent video games in public spaces. This would seek to ban arcade style games , mainly shooting games,in places such as movie theatres, bowling allies, etc. But would also ban certain console games available for play in stores.

This would impact revenue and sales in the industry. Economic – ditto Gaming population is aging, because of this gamers on avergae have more money to spend on video games and consoles. Technology is getting cheaper, consoles as well as computer parts are more affordable than ever. Technological – ditto – What are new technology trends or changes are coming down the pike that might impact us? Oculus rift, which is a virtual reality headset for 3D gaming. Razer’s Project Christine. Modular, mix and match design allows anyone to easily upgrade their computer.

This means the average user wouldnt have to buy a whole new computer or spend money extra money having their computer upgraded. Competition The big 3 have always been sony, microsoft, and nintendo. But recently with the release of 4th gen consoles, many players of the xbox 360 have moved to the playstation 4. Online gaming is becoming increasingly popular, more and more players are switching to computers as computer games offer stellar modding, adjustments, more titles available. Social forces/changes the gaming population is getting older. The average player is 34 and the average age of game purchasers is 40.

Expansion in social gaming means players are drawn to games with which they can play with friends/other players ultimately making the games more fun and engaging. Global Gaming consoles are becoming more available in countries around the world. Mobile gaming has exploded, especially on phones, now pretty much everyone who has a smart phone is using them to play games. PART II – Based on these forces, what is your plan to keep yourself marketable and stay ahead of them. Stay up to date with technology and gaming news through friends, shows, conferences, expos, online forums, etc.

Mentoring Roles in Leadership Development rice supplement essay help: rice supplement essay help

Introduction Leaders are considered as the significant aspect in communities or organizations. The impact of leaders can lead organizations to the success or adversely to the failure in achieving their goals. Many perspectives on this theme had created comprehensive understanding and may be used in many different contexts. The meaning of leader and leadership and other debatable issues associated in its construct should be understood in its context and perspective.

Definition of leadership in this topic will focus on knowledge, skills, abilities and traits of the leader in the process of influencing other people or followers to do what the leader want. This definition is proposed by Barker (1997) in possibilities of leadership training which define leadership and management in the same way. To focus on the leadership as a management function is more rationalistic but it is more possible to adapt in organizational practices.

In their act to lead or their behaviors to influence other people in organization, leaders have their own values and styles which are different from one another and to be owned originally. These values and styles are shaped by many factors along developmental process. In the process to become a leader, a person is influenced by many agencies, i. e. : parents, families, friends, colleges, educations, experiences, etc. Those agencies interact in complicated ways and shape leadership values and styles.

One important agency is mentor which is a person who plays a role as guru, coach, model in the process of learning become leaders. Mentor-protege existence is recorded since the old history and has varied interpretations in its practices. However, mentor-protege relationship is proved as a useful method for leaders to develop their leadership role. Mentoring as a means in organization has attracted many researches to study its role and dynamic since it is used to increase personal ability and in the end is hoped can give optimum benefits to organizations.

There are many views about the role of mentoring in organizations based on the findings. Even though there are skeptical views about the role of mentoring in organization, I believe that mentoring in a broad definition is a very useful method and should be implemented properly to get its benefits. In the effort to get the clearer insight about mentor-protege phenomena, I will begin with explaining mentor and protege definition, aspects involved in the relationship, benefits of mentor-protege relationship, barrier of a successful relationship, other effects in relationship,and model in mentorship.

In the last part, I try to look out relevancy of mentoring in the current organizational context. Definition of Mentorship To have comprehensive understanding about mentor we need to know the root of its word and how this term uses in many fields. There are many definition and debatable issues associated in this definition. However, I suggest to give the meaning of mentor-protege based on its root in mythology. History of Mentor The concept of mentoring can be traced from Greek mythology.

In Odyssey of Odysseus, Mentor was the faithful companion of Odysseus, King of Ithaca who took an important role for Telemachus, Odysseus’s son, when the King went off to the Trojan wars. Mentor’s duty was to raise Telemachus and prepare him as the successor of Odyssey. According to Samier (2000,p. 85), based on Odyssey story, there are three fundamental roles in mentoring: guardian, guide, and counselor. While Carruthers (1993,p. 9) explain that in this story, Mentor had a role as a father figure, a teacher, a role model, an approachable counsellor, a trusted adviser, a challenger, an encourager to Telemachus.

Carruthers also add the figure with Athene, also from Greek mythology, who sometimes is assumed the form of mentor and acted as mother figure and wisdom. On the other hand, protective aspect of the role Mentor has raised the word “protege”, come from French verb, proteger means to protect. This word is used to a person who receives mentor interest. Mentor-protege relationships have become a pattern of learning or play a significant factor in development of successful persons along centuries. Head and Gray gave a list of famous persons with mentor-protege relationship from Sir Thomas More

until Michael Jackson (Carruthers,1993). This role of Mentor to help Odyssey’s successor in his developmental phase is used in many fields and sometimes in very simple ways. In this discussion, we focus on leadership in organization that needs understanding in integration of intellectual and emotional capabilities of individual. Mentor Concept Although the concept of mentor is real along history and seems simple and easy to understand, in the process of determine a definition, there are many varied views come from many authors.

Carruthers(1993) explained a range of definition, from brief definition in Webster Universal Dictionary, ‘mentor is counsellor, wise and prudent adviser’ and Carmin’s comprehensive definition of mentor, ‘mentoring is a complex, interactive process occurring between individuals of differing levels of experience and expertise which incorporates interpersonal or psychosocial development, career and/or educational development, and socialization functions into the relationship.

To have a guide for this ‘mentor’ term, Carruthers(1993) proposed that most mentor interpretations can be devided into two categories: the first is which emphasise the professional development only, the second is which emphasise professional and personal development of the protege. In other field, term of mentor also used broadly and there are many debatable issues associated with mentor activity. Wood (1997,p.27) explain mentor happened in Mentor story is the idea of a senior or older person who pay attention to a younger person and acting as an advisor and guide. She also claims that the idea of mentoring in the business world is happened when a junior employee assigned a more senior adviser to help them develop their career. Samier (2000) states that values and interpretations of mentorship are depend on one’s disposition in humanistic or positivistic direction.

In his view, mentorship program can be seen as a reaction to the negative effect of modernization which produces alienation in social relation. To study mentoring, it will need phenomenological and hermeneutic perspectives because the subject is interpersonal relationship in professional development which is subjective, symbolic and context-dependent experiences. Mentorship also is seen as a means of addressing equity problems by supporting women and minorities.

His view of practical use of mentoring also found in organization, to be function as an innovative means of supporting conventional organizational goals and practices by offering a technique for coping with change. Aspects involved in Mentor Concept Samier (2000,p. 85) state that to construct a comprehensive and clear conceptual framework of mentoring, we need to look its role definition, characteristic of actors, character of relationship and typical phases/stages.

These mentoring criteria consist of: Mentoring is a multifaceted and complex role consisting of interventionist, training, and supportive activities; mentors are older, more senior, and at the same workplace or in the same profession; the relationship is personally and affectively grounded, and governed by ethical requirements of voluntarism and mutuality, therefore not reducible to quantifiable measures; and it is a relationship which requires a minimum of two years, and in most cases three to five years, evolve.

To fulfill their roles as mentor and protege, there are a number criteria or qualifying characteristics which organized by Samier(2000,p. 88) into organizational status, professional and personal qualities. In organizational status, according to Missirians’s study (1982, in Samier, 2000) mentors are seen as brilliant, charismatic,physically attractive, boundlessly energetic, innovative, and inspiring. While in professional qualities, mentors are seen have the ability to evaluate and apply technical knowledge and skill to the setting through divergent thinking (Schon,in Samier,2000).

Come to personal qualities, it is include a broad range of intellectual, social and emotional traits. Anderson and Shannon (1988 in Samier,2000) propose essential dispositions in mentoring which are opening to their protege, leading incrementally and to show that care and concern to personal and professional welfare. On the other hand, proteges must be able to understand and accept their mentors in emotional, intellectual and social ways. Zey (1984 in Samier,2000) identified qualities of proteges that attract mentor which are competence, a desire to learn, initiative,intelligence, ambition, desire and ability to accept power and risk, loyalty, ability to establish alliances, and organizational savvy. Character of the relationship in mentor-protege relationship is perceived as a private, dynamic and mutually transformative relationship which is showed by trust of each other. (Samier,2000). Those Samier’s conceptual framework of Mentor is proposed to give a guidance to understand mentorship and how to adopt it in organizational strategy.

Functions of mentoring relationship as propose by Ragins(1989,p. 2), explain aspects which are training and inside information on the organization and its political function, role of mentor as a counselor, friend, role model and coach, and buffer between organization by running interference for the protege and providing special access to information, contacts and resources. Benefits of Mentor-protege Relationship Considering its broad impact, mentor is hoped to assist his protege in professional and personal development.

As defined by Philips-Jones in Carruthers (1997), ‘mentors are influential people who significantly help you to reach your major life goals’. Whitely (1993) finding in his study that career mentoring is particularly related to early career promotion histories, to general work satisfaction and career satisfaction. Bolam,McMahon,Pocklington & Weindling (1995) report their study on a national pilot scheme for mentoring new headteachers in England and Wales.

The result of this study, the proteges mentioned benefits: help with problems, help to give meaning in their new position, reduce the isolation, obtaining another perspective and improving self confidence. On the other hand, mentors also mentioned benefits they get from relationship which are extending their professional experience, encouraging them to engage in reflective self-analysis, experience of sharing and helping others, acting as a sounding board, hearing alternative views about professional issues.

Other view which emphasise the importance of relationship is come from Kram & Isabella (1985). They stated that both parties involved in mentor-protege benefit from the relationship. In the process of mentoring, mentors provide young adult with career-enhancing function and psychosocial support while gain technical and psychological support, gain internal satisfaction and respect from colleagues. From a number of functions in mentoring relationship, proteges gain upward mobility in organization.

Thus, mentoring relationships have been found as a significant factors in career development, organizational success and career satisfaction (Ragins,1989). Alleman (in Carruthers, 1993) identified organizational benefits from mentor-proteges relationship which are increased productivity by both partners, better assessments, improved management and technical skills, discovered latent talent, refined leadership qualities, improved performance, and better recruitment and retention of skilled staff.

Clearly, benefits in mentor-proteges relationship in organizational context have a strong association in leadership. First, from proteges point of view, to experience guidance from their mentor has given them insight to behave properly or to use appropriate leadership style in many situation. It is integrated in their developmental process to gain heir own identity as a leader. Secondly, from mentors point of view, the relationship also add their capabilities as leaders, in this case their ability to develop other people.

Other Effects in Relationship Meanwhile, on individual levels mentor-proteges relationship also becomes sources of tension and conflict. Braun (1990 in Samier 2000) states that these tension and conflict vary from peers feeling that the protege has acquired illegitimate advantage, to colleagues not approving of the mentor’s choice in protege, to colleagues and significant others in both the mentor and protege’s lives becoming suspicious in gender different pairing.

Beside those inter personal conflict between mentor or protege and people around them, proteges should experience social and professional isolation because special assignments and extra works from those relationship (Missirian,1982 in Samier,2000). Carruters (1993) describes disadvantages in mentor-protege relationship: elitism or jealousy in mentor and protege peers, the Matthew effect which is increases the existing gap, the Salieri phenomenon when a mentor prevents his protege’s outstanding work, spouse jealousy especially if it is involved different gender, and mentor can perceived his protege as a professional threat.

Baum (1992) who examined the literature on mentoring from psychoanalytic perspective, state that proteges and mentors also bring fantastic meaning unconsciously. In his view, proteges transfer their affection and identify with mentors. In my opinion, this transfer is one of failure in mentoring process because its not reach self autonomy of proteges but otherwise let proteges in dependent relationship with their mentor. Actually, those disadvantages could be diminished with cautious preparation to its model or the way mentoring program is conducted.

Barriers in Mentor-protege Relationship Despite of its promising benefits, there are several factors in mentor-protege relationship that inhibit the process of successful relationship. Samier (2000) suggest that context on organizational level which are culture, systems, size and structure may not be conducive to mentoring. It says that bureaucratic environment often cause mentors and proteges have to engage in covert activities.

Zey (1984 in Samier, 2000) found problems in a mentor-protege program which is not explain the purpose to mentors, different view of corporate culture, participants are coerced, poor evaluation process, inadequate contact with mentors and lack of choice in selecting mentors. Mentor-protege relationship is time and energy consuming. It is understandable to find failure in mentoring programs because the lack of support for this program. However, to take this failure as the reason for justify unimportance of the program is immature. Model for Mentorship Program

Samier (2000) proposed comprehensive model in planned mentorship program derived from Andrew(1986), Zey(1984), and Murray (1991) which are: Establish clear goals and a program design which meets existing organizational and training and development needs, including staffing plans to absorb graduates; establish criteria and a process for selecting mentors and proteges; advertise, solicit participation, and screen applicants plus enlist cooperation of entire organization; provide initial orientation and ensure commitment; monitor, counsel and assist during mentoring and evaluate the outcomes of the program and provide information for adjustment.

Considering a model for mentor-protege program, Carruthers(1993) stated that mentoring as a dynamic process needs to try and fit many different ways. In his view, mentoring may summarized as follows: Mutual choice is advocated; the relationship extends beyond professional interest; there is no evidence of threat, there is mutual need; there is little evidence in the literature that mentoring has disadvantage for the proteges; there is evidence of affection and trust. Model is important to give the rough way how mentoring program should be implemented.

As we realize its multifaceted, mentor concept needs to be clearly understood before it take into practice. Mentoring in the Changing Organization Since its practice as a learning process for leadership preparation in Greek mythology until its practical use in human resources management in organization, mentor concept is still relevant to be implemented as organizational tools. However, we should consider other factor such us organizational changing to implement it properly in many different situation.

Kram & Higgins (2002) proposed that there are four significant changes in nature of career: “boundaryless” model of work environment, changing nature of technology, organizational structures and membership. Those changes have changed the nature of mentoring relationships today and particularly emerge increasing variance from which individuals get mentoring support. Also in the same point of view, Kram & Isabella (1985) started to give alternatives for mentoring with peer relationship, and Keele (1986) proposed networking.

Those alternatives and awareness of changing environment in organisation should be considered as enrichment in understanding mentorship role in the process of leadership learning. Conclusion Mentoring as a means in organization has attracted many researches to study its role and dynamic since it is used to increase personal ability and in the end is hoped can give optimum benefits to organizations. There are many views about the role of mentoring in organizations based on the findings.

Based on its function, mentor still play a crucial role in the process becoming a leader. There are functions played by mentor-protege relationship which give meaningful progress in individual development. In this relationship, interpersonal or psychosocial development, career and/or educational development happened as the result of interactive process between mentor and protege. Benefits in mentor-proteges relationship in organizational context have a strong association in leadership.

First, from proteges point of view, to experience guidance from their mentor has given them insight to behave properly or to use appropriate leadership style in many situation. It is integrated in their developmental process to gain heir own identity as a leader. Secondly, from mentors point of view, the relationship also add their capabilities as leaders, in this case their ability to develop other people. All those benefits emphasize the role of mentoring in leadership which is taking a central role to direct the organization into its success.

Mentor program as one of organizations effort to adapt this relationship pattern to maximize personnel development in leadership learning should be implemented carefully. Those to be concerned are: conceptual framework of mentoring, where we need to look its role definition, characteristic of actors, character of relationship and typical phases/stages. Besides that administrator or actors in mentoring program should pay attention to potential effect in relationship and barriers in successful mentoring relationship.

Introduction of mung bean persuasive essay help: persuasive essay help

The mung or moong bean[1] (also known as green gram or golden gram) is the seed of Vigna radiata,[2][3] native to the Indian subcontinent,[4] and mainly cultivated in India, China, The mung bean was domesticated in Mongolia, where its progenitor (Vigna radiata subspecies sublobata) occurs wild. [6][7] Archaeological evidence has turned up carbonized mung beans on many sites in India. [8] Areas with early finds include the eastern zone of the Harappan civilization in Punjab and Haryana, where finds date back about 4500 years, and South India in the modern state of Karnataka where finds date back more than 4000 years.

Some scholars therefore infer two separate domestications in the northwest and south of India. In South India there is evidence for evolution of larger-seeded mung beans 3500 to 3000 years ago. [7] By about 3500 years ago mung beans were widely cultivated throughout India. Cultivated mung beans later spread from India to China and Southeast Asia. Archaeobotanical research at the site of Khao Sam Kaeo in southern Thailand indicates that mung beans had arrived in Thailand by at least 2200 years ago.

Finds on Pemba Island indicate that during the era of Swahili trade, in the 9th or 10th century, mung beans also came to be cultivated in AfricaMung bean starch, which is extracted from ground mung beans, is used to make transparent cellophane noodles (also known as bean thread noodles, bean threads, glass noodles, fensi (?? ), tung hoon (?? ), mi? n, bun tau, or bun tao). Cellophane noodles become soft and slippery when they are soaked in hot water. A variation of cellophane noodles, called mung bean sheets or green bean sheets, are also available. In Korea, a jelly called nokdumuk.

Is made from mung bean starch; a similar jelly, colored yellow with the addition of gardenia coloring, is called hwangpomuk (hangul: ??? ). In northern China, mung bean jelly is called liangfen (?? , meaning chilled bean jelly), which is very popular food during summer. Jidou liangfen is another flavor of mung bean jelly food in Yunnan, in southern China. The starch of mung beans is also extracted from them to make jellies and “transparent” or “cellophane” noodles. Mung batter is used to make crepes named pesarattu in Andhra Pradesh, India.

Sample lang essay help service: essay help service

Hello parents, teachers, and fellow classmates. Welcome to the most important and life changing day of our lives. As I prepared for this speech I couldn’t help but think of how I got to where I am today. The first thing that popped into my head was how much my parents put a lot of thought, and cad asdsadwqeqe ASsadmkwqej SDASqwoiwqewqoeuiiajjsarjhewoiriowequfuwioru riaidasmnce8wquen adasdkjwqmeuiwqiewqr;la fa;lWQIEOQ w,oei21-3 0kra a kindergarten graduation speech – WikiAnswers wiki. answers. com › … › Writing and Composition › Speech Writing? We are gathered here today for the (name of school) Kindergarten Graduation.

This is a great occasion in the lives of all the children. It is also due recognition for … What is an example of a graduation speech by a kindergarten child wiki. answers. com › Wiki Answers › Categories? Can I have a sample of a kindergarten graduation speech? Umm… no. You should be able to write a kindergarten graduation speech fairly well, especially. FORUMOSA • Kindergarten Graduation Speech…. Help https://www. forumosa. com/taiwan/viewtopic. php? f=35&t=107380…? Feb 20, 2012 – 10 posts – ? 7 authors monkeycat wrote: I have to write some kindy graduation speeches. …

We will treasure all you have taught us and miss our kindergarten days. Preschool Graduation Speech Ideas – The Preschool Professor www. the-preschool-professor. com/preschool-graduation-speech. html? Stuck on ideas for a preschool graduation speech? Check out our sample speeches and have parents in awe! Kindergarten Graduation Speech Free Essays 1 – 20 – StudyMode. com www. studymode. com/… /kindergarten-graduation-speech-page1. html? Free Essays on Kindergarten Graduation Speech for students. Use our papers to help you with yours 1 – 20. Kindergarten Graduation Speech – TeachersPayTeachers. com

The Advantages and Disadvantages of Using the Internet free essay help: free essay help

Vocabulary: global village, a plethora of options, services, dissemination of information, silver bullet, Babel, rambling, reliability, veracity, ascertain the reliability, rapid pace of change, information overload, landmines, at the click of a mouse, maligned, comfort of home, assimilated, indispensable, pervasive, rife, program vs programme, having access to, beyond reproach, estranged, Be careful of one/you/we/I Linking words Brainstorm Information: (be careful that you must explain and not assume the reader knows online terms) Advantages: 1) Information on almost every subject imaginable.

2) Powerful search engines 3) Ability to do research from your home versus research libraries. 4) Information at various levels of study. Everything from scholarly articles to ones directed at children. 5) Message boards where people can discuss ideas on any topic. Ability to get wide range of opinions. People can find others that have a similar interest in whatever they are interested in. 6) The internet provides the ability of emails. Free mail service to anyone in the country. 7) Platform for products like SKYPE, which allow for holding a video conference with anyone in the world who also has access.

8) Friendships and love connections have been made over the internet by people involved in love/passion over similar interests. 9) Things such as Yahoo Answers and other sites where kids can have readily available help for homework. 10) News, of all kinds is available almost instantaneously. Commentary, on that news, from every conceivable viewpoint is also available. 11) online shopping 12) online courses Disadvantages: 1) There is a lot of wrong information on the internet. Anyone can post anything, and much of it is garbage.

2) There are predators that hang out on the internet waiting to get unsuspecting people in dangerous situations. 3) Some people are getting addicted to the internet and thus causing problems with their interactions of friends and loved ones. 4) Pornography that can get in the hands of young children too easily. 5) Easy to waste a lot of time on the internet. You can start surfing, and then realize far more time has passed than you realized. Internet and television together of added to the more sedentary lifestyles of people which further exacerbates the obesity problem.

6) Internet has a lot of “cheater” sites. People can buy essays and pass them off as their own far more easily than they used to be able to do. 7) There are a lot of unscrupulous businesses that have sprung up on the internet to take advantage of people. 8) Hackers can create viruses that can get into your personal computer and ruin valuable data. 9) Hackers can use the internet for identity theft. 10) It can be quite depressing to be on the internet and realize just how uneducated so many people have become in today’s society. 11) a lack of human touch and customisation of learning e. g.in teaching, facebook 12) identity theft 13) online addiction; waste of time Plan: (You must group the information from the brainstorm and ensure the information can be used to support your TOPIC SENTENCE) Intro: Internet is everywhere. Teenagers think it’s indispensable. Para 2: An Advantage of the Internet is that it grants us a lot of convenience – online shopping, gambling, easier to perform research, forum groups for discussion Para 3: An Advantage of the Internet is that it allows us better understanding of the world – the world is but a click away, google search, translation tool, youtube, coursera Para 4: A disadvantage of the Internet is that it increases crime of various forms – scams in purchases, funds transfer, identity theft, hacking of computer systems, password collection Para 5: A disadvantage of the Internet is that it reduces human contact – with the convenience of purchases and communication from one’s desktop, one may not even travel out of the comfort of home. – facebook, purchases, research Conclusion: the internet is much maligned but the truth is that it has both adv and disadvantages. – We need to be sensible. (a piece of advice) Sample

There are certain things in life which are essential: sunlight, food, water and oxygen. However, if you ask a naive teenager what is crucial for him to lead his life, it would be no surprise if he told you that it is the Internet. (The preceding sentence is in the past tense as it is hypothetical. ) This is really not surprising as the Internet and its use have pervaded so much of our lives. Like all other inventions, the Internet brings with it advantages and disadvantages. (It is up to you whether you want to list the adv and disadv in the intro. If you do, list them in the order that you write to show ORGANIZATION. ) Perhaps the most obvious advantage of the Internet is the convenience it gives. For just about anything that we need to do in life, the Internet offers an alternative way of doing it. In fact, often with the Internet, we can perform activities faster and cheaper. For example, previously, when we needed to perform research for school projects, the traditional method was that we marched to the library, ploughed through reference books that weigh a tonne. We then made photocopies of the relevant materials before compiling all the information using a typewriter or by hand.

Today, Google is a researcher’s best friend, and with a few keystrokes of the keyboard and clicks of the mouse, voila — we have found the information! Discussions among project members can even be done via forum groups online or simply over messaging programs such as Whatsapp. The convenience of the Internet is boundless! (You may want to write more on other convenience e. g. online entertainment. Notice how the ‘L’ in ‘PEEL’ is rephrased. ) Another benefit of having access to and using the Internet is that we gain a better understanding of the world.

Many scholars proclaim that the world is now a global village; perhaps they are right — the world is vast but today everyone and everything feels so close and intimate. And why not? We have unimpeded access to any and every piece of information that we desire to know. We can just as easily learn the laws of Singapore as we can find out how to purchase illicit drugs! This in fact is true of any topic that we choose to discover. Even when the information is a foreign language, there are online tools for translation!

Do we have any excuse for not having a deeper knowledge of everything? Without doubt, the Internet is not beyond reproach. Crime is a persistent streak of mankind and the Internet is not spared from it either. In fact, weekly, for every Internet success story we read, we read an equivalent internet crime. Scams are a dime a dozen. Who can forget the litany of Nigerian emails claiming to sell potent drugs or cheap mobile phones? Perhaps rarer but more criminal is identity theft. As much as we enjoy the joys of the Internet, we need to tread carefully in the land of minefields.

Another downside of using the internet is that we may gradually lose the human touch. In years past, we socialised by spending time at shopping malls with friends, lazing on the couch while watching television programmes with our family. Today, we socialise by updating our status on Facebook, while many families do not gather in front of the television set as each one of us watch our preferred shows via a laptop or a mobile phone. Even when we are on an outing, often, we are transfixed on the phone! So even if physically we are side by side, mentally we are estranged.

There is no doubt that the Internet has brought with it a myriad of benefits. (you may want to re-list the adv and disadv if you don’t have enough words. ) Yet, it is inevitable that the cons co-exist with the pros. Hopefully, most of us — especially teenagers — have the sensibility to reap the benefits of using the Internet while mitigating their disadvantages by making responsible and sounds decisions. (don’t end with new info or new adv or disadv; here we end with a simple, short piece of advice. The reason for adding in “teenagers” is to link to the introduction. )

Bharti Enterprises college application essay help online: college application essay help online

Ensuring that the look and feel of the store is as per guidelines/standards Ensuring/ reporting Inventory and Stock availability as per the norms to prevent stock-outs Provide suggestions /feedback to improve store productivity People Development / Team Management: Acting as a mentor and trainer for store staff To ensure daily roistering & briefing to inbound & outbound store staff Customer Experience: Manage staff allocation based on demand at point in time Personally step in to handle demanding customers Provide suggestions for improvements in CE 4. A.

On Diversity and Cultural spread in Africa, As Africa consists of 53 countries, to operate successfully it is important to understand the dynamics of each country, including differences in culture, language and especially regulations. Bharti would do well to put in place as few expatriates as possible and have most of its top management from Africa. b. On Infrastructure sharing and cost / capital issues, The biggest driver of network sharing will be the shift in approach of the biggest operators, who had been unwilling to share network to sustain competitive advantage.

There is visible network sharing in the markets of Nigeria, Ghana and South Africa, and that this is likely to pick up in other markets. c. On Bharti Airtel’s Minute Factor Model, Network sharing and IT outsourcing would help operators bring down costs. While costs could trend down, however they will be higher than in India because of some of the structural costs caused by power shortage and poor infrastructure. 5. Bharti Airtel has a history of making first moves and emerging as the winner just because of that.

This is what built the company’s success in India, where it remains the top MNO and second-largest fixed-line operator. In fact, thanks to the massive market it serves at home, at the time it acquired the Zain portfolio in March 2010 Airtel was reckoned to be the fifth largest mobile operator in the world on a proportional subscriber basis, putting it behind the likes of China Mobile, Vodafone Group, American Movil and Telefonica, but ahead of China Unicom. As has been widely covered for over a year now, Airtel has been looking at Africa as a new growth market.

While it has a deal with Vodafone for the Channel Islands, Africa is the only other territory outside the Indian subcontinent (including Bangladesh and Sri Lanka) that the company has entered. The commonalities are compelling: similar markets, needs and infrastructure. The realities on the ground are somewhat more challenging: logistics, legislative compliance and serious local competition being foremost. The logistics of infrastructure in Africa are an equal challenge for all MNOs. That is a given.

Where Airtel might have been overly optimistic is in hoping its Africa model would run similarly to its success in India, based on a first-to-market approach and having some leverage to overcome legislative obstacles. Unfortunately, while Airtel has a 30-year history of being first in India (with pushbutton phones, cordless phones and then mobile), they were not first in Africa. There were major EU, Middle East and South African players there ahead of them. In fact, Airtel’s African expansion is largely thanks to its takeover of Kuwait’s Zain mobile operations in 15 countries.

This was a beachhead, not a conquest. Zain only held dominant market share in a few countries. Going up against market leaders such as MTN of South Africa, Airtel applied a strategy of extensive cost cutting. This followed on what it achieved in India, cutting a deal with Ericsson for per-minute fees (rather than upfront payment) that enabled very low-cost call rates from the outset. Airtel has an all-Africa, five-year deal in place with Ericsson for network management that offers similar advantages.

Elsewhere, Airtel is engaged with Nokia Siemens Networks and Huawei, not keeping all its eggs in one basket, of course. As a Plan B, possibly following on the indecisive outcome of Airtel’s low-cost invasion, the company has previously been negotiating a takeover of or (maybe) a joint venture with MTN itself. How this putative deal is described depends on which company is talking. This has been going on for some four years without a definitive ending. Even if it never happens, it is a signpost of just what Airtel would consider to get its Africa operations truly established.

Ang pag-ibig english essay help: english essay help

We live in a time where entrepreneurship is finally a focus of a significant number of colleges and universities, and is even reaching into high schools. The question I have is: why has it taken so long for schools to recognize the importance of, and start teaching, students about entrepreneurship? I am proud to say that I learned a lot from my Entrepreneurship subject specially when you start a business you must start small and end more profit. And specially when Sir Abog said that when you start a business we must have first a business planning execution is where the money is at.

Write something short, sweet and to the point and get on with it. I always preach about my One Paragraph Start Up Plan as the best way to get started. I learned also on how Strategic partners are not always good ideas. Before you bring on anyone as a business partner, determine if truly “partnering” is the best option. Decide if alternatives such as sharing revenue or doing a joint venture are a better fit. Make sure you know everything about the person you wish to partner with, from their political backgrounds to their business ethics. And if you decide to go ahead and bring on a partner, be sure to create an operating agreement that clearly states what happens in every possible outcome—from a partner leaving to a partner dying. I learned also on how business growth happens in real time. I learned also, no matter how successful you are, accept that you will fail again. Failure is good. It will be your guide to smarter, better decisions. The faster you realize that your business will never be perfect and there is no such thing as smooth sailing, you’ll grow as a leader as a result. Learned also practice strategic thinking not planning.

The best plans can be made obsolete in a minute. I learned also that Entrepreneurship majors learn how to build, promote, and manage their own businesses. They also learn how to apply their creativity and energy to make existing businesses more productive. Learned on how nearly all entrepreneurship programs will require you to take a class in developing a business plan — the backbone behind any idea. Your plan will discuss your dream business, your goals, and how you plan to achieve them. A plan will show other professionals how good your idea really is.

It will also come in handy when you go looking for money to get started. Banks and investors will want to see it before handing over the funds. I realized that if high schools focused on entrepreneurship, freedom would rule the campus. Entrepreneurship gives students, adults, and even children the ability to express themselves. It would give us the opportunity to see how brilliant young minds really can be and the types of ideas, visions, and goals they have. High school entrepreneurship promotes students to focus less on curriculum and more on their passions, which makes the learning experience fun and far more engaging.

By focusing on entrepreneurship, students would truly have the option to pursue their dreams. Passion would be the driving force behind what the reality of a future career or advanced education would mean. High schools would be a place to foster creativity and interest, giving students the opportunity to take action and responsibility for creating their future. I learned also what are Business practices about general business practices that are recommended in maintaining the appropriate accountability structure. I learned also on how to cooked Special Bihon, how to sale into the costumers, how to be a good and nice to the costumers.

Entrepreneurship subject helps me how to be a future Entrepreneurship soon , helps to learned Business economic development to our country. Learned also what are the 8 consumers rights like Right to Basic Needs, Right to Safety, Right to Information, Right to Choose, Right to Representation, Right to Redress, Right to Consumer Education, and the last Right to a Healthy Environment. Actually I learned a lot in our Entrepreneurship subject and I am thankfull of our beloved teachers Mr. Marjun Abog and also Dr. Lita Ladera-Jomoc for teaching us on how to be a good Entrepreneurship.

Highline Case Study essay help free: essay help free

Define the Problem: Highline Financial Services, Ltd. offers three diverse services to its clientele. We are given the demand for the three services over a two year period – broken down into four quarters each – totaling eight quarters of data. Given this data, we are asked to forecast the following four quarters for year three and explain the observations made. However, we must assume that Highline Financial Services, Ltd. has not made any changes in advertising, promotion or competition. For this problem we look to try and gather an estimate of what the best forecasting method will be for the demand of services A, B, and C.

The methods of analysis used to attain the figures include; linear regression, regression model, and forecast error analysis. Plan the Treatment: In order to apply all of the demand forecasting methods properly and acquire the most accurate demand forecast, we must do the following… Graph historical demand – define the key data elements. Define the time horizon – forecast must include a time interval. Clean the Historical data – there usually exist problems with the quality and completeness of data, “clean” (remove) all data that is found unnecessary to the forecast. Select a forecasting technique or multiple forecasting methods.

Make the forecast. Execute: In order to make the best forecast possible, it is imperative to understand the past demand in order to better see what type of data and trends to look for. Linear Regression attempts to model a relationship between two variables; the dependent variable (y) and an explanatory variable (x). Linear Regression allows for a visual look into the linear trend of a forecast. It formulates the best-fitting straight line for the plotted data. Linear Regression allows for a visual view in determining whether the trend is ascending (positive) or descending (negative).

Thus, we are already given clues that adjustments for trends may be necessary. Now that the demand data has been analyzed, I will begin to explain the three methods of forecast mentioned in the section (define the problem). Static Regression Forecasting: We now perform a static forecast of the demand data to give us a model which has level and trend as constants. These parameters are based off historical data provided, and held constant for the forecasting of new demand. The static forecasts for services A, B, and C are shown below. The steps necessary to obtain their values are used with the regression tool in excel.

First you plot the x and y coordinates into an excel spreadsheet. Afterwards, you would select the demand data, click on the Data tab – Data Analysis Tab – Search for Regression – Input the y and x range – Click Ok. Once these forecasts have been made, we can stack the forecasting method against the actual demand to observe its effectiveness. Service A: Service B: Service C: Deseasonalizing: Seasonal variations are “regularly repeating movements in series values that can be tied to recurring events” (Stevenson). However, our demand data lacks the information used to develop seasonal relatives.

Thus, in order the remove the seasonal component from a set of data, one would deseasonalize the data. Deseasonalizing data allows for a clearer representation of the non-seasonal (trend) components. In order to obtain deseasonilzed demand for the forecast one must divide the demand data by the seasonal relative. The resulting values from this equation were calculated in excel and are shown below. The tables descend from Service A >B>C. Deasonalized demand for quarter three in the table above was obtained by taking 100 and dividing it by 1. 40056. D1= 100/1.

Now that the regression results are obtained, we have the equations to get the deseasonalized regressed demand equations. The equations are: Service A: 64. 2 + 2. 4x Service B: 90. 2875 + (-2. 425)(x) Service C: 98. 3875 + (-0. 6)(x) To find the average seasonal factor for each quarter we simply take the same quarter of every year and average all of them together. Once the average seasonal factors are obtained, you can obtain the re-seasonalized data forecasts by multiplying the regressed demand against the average seasonal factor for each period.

This acquired demand data is now used as your forecast demand. Forecast Error Calculation: Error analysis can provide a helpful look at the effectiveness of a forecast as it tells us how our forecasting method statistically stacks up against the actual demand data that we have been given. If the error analysis comes back with low errors, we know we have created a good forecast. The methods for finding these error values are shown below: Error: is found by simply subtracting the forecasted demand against the actual demand. Absolute Error: Absolute value of the error.

Mean Squared Error (MSE): States the variance (square root) of the forecast error, and is calculated with the following equation, MSE= ? (Actualt – Forecastt)2 / n-1 Mean Absolute Deviation (MAD): is the average absolute forecast error > solved with the following equation, MAD =? |Actualt – Forecastt| / n Mean Absolute Percentage Error (MAPE): determines whether a forecast is consistently over-estimating or under-estimating the demand. The equation is as follows, MAPE= (? |Actualt – Forecastt| / Actualt) *100)) / (n) % Error: Measures the percent difference between the absolute error and the actual demand.

Solved by the following equation: %E= 100*(Absolute Error/ Demand) Conclusion: Overall, Service A appears to be increasing and should continue to increase over the next year (four quarters). According to the Adjusted R Square, the model is an A model with a score of . 996104. Service B appears to be decreasing annually and the data demonstrates that it will most likely follow a decreasing pattern. However, although Service B has a negative slope it is also the best rated model with and Adjusted R Square of . 99666. Service C shows an inconsistent demand pattern. Service C was also rated as an F model with an Adjusted R Square of . 229114. In addition, Service C is very scattered and has a high mean absolute deviation. Concern: In general all three services follow a trend. However, according to the forecasted data, Service B poses the greatest risk of concern. Service B continues to follow a downward linear trend in both the historical data and the forecasted data. Thus signifying that demand for Service B will continue to decrease. Simply, Service B has little opportunity for growth and anticipates a decline in profit. In addition, even though Service C follows an inconsistent pattern, overall it continues to follow a minimal increase in its linear trend.

As mentioned earlier, Service C was rated as an F model, thus suggesting that there is room for improvement. If improvements are made the model will increase to a level closer to 1. 00 or 100% thus making it a better model. Eventually, there might still appear a scatter in data however the demand will continue to increase with a positive slope. Forecasting: Forecasted data is only an estimate, can and is subject to change. Works Cited: Stevenson, William J. Operations Management. 11th ed. New York: McGraw-Hill/Irwin, 2012. Print.

Importance of country’s economic system buy argumentative essay help: buy argumentative essay help

I not surprise , according to my past experience as a material controller in LG electronics and nowadays as a purchasing member in Suez Canal Authority The Logistics has a historical relationship with the Economic system specially with GDP . before 1980 logistics didn’t exceed the 10% of GDP , but this percentage has been increased yearly until 2005 , the logistics represent 45% of the GDP

This importance not only on the Macro level bit also on the Micro level , for example the private sector in china recognize that as china’s labor cost advantage shifts to other countries , logistics becomes an essential component to fueling an economy that has been expanding at between 8 and 10 % per year Q2:) Due to technical problems, Toyota had recalled various models of their cars in the international market. This in return had a severe impact on their strategic and operational thinking and planning. From a logistics management perspective, describe how the logistics function can contribute to overcome Toyota’s recall crisis.

Answer First of all we must define the problem that cause the recall , TOYOTA has found in 2013 That the problem is due to water leaking out from the air conditioning condenser unit into the airbag control module TOYOTA recall around 850,000 cars from the international market To contribute the overcome recall TOYOTA must work on 2 main points: 1- The inbound logistics : this focus on the purchasing materials and input quality control ( IQC ) . the purchasing dep. Must check the supplier material to ensure that TOYOTA get best quality and best price and must make a continuous physical inspection by IQC dep.

The outbound logistics : Toyota has faced an unprecedented series of recalls in recent years, including a number of service actions related to so-called unintended acceleration, The maker will directly notify owners in the weeks ahead and dealers will make repairs at no charge. The fix requires the application of sealant and a new cover to prevent water from leaking onto the airbag control module. this will focus on the service center allocated worldwide to continuous get a feedback from customers and reported to the operational dep. And also to manage the current recall customers to be ensure that there vehicles problem has been solved .

Seasonality in Melaka Tourism Industry descriptive essay help: descriptive essay help

Seasonality in tourism demand is common among all sectors which involve in the industry and become a focal issue, particularly in the peripheral destinations and areas with four seasons. Seasonality phenomenon in tourism can be seen obviously in the East Coast of the Peninsular Malaysia during the Northeast Monsoon due to the heavy rainfalls and this affect seriously on the tourist arrivals to the islands which are the main tourist destinations.

The issues of seasonality in tourism demand should not only focus on the natural aspect, where we could also look through some places which might have the possibility of having the same phenomenon in other tourist destinations. Thus, the main objectives of this research are to identify the pattern of tourist arrivals and to examine the factors of the seasonal tourism demand. The reason of doing this research in Melaka is because of the increment in tourist arrivals and heavy tourism activities since it was declared as one of the World Heritage Cities by UNESCO in year 2008.

However, the congestion and overcrowded during peak season which exceed the carrying capacity has affected the quality of the environment and the travel experience of the tourists. On the other hand, the seasonal phenomenon also affects on the tourism businesses particularly during the low season which causes them hard to survive. The local authority has to take actions to overcome this problem in ensuring an excellent tourism development since the economic development of Melaka relies heavily on the tourism industry within the area.

The impact of computer innovation on commercial bank in nigeria personal essay help: personal essay help

Glory, honour and adoration are to God Almighty the alpha and omega for the opportunity given to me to pursue my career. I am expressing my sincere gratitude to my able and efficient Co-coordinator and Supervisor, Prince Madandola T. N. who tender heartedly to read through the script, offered useful suggestion and assistance and also for his motivation, patience and understanding which contributed to shaping the course of the study. My unreserved appreciation goes to my parents Mr. Ganiy Ibrahim and Mrs. Ayandokun for their support since I was born till date and forever.

May they live long to reap the fruits of their labour. I am also grateful to my lecturers in the university, especially department of Computer Science. Also, I send gratitude to my course mate for their trust in me throughout the course of study. My special thanks to my brothers and sisters Ibrahim Kafayat, Ibrahim Monsurat, Adebayo habeeb, Adebayo fatimoh, Adebayo Barakat, Adebayo Hammed, Adebayo Ibrahim, Adebayo Taiye and Kehinde for their prayer throughout my study, I love you all. May you all obtain favour anywhere you face in life (Amen).

I am ingrate if I forget to appreciate my Aunty and mummy Mrs. Yusuph M. for her motivation and encouragement throughout my schooling. If not for her I would have dropped out from J. S. S three. Life without the real friends is like a dark endless tunnel for this I say a big thank to you all, some of them include:- Azeez. Maruf, Lateef, Uthman, Nurudeen, Tajudeen, Sodiq2, Dayo, Ayobami, Olamide, Olaide, Gafar, Ahmed, Olumide, Zynab, Muideen, Muritala, Yusuf, Jamiu and others. I can’t thank you enough, I love you all. Also, I appreciate my wife to be Miss. Yinusa Abosede M.

for her all time contribution, thank you so much. May God help you too? Finally, I thank all those who have been involved in one way or the other in my life. Thank you all. ABSTRACT This study was conducted to examine the impact of computer innovation on commercial banks in Nigeria a case study of United Bank for Africa. This research work has become necessary to investigate the issue in all ramifications, with the view to identify changes in the level of activities of commercial bank as a result of computer innovation in business organizations and commercial banking services.

Although, computer have tendency to reduce labour force but it makes banking operation faster and efficient. Data were gathered after conducting a survey by administering questionnaire and granting personal interview. Simple percentage, bar chart and chi-square were used as statistical tools to analyzed data. Lastly, it was deduced during hypothesis testing process that all the null hypotheses were rejected and alternative hypothesis were accepted, it was agreed that computer innovation has positive impact on banking industry. TABLE OF CONTENTS Title page Certification

Dedication Acknowledgement Abstract Table of Contents CHAPTER ONE: INTRODUCTION Background to the Study Statement of the Problem Research Question Hypotheses Purpose of the Study Significance of the Study Delimitation Definition of Terms CHAPTER TWO: LITERATURE REVIEW Historical Background of computer History of computer in Nigeria Banking services in Nigeria History of United Bank for Africa Plc Role of Computer on the Banking Industry Importance of Computer in the Sector Effort of United Bank for Africa Plc in Computerization Problem facing computer Innovation in Nigeria

These have brought about multiplicity of linkages and inter connection among the financial institution in the present world system. In this expansion of market scope, the process by which events, decision and achievements in one part of the world have significance effects on individuals, corporate organizations and even government on quite different part of the globe. The promotion of global financial system are facilitated by the fact technically, bankers can reach any part of the world in just a little time and part of the ability to integrate previously separate production functions.

Over the last few years the initial computers, every newspaper, article relating to management, education of offices practice seem to refer to the computer revolution but what does computer really means? In essence, computer can be defined as a machine which accept data from an input device, performs arithmetical and logical operations in accordance with a predefined programme and finally transfers the processed data to an output device either for further processing or in find printed form, such as business documents schedules and management control reports. Background to the Study

The computer system has inevitably asserted itself in almost all spheres of human endeavour because of its accuracy, efficiency and high processing data. In a fast growing technological and computer age, various efforts have been made and are still being made to develop computer programmes to enhance all area of human engagement. This is because of the need for information in any organization like the commercial banks. These demands for information exist because of: i. The need to provide current and historical banking record e. g its profit and loss account ii. Need for making short and long term decision iii.

Need to provide information to customers and associate iv. Provide information to investors and share holders v. Provide information for regulatory agencies vi. Competitors also require information to plan their own strategies For any information to be useful it must be timely properly integrated. Concise available in proper format and relevant, Traditional information system failed to satisfy most of this and this is low the computer oriented management information system was develop and fast gaining ground. The growing presence of computer especially in Commercial Banks in the country is enjoyed and its benefit harnessed.

The commercial bank by sheer size in relation to the financial system has experience growth as a result of computer innovation. A commercial bank is a financial institution of claims Akinuli O. defines commercial bank as a dealer in capital, a dealer in money. It is an intermediate party between a borrower and a lender. In Nigeria, a banking act of 1999 defined commercial bank as a business of receiving monthly from outside source and deposit respectively of the payment of interest order granting of money loan and acceptance of credit and cheques of the purchases and sales of security.

Other financial institutions in Nigeria apart from the commercial banks are the central bank, Merchant banks, Agriculture bank, Mortgage bank, Development bank of all financial institutions in general and banks in particular the commercial bankers have distinguished themselves as the grant provider of wide range of deposit abilities and loan facilities to more customers. They are in business and as such, seek to maximize their profits. Commercial banking operations involve acceptance of deposits i. e. mobilization of funds, granting of advance i. e. giving loans financing of commodity exports by granting credits to the marketing boards, acting as issuing houses for debentures, lending funds for business entities etc. A commercial bank is an open social system which affects and is affected by its environment. The commercial bank is made to realize its responsibility to both customers and the government in the society through its functions rendered. The commercial banks traditionally will in fore – seeable future play a dominant role in the Nigeria financial system since they represent the system.

They are also channel through which the monetary policies are affected and they account for a significant portions of the money supply inform of demand deposits. In performing all the above operations the commercial bank need the innovation of computer for effective delivery. The growing in the activities of commercial bank has necessitated the quality of services available. One of the first breaks through in country machine was the Chinese Abacus which Adds, subtracts, divides multiplier.

In 1890, Herman Hollerith developed the first mechanical machines of calculating. He developed computing calculating machine, he finally developed computing recording company known as international business machine or IBM (Onasanya 1995). Computer usage is not limited to the banking industry alone. It is used in homes, establishment, schools, engineering firms and other places where calculations can be done with accuracy and accountability. Statement of the Problem The complexity of modern business demand for a system that is faster and efficient.

In particular banking services has grown overtime application in all form, is inevitable hence the banks have urged there staff to brace up for their imperatives of modern banking by acquiring computer literacy skills. Among the problem this study intends to solve or proffer solution are:- i. Poor Technological know – how ii. Erratic power failure iii. Acquisition of obsolete equipment iv. Lack of technical skills v. Lack of capital Research question i. What impact in qualitative term does computer innovation have on the activity of commercial banks? ii.

What global business effect or networking does computer innovation has on commercial banks? iii. Identify problems associated with rapid development of computer on the banking services Hypotheses For the purpose of this research work, some alternative hypotheses were formulated on the impact of computer innovation on commercial banks in Nigeria. These are:- i. There is a positive relationship in the introduction of computer in banks and their performance ii. There is drastic reduction in banking labour force in relationship with computer innovation iii.

There is decline in workers performance/activity in relationship to introduction of computer in banking sector Purpose of the Study The main purpose of this study is to conduct empirical research highlighting the impact of computer innovation on the financial institution. Therefore, the specific purposes of this study are:- i. To find out changes (positive and negative) in the level of activity of commercial bank as a result of computer innovation ii. To know the extent in which computer innovation has promoted global business organization.

iii. To find out how computer innovation make commercial bank services faster ad efficiency iv. To determine whether computer innovation reduces banking labour forces Significance of the Study However, by 1986 when SAP (structural adjusted programme) was introduced the forces unleashed by the liberalization and deregulation not only changed the structure of the banking industry, but also the content of services and banking business, leading to increased competition among banks, as well as between banks and other financial institution.

This competition now is not only in the area of struggle for available clients, but also for skilled manpower, capital deposits and ability to use the relevant gadgets to speed-up banking transaction. Also the growing recognition to suit banking needs in Nigeria and elsewhere for sometime to come and continue to contribute towards improving the quality of services available. Indeed, with the emergency of the global digital economy and increased internationalization and competition, Nigeria banks must enlarge and deepen their technological base, if they are to viable domestically and competitive internationally. Delimitation

This research will be conducted mainly on the commercial banks innovation of computer in Nigeria with particular attention drawn on United Bank for Africa Plc. For easiest conduct, the research will be limited to United Bank for Africa Ilorin main branch, though the success of this research depends on the cooperation of the organization. The organization might have fear of leakage of information to its competitor and the need to prevent fraud may make it difficult to get all the necessary data. Therefore, data integrate; data security and control will be maintained. The research was hampered by the location of this study and financial constraints. The location was restricted to only Ilorin branch because not all the branches of UBA Plc have been computerized in the country. Researching the study to Ilorin branch area will definitely deny the researcher the opportunity of examining the mode of operations in other sates where the Bank also has enough branches. The researcher moves from the college to the field to source for materials, buying of textbooks, researchers modify expenditures by giving the research work a top priority, thereby overcoming the problem of finance. Definition of Term These are definition of some terms:-

Computer: – is a machine that stores information and can workout answer to sums very quickly, machine that accepts data (Harold, 1981). Computer can also be define as a powerful electronic device which has the capacity of arithmetic and logical operations on data and produce the result of these operations as information (Adebisi, 2004). Innovation: – is an existing new idea or method that people are using for the first time. Economics: – as a subject can be define as a social science which studies human behaviour as a relationship between ends and scarce means which have alternative uses (Oyeniyi, 1997).

Chart:- is a map, large piece of paper with information on it in pictures and uniting Commercial bank: – (or business bank) is a type of financial institution and intermediary, it is a bank that lends money and provides savings, and money market accounts and that accepts time deposit (Steven, 2003). Survey:- is the technique and science of collecting information Questionnaire: – is a research instrument consisting of a series of questions and other prompt for the purpose of gathering information from respondents. (Mellengerh, 2008) Banking: – is the business conducted or services offered by bank. CHAPTER TWO

REVIEW OF RELATED LITERATURE In this study attempt has been made to research into the impact of computer innovation on commercial bank with special reference to United Bank of Africa plc. It is hoped that in the process of pursuing this goal, all good points as well as the inadequacies or short coming in our computerization will be highlighted. In delving into the practice of banking in relation to computerization a number of interesting literatures was reviewed. A computer can be define as an electronic device capable of accepting data automatically, perform some logical operation in order to produce a result known as information.

Computer has made it possible to vast amount of information needed to increase the efficiency in production and management. Computers are device for processing information at high speed by electronic methods. It has the ability of accepting data, internally store and automatically executes a programme of instruction, reports the results. Computer systems compose of two broad categories operation. One category of programme is controls aspects of it operation, the other category consist of the application programme which instructs the computer to perform those procedure necessary to get job done. Historical Background of Computer

The emergency of computers dated back to the 17th century B. C. when the first tool called Abacus was used. The first ABACUS was invented about 300 B. C. it used pebbles to perform simple additions and subtraction. The second type was the Chinese ABACUS which used wire and beads, it perform some operations as the first one but with increased speed and accuracy. In 1642, the French mathematician Blaise Pascal invented the first automatic calculator. In the early 1670’s a German mathematician Gottfreid with elonvon cerbruiz extended the usefulness of Pascal calculator (world book encyclopedia 1990 page 908-923).

The most remarkable invention was that of the English mathematician, Charles Babbage. In 1830’s he invented a mechanical computer called analytical and difference engine. Therefore, the first successful computer a punched card system which used electricity was developed in 1980 by Herman Hollerith for calculation of census result. In 1896, Hollerith founded the tabulation machine company and some of the machines he developed were key machines, verifier, sorters and calculators most of Hollerith’s machines are incorporated into today’s modern computers.

In 1911, Hollerith sold his share of the company and the name was changed to the computing tabulating recording company (C. T. R). In 1924, the name again changed to international business Machine Company (IBM) Vennever Bush, an America Electrical engineer developed a computer in 1930, he built the differential analysis which was the first analog computer. Some scientist and engineers saw greater computing potential in electronics therefore in 1939 Join V. Aranagost constructed the first semi-electronic computing device. This led to the manufacture of the first high speed electronic cod breaking computer, colossus I in Britain in 1943.

In 1946, S. Prosper Jr. and John William Mauchily built the first full electronic digital called ENAIC (Electronic Numerical Integrator and Computer). In 1951, Eckert and Mauchily invented a more advance computer called UNIVAC 1 (Universal Automatic computer). Invention or the history of computer development can essentially be classified into two main generations namely: Vacuum tubes series and Transistors (semi conductors). The invention of transistor in 1847 led to the production of faster and reliable electronic computer.

The first personal computer, the ALTAIR was introduced in 1975 by a company called MITS and 1977 American students Steven P. Jobs and Stephen G. Klozatak introduced the apply II pc (Macmillan Encyclopedia). Already some computers utilize voices and hard written inputs and peripheral devices with speed. These are the first generation computers being programmed as automatic machines called Robots. These robots have the computer brain (processor) and cab perform complex routines. In the future, even more computing power will be smaller and more portable.

As computer power increase, so did its speed. Computer researchers continue to seek ways to develop faster and more powerful machines and software. As computer improve, so it will operate in such powered batteries and they will not be limited to specialist alone, ordinary people of all ages rely on them for everyday use. All above activities set stage for introduction of the IBM personal computer. The dept of IBM, PC, using PC DOS occurred on Tuesday august 11, 1981 on the day a new stand took its place in the micro computer industry (Ifrah, 2001). History of Computer in Nigeria

The computer system has inevitably asserted itself in all spheres of human endeavour of which banking is one because of its accuracy, efficiency, transfer of information and high speed in processing data. In the fast growing technological and computer age, various efforts have been made to develop computer programme to positively enhance all areas of human engagements. Micro computer has become a necessary adjunct to modern life. The micro computers service diverse interests and solve various problems to made life more comfortable and bearable both at home and in the professional fields in Nigeria.

It was in 1964 that the computer (IBM 1401) made a quick entry into the Nigeria society. Today, there is a growing presence of the computer in the country. The oil and business sector enjoy its usage most which the benefit are being enjoyed by other sectors of the Nigeria economy. Several accounting and statistical computer were introduced. Database which is an integrated collection or ordered data about an organization with minimum depreciation as pool information for many users has the capacity:- i. To create and maintain a database ii.

Extract all records and list them especially those that met certain conditions iii. Meet an enquiry (about a customer/employer) iv. Sort record in ascending or descending order v. Generate formatted reports with sub totals and totals The above capabilities are considered by nearly all the sectors in the economy. Computer development in Nigeria since its introduction moved to all spheres. Now that computer education has been introduced in many schools and institutions, computer science students can be encouraged to open research grounds between computer utilization and all practices.

Computer has fond its way into business environment by automating many corporate functions. Areas covered include sales and marketing, accounting, engineering etc. computer has since been used in Nigeria for commercial purposes as well as for recreation. The level of use for both purposes in our society is likely to give and be more purposeful in the nearest future. It is reasonable to expect share differences between developing countries such as Nigeria. Banking Services in Nigeria In Nigeria, the earliest banking activities were carried out by Elder Demister and company in 1894.

In 1894, the bank British for West Africa (now first bank) took over the backing business and remained as the sole bank in the country until 1917, when the colonial bank, Barclays bank D. C. O (now the union bank) opened offices in Jos, Kano and Port Harcourt. These two banks are still in operations. The first indigenous banking, the industrial and commercial bank was established in 1929 but failed in 1930. The Nigerian merchant bank was formed in 1931 and went out of business in 1936. In 1933, the national bank of Nigeria opened.

The next important event was not until 1945, when the Agbonmagbe (now Wema bank) was established. The African continental bank was formed in 1946 as “Tinubu bank” and changed its name to its present formed in 1947. The United Bank for Africa formally the British and French ban was opened in 1949. These last four banks are of course still in existence but whilst they were being established seven banks were also coming into being and disappearing almost as quickly. The collapse for example of the Nigeria penny in 1946, where many depositors lost their money pointed to the need for legislators to protect the public.

The first banking ordinance appeared in 1952 and rules that no bank would be allowed to operate without a license from the government. Apart from the banks in existence at that time, eighteen new banks were granted license (Olashore, 1984). By 1954, seventeen of those eighteen banks had closed and it was then evident that stronger, more effective laws be established. The central bank of Nigeria took over for ensuring monetary stability and a sound financial structure throughout the economy. Today, there are many commercial banks of which United bank for Africa Plc is one and many merchant banks in operation.

These banks above have various role been performed in the country’s economy. History of United Bank for Africa PLC The United bank for Africa limited has its antecedents rooted in that of its precursor, the British and French bank limited. The British and French bank limited itself, metamorphosed from BNCI Paris, Banque national Pourle commerce et 1 industries (established in 1932). Messrs E. G. Hunger Buhler and C. H Baker arrived in Nigeria in early 1949 from BNCI, Paris, and lodge at the britistol Hotel, Lagos. Both men made initial arrangement for the setting up of the British and French bank. Mr.

Hunger left shortly after the bank was established while Mr. Baker stayed back for a few years as an officer. Another big influence on the establishment of the bank was Mr. Herve Laroche. He was the head of the rapid growth of the new bank. In May 1949, the British and French bank began operations in Nigeria, at 117, broad street, Lagos which today houses a part of the king’s way store complex. The bank occupied a floor of the building at the junction of Davres and Broad Street, facing the breadfruit church. The bank officially opened to business in December 1949 with staff strength of twelve, its first general manager was a Frenchman Mr.J. Piporaud who died in 1950 while swimming at the bar beach, Victoria Island, Lagos. He was succeeded by Mr. g. Martin, another Frenchman. One February 23, 1961, the united bank for Africa limited was in cooperated to take over the assets and liabilities of the British and French bank. The official opening of the bank for business under the new name was on October 3, 1961. Its registered office was at 127-129 Broad Street, Lagos, Mr. f. Delajugie was first general manager. By 1961, the bank had grown from its one office to ten branches located in Lagos, Kano, Kaduna and Port Harcourt.

The branches that pioneered this early development of the bank included Kano branch established in 1954, Ebute Metta branch (May 1955), Apapa warehouse road branch (October 1956) and Lagos east (December 1958), At present, the bank has over 200 branches and staff strength of approximately 11,000. The bank had mapped out training programme of different kinds for its staff. Apart from attending courses at different levels at its staff training centre, some staff attends outside courses relevant to their jobs both locally and overseas. Role of Computer in the Banking Industryi. In invention and development of computer, it’s helpful devices which ease the burden of calculation and assistance to human effort. ii. Introduction of computer system reduces labour and cost activity to be performed by many workers are being done only by a machine iii. A computer is needed in banking industry for performing simple arithmetic and provides storage of data, for example, balance in customers major roles the storage stores the result of operation of the bank for future references. iv. One of it role can be seen also in foreign exchange transaction.

It can easily convert the local currency. It can also give movement of stock and share in the stock exchange v. In the banking department it has enhance cashier cashing facilities checking balances etc. vi. The computer system can be used in the personal department of the industry in preparing employer payment, record of services, date of employee’s records. All the above are some role the computer is used for in the banking industry especially to the various department we have in the bank such as human resources, insurance, register, department etc. it is seen that the machine carries out manual function many times faster than human being (Busola 1999) Important of Computer in the Sector The important of computer in the national development and the whole world cannot be over emphasized. A growing awareness of its importance has resulted in a proliferation of computer literacy sources. Importance of computer shows some area of computer appreciation which cut across many spheres of human endeavour like education, government, defense, health utilities, agriculture, mining and of course business.

The most visible appreciation apparent to most people is in the airline industry, banks and engineering. In 1984, it was predicted that dictators will use the computer to reduce the world. This is no doubt, following the rate of appreciation of computers in developing and underdeveloped countries, this statement will certainly come to pass. Basically, computers are useful in the following areas of application:- i. Architects, Engineers, land surveyor, use computer as aid to design bridges, machines or collecting related design on internet.

ii. In business application such as sale and analysis, invoicing to read prices from special codes iii. Medical applications, computers are used to keep medical records, to store the history of patients and the degree of response to past treatment etc. iv. In law, they are used for information retrieval abstracts cases are stored and indexed in the computer v. For the government, they are used for compiling census and survey data. They are also used in planning and forecasting vi.

Also in the business sector or houses such as banks, accounting forms, insurance companies etc. most application of computers in these companies are in the area of financial management and management information system vii. Educational applications like processing exam result. Today computers have made their task easier, less risky and less time consuming and more profitable Effort of United Bank for Africa Plc in Computerization Plans are being worked out to spread computerization into all branches of UBA plc.

New application have been developed and one expected that by the year (2002) computerization of all state branches capitals and other urban branches must have been completed, since they were unable to achieve this, they hope for 2015. The computer systems that have been implicated have had their impact on the way the bank does things. The share registration system has hoped in their desire to satisfy their customer needs. When the system was implemented in 1977 we were registered to only 12 companies but today UBA plc is registered to many companies, with the number of companies now managed by the systems is expected to be on the upsurge.

The branch accounting system that presently serves the Lagos area branches have provided the management of the branches with information that enhances the day to day activities of branch operations. This system is expected to enter its second phase whereby the customer will be able to device more direct benefit from the computerization program (Beryl 2006). Management now has an improved internal control system. Management efficiency is improved with provision of better, prompt and accuracy reports.

Appreciable cost savings have been achieved through computerization with a reduction in overtime hours. Problem Facing Computer Innovation in Nigeria This project identifies apparent and real problems confronting the introduction and innovation of computer in the Nigeria banking sector. These are some of the problems:- i. Poor technological know how ii. Erratic power failure iii. Acquisition of obsolete equipment iv. Lack of technical skills v. Lack of capital In Nigeria, computer industry has not been established.

Therefore, everything is controlled by advanced industrialization world. The purchase of the system and of sphere parts which requires hard currency and technological support and also to give constant training to user of the system are also a problem, in order to make it attractive for competent and responsible expatriated to come, a lot of money to maintain them, pay them in foreign exchange and after attractive leave grant. Many researches carried out by eminent personal with intention to see how computer can be incorporated into Nigeria education curriculum at all levels.

The government should see to it that at least 85% of Nigeria populace will be computer literate by the year 2020. CHAPTER THREE METHODOLOGY This research study deals with the significance of computer innovation on commercial banks in Nigeria. It has become necessary to study the effect that computerization has both on the staff and customers of United bank for Africa plc (UBA) as the case study. This study will be conducted using primary source of information. It involves the administration of questionnaire of multiple choices serial to a cross section of staff of united bank for Africa plc Ilorin main branch.

Also a good deal of information will come through other sources such as textbook, journals on banking U. B. A periodic books etc. The data collected will be subjected to statistical analysis using table simple chart, bar chart and chi-square. The important topic to be discussed in this chapter include:- i. Research design ii. Population iii. Sample and sampling techniques iv. The research instrument v. Validity and reliability of the instrument vi. Research procedure vii. Data analysis Research Design This research was due by employing the use of well designed questionnaire to elicit in

Memo and Notice of Meeting Example narrative essay help: narrative essay help

Please be reminded that prompt and efficient service is the key to a successful business. The clients you serve are the business’ future and maintaining a good relationship with them is very important. A good relationship with clients can only be maintained through Prompt and Efficient Service. Delivering, collecting and repairing machines promptly is vital to the survival of a company. Therefore, you are reminded to act promptly. It is also important that there be proper communication with clients if there is a problem. We almost lost a client as a result of improper behaviour. TES VOLUNTARY CARERS ASSOCIATION NOTICE OF MEETING

The TES Voluntary Carers Association, Manchester Division, Monthly meeting will be held on Tuesday, March 27 2011 at 9:00 am in Room 803 on the 3rd floor of the Technical Ed. Building St Hews College, 252 Manchester Road Mandeville AGENDA 1Call to Order 2Invocation 3Welcome/ Apologies 4Minutes of last Meeting 5Matter arising from Minutes 6Correspondence 7Reports (a)Director of Social and inter clubbing (b)Treasurer’s report 8New Business 9Any Other Business 10Date of next Meeting 11Adjournment extra words The field slaves had the most difficult time among the different slaves. They had to work longer than any other kind of slave.

They usually worked from sunrise to sunset in comparison to the house slaves who only worked a few hours. House slaves were treated far better than the field slaves as some were treated like the slave-owner’s children. The House slaves were kept clean, well dressed, and were allowed to speak much more often because they served the food to the owners and their guests. In fact the house slaves were allowed to eat in the house, not at the table but usually in a back room. As for the FS, they usually ate out in the barn with the animals and were only fed enough to keep them strong enough to work.

Field slaves were often whipped, sometimes for without a reason. Their jobs included hoeing, harvesting, ploughing, mowing etc. However, all the slaves whether domestic, factory or field had some things in common in terms of their lifestyle. Most of the slaves were illiterate and the masters did what they could to keep them this way for various reasons. Slaves were allocated a region of the plantation for their living quarters. Slaves houses were usually wooden shacks with dirt floors, but sometimes houses were made of boards nailed up with cracks stuffed with rags.

The beds were collected pieces of straw or grass, and old rags, and only one blanket for a covering. A single room could have up to a dozen people-men, women, and children. Another similarity they shared was that they all had a master who they had to obey. They would be punished for murder, robbery, arson or assault upon a white person. Slaves could be killed for murder, burglary, arson, and assault upon a white person. Plantation owners believed that this severe discipline would make the slaves too scared to rebel. Slaves were also whipped.

Psychological explanations of Schizophrenia online essay help: online essay help

The characteristics of Schizophrenia (SZ) can be categorised into two different types: Type 1 symptoms (Positive Symptoms) and Type 2 (Negative symptoms). Type 1 characteristics include things such as delusions, hallucinations and paranoia. Patients may experience things such as hearing voices, which are often said to be from God or the Devil. Type 2 symptoms however show more catatonic behaviour, for example a loss of drive, a lack of emotion or catatonic stupor.

On the other hand, there are some patients who experience both type 1 and type 2 symptoms, these are therefore categorised as Disorganised as they will have disorganised behaviour and speech. There is a 1% chance of developing SZ if neither of your parents is carrying the gene, however this increases to 20% if one parent is diagnosed, and to 46% if both parents are. It is said to occur within men when they are 25 or younger, however it occurs at an older age of 25-45 for women. Discuss psychological explanations of Schizophrenia

In the 1950’s and 60’s it was believed that if you belonged to a dysfunctional family that you were more likely to suffer from SZ due to the dysfunction of communication within the family. According to the different psychological explanations of SZ this is because of the high emotional tension and the many secrets and close alliances that are kept in the family. One psychological explanation of SZ was put forward by Bateson et al (1956) who looked at childhood as a base for developing SZ, for example the interactions children have with their mothers.

His explanation, the Double Bind theory, states that SZ can occur due to conflicting messages given from parents to their children, for example when a parent expresses care but does so in a critical way. This means that the child will become confused as the message they are given is conflicting, as one message effectively invalidates the other. As a result, the child is left with self doubt and eventual withdrawal. Experiences such as these are said to cause SZ as they prevent the development of an internally coherent construction of reality, in the end they are likely to experience SZ type symptoms such as delusions and hallucinations, and in some cases, paranoia. This theory therefore suggests that the home environment and the relationships a child has with their parents through messages plays a role in the development of SZ. This is because there is no clear template of a loving relationship; instead the child is always unsure if they have done something wrong due to the conflicting messages they are given.

A strength of this theory is the supporting evidence from Berger. He found that SZ patients reported a higher recall of double bind statements (conflicting messages) by their mothers than non SZ patients. However this reliability of this study was criticised as patients recall may be affected by their SZ. There are said to be problems as it is called a retrospective recall, as the data is unreliable. For example, delusions may occur meaning that the patients are recalling things that didn’t happen. Another criticism of the Double Bind theory is the inability to replicate the findings across studies.

This is because of individual differences, and the fact that as most of the memories were from childhood, you cannot go back in time to assess the validity of the recollections. An additional criticism is the fact that the Hawthorne Effect may have occurred. As it was an observation of the families, there is no proof that the parents will act as they normally do around their families, therefore the validity of the results reduces as the results will not show a true picture of how they really are as a parent.

Also, the families are studied retrospectively, meaning they are studied long after the mental disorder may have affected the family system. This means that various family routines will have been disrupted so you will be unable to see how the family acted before a child developed SZ. This is because living with someone with SZ is difficult and distressing for all the family as it has an impact on everyone, not just the patient of SZ. A final criticism is that it is said to be an unconstructive theory as the theory blames the parents and families for a child developing SZ.

By suggesting that a parent has caused SZ is at least unhelpful and at most highly destructive, as they not only have to cope with living with someone with SZ, but they are then told that it is their fault, which will lead them to feel guilty and hurt as they are blamed for a poor upbringing. A second psychological explanation of SZ is Expressed Emotion. This was developed in the late 1970’s when psychologists were more interested in how the family might play a part in the course, rather than the cause of SZ.

For example, Brown found that patients who returned to homes where there was a high level of expressed emotion, for example lots of hostility, criticism and over involvement, they showed a greater tendency to relapse in comparison to those who returned to homes where there was a lower level of expressed emotion. This was supported by Linszen who found this to be four times more likely. This study suggests that a high level of emotion in the family environment plays a role in the SZ patients’ disorder becoming worse.

There is also support for this explanation from Vaughn and Leff who also found that the level of expressed emotion had an affect on relapse rates amongst discharged patients. However they also studied the amount of face to face contact patients spent with relatives after discharge, and they found an increase in relapse rates as face to face contact increased, and even more so with higher levels of expressed emotion. This study suggests that the more time a SZ patient spends with a family with high levels of EE means that they are more likely to relapse.

On the other hand, this study has not been replicated therefore the validity of their results is questioned. There is a lot of supporting research for this explanation, for example from Kalafi and Torabi (1996) who studied expressed emotion within families in an Iranian Culture, where mothers are extremely over protective and submissive, and fathers are more rejecting as they are not able to comfort their child as it is seen as weak in their culture.

They found a higher prevalence of expressed emotion was one of the main causes of relapse, as there is a lot of negativity in the families which in the end leads to high levels of stress which they find it very difficult to cope with. This suggests that a mixture of emotion from parents in the Iranian culture plays a role in the SZ patient relapsing. However this theory was criticised as it is not clear whether EE intervention was the key element of the therapy or whether aspects of the family intervention might have helped.

Therefore this leads to confusion and eventual withdrawal. Therefore there are other aspects of intervention that could be useful as it is unclear as to whether EE is helping the family as a unit. A second criticism is that many patients with SZ are either estranged from their families or have minimal contact, and yet there is no evidence that such people are less prone to relapse. Therefore it is unclear whether there is an impact.

On the other hand, there are several strengths to this theory. For example, there is a lot of supporting research conducted to make the theory more valid. The EE is a well established “maintenance” model of SZ and many prospective studies have been conducted which support the EE hypothesis across many cultures, therefore the theory is also applicable cross culturally. This is also because negative emotion will most likely be found in many different cultures.

There has also been an argument as to whether the EE model is a cause or an effect of SZ. The EE model has becoming widely accepted that research is now focussing on relatives of those with SZ in order to understand better which aspects of high and low EE relate to relapse. There is evidence to support that the family members are not held responsible for a person developing SZ, for example they tend to attribute positive symptoms such as hallucinations and delusions to the person’s mental illness.

But on the other hand, there is also evidence that some attribute negative symptoms, for example social withdrawal, to the person’s personality characteristics and in the end they are said to become over critical in an attempt to change those behaviours. Overall, it was concluded by Lopez that families characterised by negative affect (criticism) has much higher relapse rates in comparison to those with positive affect (warmth). Overall, an excellent piece of work as always, X. You have thoroughly mentioned all relevant research and remembered to elaborate after each study.

Legislative framework in health and safety mba essay help: mba essay help

The health and Safety at Work Act 1974 is the primary piece of legislation and is responsible for enforcing the act and a number of other acts relevant to the working environment. It also states that all staff should take reasonable care of themselves and others around them and for their safety. Risk assessments have to be done regarding all types of work we do or the equipment we use to see if it’s safe to do so.

All our legislation and policies and procedures are kept in folders in the manager’s office so we know where they are at all times and are relevant and up to date. We have health and safety, coshh, riddor, Safeguarding, Manual handling operations. The main Health and safety policies and procedures agreed with the manager are to make sure all staff and residents are safe and away from danger at all times. If something is broken remove it so nobody will come to any harm so put a label on it saying do not use and inform the manager.

We are aware with how to deal with accidents, injuries and emergencies and the reporting of all of these. We know what paperwork to fill in so everything is documented in our records. We have had all relevant training and are all up to date. Moving and handling of individuals is vital it is done in the correct way so harm is caused to any parties. 1. 2 Policies, procedures and practices in own care setting are put in place to make sure you run your home safely and meeting the standards put in place.

The legislations put together influence how your work practices and procedures that are put in place as you need to comply with all the rules and regulations to be able to meet the standards to run the care setting safely. Policies and procedures need to be updated yearly as things do change and the company needs to be aware of the changes so it can be put into practice so to comply with all the rules and regulations for the smooth running of the home. Risk assessments are carried out monthly or sooner if needed.

Our work place meets health and safety requirements by making sure all staff are fully trained, the home is fit for purpose and all equipment is all full working order and all checks like fire alarms are tested regular we do this every Wednesday and get them serviced along with all other equipment serviced on a regular basis. 2. 1 To be a good role model for health and safety you need to make sure you are doing everything to meet the health and safety standards and train others how to so all staff are able to meet the standards expected of them to comply with all the policies and procedures.

Staff to have the relevant training to be able to fill their role to the best of their ability and to comply with the company’s procedures. We do all our health and safety checks every week and have all our equipment serviced regular as well so we know they are in full working order. We make sure all equipment that is not in use is turned off like the washing machine and tumble dryers to help prevent any fires. All our doors and gates are locked at night to help maintain the security. Page 2 of 7 2.

To support others to comply with legislative and organisational health, safety and risk management policies, procedures and practices that is relevant to their work. Others in the work setting like colleagues, families and carers need to be aware of health and safety issues like reporting and recording procedures and take responsibility for health and safety issues. Our employers/managers responsibilities are to make sure they provide us with the correct information about the risks for health and safety. Provideprotective clothing to be able to our job. Make sure we get all the relevant training we need. How to do our job safely and what we would have to do in an emergency. In helping support others to understand and follow safe practices you need to have good communication, share information with each other make sure staff training is recorded and up to date. Visitors, inspectors, regulators, carers, practitioners that all visit the work setting will all need support to be able to comply with the health and safety within this setting.

The actions to take when health and safety and risk management, procedures and practices are not being complied with in your care setting would be to discuss it with your manager and depending on the task they was doing like if they had just cleaned the floors and had forgot to put a wet floor sign down and nobody had come to any harm they would just be spoken to or if it was more serious they would get a warning as we are there to protect the individuals and not put them in any danger.

Certain tasks in the work place should never be carried out unless you have had the relevant training to do so like moving and handling, administering medication, first aid, and use of equipment. All staff that work at linden manor have all the correct training to be able to do their job correctly and follow the policies and procedures that are set in place to keep everyone safe at all times. If the manager does not comply with the health and safety and risk management I would need to contact my area manager and she would need to get involved to help resolve the issue.

We complete records and reports on health and safety and risk management issues according to legislative and organisational requirements. You need to document all health and safety issues and do regular health and safety checks around the home by carrying out Assessments, hold regular health and safety meetings. You have to continuously monitor and report potential health and safety risks. It is important that you do regular checking on all equipment and machinery. You need to make sure all your policies and procedures and agreed ways of working are up to date.

You need to report any health and safety issues and risks right away and make sure all records are up to date and correct. We do risk assessments to as they are important as we do this to protect ourselves and individuals from harm and danger and to reduce to reduce the risk of anyone getting injured. Any health and safety issues found need to be reported to the management team straight away. The information that is recorded would be any issues found like broken machinery, Lighting, locks all need to put in the handy man’s book so he can fix them as soon as

Page 3 of 7 he comes in and management to be informed it is not data protected and you need to double check all the information that is recorded is true and correct. 3. 1 To develop the policies, procedures and practices you need to identify, assess and manage risks to individuals and others. You need to look at ways to minimise potential risks and hazards is to realise what the hazard or risk is and who might be harmed, record any findings and implement them, keep reviewing them and update records on a regular basis.

I can get additional support my manager regarding any health and safety issues or contact organisations like hsce and they would be able to provide more support for me. We work alongside the safeguarding team to make sure we are doing all we can to protect each and every individual. If something has happened to an individual the safeguarding team would be involved and investigate to see if we can put any extra measures in place to try to help prevent any harm coming to that individual again.

If there is a gap in their care plan like if a resident has become more or less mobile a risk assessment needs to be put in place and updated as any changes happen and all staff need to aware of this to be able to meet their needs along with a planned care section. 3. 2 Working with individuals and others, I work alongside the district nurses, doctors, cpn, care managers and we have regular meetings to discuss how individuals are doing and any changes that need to made.

I am responsible for doing all risk assessments for the individuals needs like medication, fire, Zimmer frame/walking stick/ bath hoist, stairs, wheelchair, nutritional, water low to name a few. Regular monitor all are equipment we use and check the environment that it is safe and fit for purpose. We put all the risk assessments in place to try to protect all the individuals that we care for coming to any harm and make sure all are carers are fully trained and know how to deal with all types of situations when they occur.

Staff are always checking for risks and hazards around them it’s about assessing the situation before doing any action and the visitors that we have come into the home are very compliant with this and when something is wrong they will come and get a member of staff to be able to sort the situation out like a resident moving around the home that is very frail and unsteady on their feet the visitor will call for assistance for them. 3. 3 We work with others to manage the potential risks and hazards from happening. We do all work to the policies and procedures set out for us to follow.

We do all types of risk assessments and put them in place to try to prevent any harm or upset coming to each of our individuals that we care for and these are reviewed monthly or sooner if needed. You get all the staff to read them so they are aware what to look for and how to deal with anything that may occur and they are signed off by the management team once complete. Ways to minimise potential risks and hazards is to realise what the hazard or risk is and who might be harmed, record any findings and implement them, keep reviewing them and update records on a regular Page 4 of 7 basis. All our equipment has regular maintenance checks done on it this happens at least twice a month by our handy man. We have a training matrix that is up on the wall in the office which tells you what staff have what training and the dates when completed and it’s my job to make sure all staff have the correct training and that it is kept up to date. 4. 1 By working with individuals to balance the management of risk with individual’s rights and the views of others. All carers are aware of what risks they can and can’t take.

For individuals that need encouragement with their mobility the carer with push them a little more to help them build up their confidence this is a risk but it’s to help them to gain more independence. You take into account others views and ideas and weigh them all up to see what the risk is and take into account the individuals views and wishes to see how we can maintain their safety whilst meeting their needs and wishes at the same time. We have residents that will take knowing/ unknown risks all these risks or potential risk all have risk assessments in place for staff to follow and how to deal with these.

4. 2 Working with individuals and others to help develop a balanced approach to Risk management that takes into account the benefits for the individuals of risk taking. If the individual has poor mobility and you want to help them to increase their independence you push them a bit more to help them build their strength up to be able to walk more and gain back their independence this is a risk but it is for the benefit of the individual at the end of the day.

Plus all carers are trained and know what to do in these types of situations. The individual has the right to gain back their independence by helping them to build up their strength they are able to do more things for themselves. All individuals that use mobility aids all have risk assessments in their care plans and have been assessed to use them we have the correct amount of staff on each shift to be able to run the home correctly. All staff is aware of what a risk is and when it can lead to becoming a hazard.

4. 3 You should always evaluate your own practice in promoting a balanced approach to risk management. You should always take into account the benefits that it has for that individual and the risk you have to take to do it. You should always do what’s in the individuals interest and if it is going to help them improve their way of living. You should work as a team to be able to support each other when it comes to assessing risks and managing risks.

If we was support an individual to become more mobile maybe they have had a fall and lost their confidence or their mobility was becoming more frail and may need a mobility aid to help assist them with their mobility you need to spend extra time with them giving them the confidence to be able to remain as mobile as possible and make sure their care plan has been changed to match their current needs and risk assessments are put in place and up to date. Page 5 of 7 4. 4 You should analyse how helping others to understand the balance between risk and rights improves practice.

All staff has been trained and do understand the difference between risk and rights improves practice. You should always encourage others to reflect on their practice in relation to risk management so they can see what they have learnt from it and how has it benefited the individual. All staff should understand risks and rights to improve the practice of the home and by complying with the policies and procedures of the home at all times. 5. 1 Obtain feedback on health, safety and risk management policies, procedures and practices from individuals and others.

We have regular meetings with the staff and update each individuals care plan monthly so we get a lot of feedback from the staff then about each individual. We also have monthly meetings with their next of kin and they have their chance to review the care plan and give us any feedback. We have resident meetings regular as well to get their views and ask them questions to see what they think needs improving and what hazards they think need to be fixed. We report all hazards to the manager and all get written in the handy man’s book, our communication book so all staff is aware.

5. 2 Evaluate the health, safety and risk management policies, procedures and practices within the work setting. Health and safety policies get reviewed on a yearly basis by our head office. We do our own evaluations each month. All staff has to follow the practices, policies and procedures put in place to be able to safe at work and help maintain the safety of all the individuals. We have monthly health and safety meetings to discuss and problems and how and when these will be dealt with.

Carer’s read all the health and safety and risk management policies, procedures and practices. I have asked those questions in what to do in certain situations and they give me the correct answers just to see if they fully understand what they have read. All staff is trained to use the equipment and they know when something is faulty to put an out of order sign on it and report it straight away to the management team. 5. 3 Areas of policies, procedures and practices that need improvement to ensure safety and protection in the work setting.

We keep staff updated of any changes and issues through staff handovers and we have a communication book that all staff read to keep up to date with all things that have happened or are going on. The staffs are really good on communicating with each other and keeping management informed. We have temperature controlled water and heating system so that no staff or residents can get burned through the water being too hot. We have handrails fitted where needed to make it easier and safer for individuals that need to extra support and to help them to maintain as independent as possible.

We have no smoking signs up to inform individuals that smoking is not permitted in these areas. Page 6 of 7 5. 4 Recommend changes to policies, procedures and practices that ensure safety and protection in the work setting. The management team can change procedures and practices and all homes are different and need to do what relates to us and making sure all staff abides by the rules and code of practice. Risk management and health and safety issues get monitored on a daily basis. You are all monitoring and assessing risk throughout your daily duties.

Any changes that need to be implemented need to be discussed with the management team. Our head office print our policies and they are updated yearly and are all kept in the manager’s office. We have just had a walk in shower room fitted on the ground floor and this is so ideal for our individuals that are hoisted and due to medical problems can’t get in the lift or bath hoist this has been a blessing for them and they are really enjoying the showers that are now able to have. We have also had a medication room done now for the senior carers and everything is now kept in one place and it’s more secure.

The Determinants of Corporate Dividend Policy argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help

One of the central issues of corporate finance has been the dividend decision of a firm, which has always been studied in relation to a firm’s financing and investment decisions. The association amongst these two decisions has posed various questions. How much should a firm pay as dividend? How does a dividend payout policy influence the valuation of a firm? Does a firm’s decision to distribute cash correspond to its financing and investing decisions?

What is the outcome of changes in the dividend policy assuming steady financing and investment decisions of a firm? Research has attempted to provide answers to these questions and many more but mystery still shrouds the dividend decision. Lintner (1956) argues that firms of developed markets target their dividend payout ratio with the help of current earnings and past dividends. In order to reach such target, various adjustments are made in the dividend policy of a firm and therefore firms should have stable dividend policies.

Miller and Modigliani (1961) on the other hand feel that dividend policy is irrelevant in measuring the current worth of shares considering the irrational assumptions of market perfections, zero transaction costs, perfect certainty and indifferent behaviour of investors. However, Miller and Scholes (1982) argue that in the real world, dividend decision is inspired more by high taxes on dividends than capital gains and market imperfections. Alli, Khan and Ramirez (1993) observe that a change in the payout policy provides information about future earnings and a further change in the value of share price.

This indeed shows a strong signaling effect of the dividend decision of a firm. It is evident that over the years, no Dr. Amitabh Gupta, Associate Professor, Department of Financial Studies, University of Delhi Ms. Charu Banga, Research Scholar, Department of Financial Studies, University of Delhi Decision, Vol. 37, No. 2, August, 2010 The Determinants of Corporate Dividend Policy 64 single viewpoint has emerged which explains the dividend policy of a firm. In India too, modest research has been carried out on various aspects of the dividend decision.

The present study re-examines the impact of various factors on the dividend decision of Indian companies taking a large and latest data set. Our study contributes to the existing literature by examining as many as fifteen financial variables. No prior Indian study has examined so many variables in the context of dividend decision using both factor analysis and regression. The remaining paper is organized as follows: Section 2 presents the existing literature.

Section 3 discusses the hypothesis being tested in the study and also describes the data and the research methodology used in the study. Section 4 discusses the results of the study and section 5 presents the conclusion. Literature Review A large number of financial and non-financial determinants of corporate dividend policy have been discussed in the work of Lintner (1956). This seminal work developed a basic model stating that most of the companies follow dividend adjustment process by applying target dividend payout ratio.

Rozeff (1982) investigates the impact of two kinds of costs – transaction costs and agency costs relative to external financing on the dividend decision of a firm. He argues that a balance between transaction costs and agency costs would lead to an optimum dividend policy. Alli, Khan and Ramirez (1993) find that dividends do not convey information regarding a firm’s future cash flows. They report that at beta, firm’s capital expenditure and financial slack are inversely related to the dividend payout.

The dividend policy behaviour is also examined by Han, Lee and Suk (1999) by considering institutional ownership under agency cost hypothesis and tax–based hypothesis. They find that tax-based hypothesis is more relevant in the case of institutional investors as they prefer a greater dividend payout. Pandey (2001) looks at the corporate dividend payout behaviour of companies listed on the Kuala Lumpur stock exchange during 1993-2000. He categorizes the sample into six industries for examining the variation in the payout ratio. He also establishes a relationship between current earnings and past dividend rate.

He finds that the Malaysian companies (by following Lintner’s model) exhibit unstable dividend behaviour with high adjustments in dividend payments in order to meet the target payout ratio. Myers (2004) finds strong support for earnings, profit margin, institutional ownership and debt-equity ratio on the dividend decision. Eriotis (2005) finds that Greek firms have a long-run constant dividend payout policy. He adjusts the firms’ distributed earnings and size in the Lintner model and reports that an increase in the earnings does not change the dividend distribution pattern of firms.

Kania and Bacon (2005) find that variables such as sales growth, expansion and insider ownership have a negative impact on dividend decision but institutional ownership has an inverse relation with dividend payout, which is contrary to the existing literature. Denis and Osobov (2008) find that the tendency for paying dividends declined for countries such as United States, Canada, United Kingdom, Germany, France and Japan during 1994-2002. They also report that the international evidence does not support the investors’ preference for dividend, the signaling and the clientele interpretations as prominent variables.

Rather, they go along with the distribution of free cash flow as the chief element of the dividend decision. Decision, Vol. 37, No. 2, August, 2010 The Determinants of Corporate Dividend Policy 65 In the Indian context, we found few studies that have analyzed the factors that affect the dividend decision of a firm. For example, Kevin (1992) analyzes the dividend payment behaviour of 650 Indian companies during September 1983 to August 1984 and finds that profitability and earnings of the firms are the two foremost factors determining dividends.

He concludes that Indian firms strive for achieving a stable dividend rate. However, keeping in view that the time period of his study was only one year; his results cannot be taken as conclusive. Mahapatra and Sahu (1993) find that cash flows, current earnings and past dividends are prominent factors that have an impact on the dividend decision. Their results are in contrast to Lintner’s model. Bhat and Pandey (1994) find that current year’s earnings, pattern of past dividends, expected future earnings, changes in equity base of the firm have an impact on the dividend decision.

Taking a different line of research, Narasimhan and Asha (1997) look at the changes in dividend tax regime proposed in the Indian Union Budget of 1997-98 and analyze the impact of dividend tax on a firm’s dividend decision. They conclude that the burden of tax payment fell in the hands of companies rather than their shareholders. Mohanty (1999) studied more than 200 Indian companies for a period of fifteen years to understand the relationship between bonus-issuing and dividend-paying behaviour of companies.

He found that in the Indian context, it is the dividend rate that is an important determinant of dividend policy in comparison to the dividend payout ratio. Reddy (2002) analyzes the trends and determinants of dividend of all Indian companies listed on two major Indian stock exchanges–The Bombay Stock Exchange (BSE) and The National Stock Exchange (NSE) during 1990-2001. He investigates three factors viz. , number of firms paying dividend, average dividend per share and the average payout. His results indicate that only few companies maintain the dividend payout rate and that firms forming a part of small indices pay higher dividend compared to firms forming a part of broad market indices. Deviations in the tax regime are also examined using the trade-off theory and it is found that this theory does not apply to the Indian corporate sector. He concludes that the omission of dividends have information content i. e. such companies expect lower earnings in the future whereas the same does not hold true in case of dividend initiations. Anand (2004) analyzes the results of Anand (2002) survey of 81 CFOs to find out the determinants of dividend policy of Indian companies.

He finds that Indian companies use dividend policy as a signaling mechanism to convey information about their present and future prospects, therefore, affecting their market value. He also reports that while designing a dividend policy, companies take into consideration the investors’ preference for dividends and the clientele effect. The relationship between corporate governance and dividend payout behaviour of the Indian firms is examined by Kumar (2006) by taking into consideration their financial structure, investment opportunities, dividend history, earnings trend and ownership structure during 1994–2000.

He finds a positive association of dividends with earnings and dividend trends but does not find any association between foreign ownership and growth in dividend payout. Recently, Bhayani (2008) has examined the influence of earnings and lagged dividend on dividend policy of companies listed on the BSE. He found that the current year’s earnings is the foremost factor affecting the dividend behaviour of a firm and concludes that Indian Decision, Vol. 37, No. 2, August, 2010 The Determinants of Corporate Dividend Policy 66 companies follow a stable cash dividend policy.

Kanwal and Kapoor (2008) examine the dividend policies of companies in the information technology sector in India. They explore various factors such as profitability, cash flows, corporate tax, sales growth and growth opportunities that have an impact over the dividend policies of such companies. They report that only cash flows indicating liquidity and beta indicating risk are the foremost determinants. Thus over the years different strands of research have emerged in the area of dividend policy both in India and abroad. Data and Research Methodology Data and Sample Selection

The necessary data have been sourced from the Prowess database of Centre for Monitoring Indian Economy (CMIE)1 The sample companies are drawn from the broad based BSE 500 Index2. The period of the study is seven years from January 1, 2001 to December 31 2007. We only included those companies in the sample that had continuously paid dividend during the study period and have excluded financial institutions/finance companies and government owned companies. Only final cash dividends paid by companies have been considered as usually Indian companies pay only one dividend during a year.

We have also ignored stock dividends and stock repurchases by companies and have examined only cash dividend. This process gave us a final sample of 150 companies from 16 industries. Description of Variables Over the years researchers have employed numerous financial variables that have a possible impact on the dividend policy (A list of such variables is provided in Annexure 1). Out of such variables, the present study considers fifteen variables to examine their effect on the dividend decision. The justification for choosing such variables is as follows. Liquidity is an important determinant of dividend decision.

Liquidity and dividend payment behaviour of a company have a direct relationship (Benito and Young, 2001). If a company has adequate cash flows, it would like to distribute cash dividend in order to keep its shareholders happy. Moreover, firms have to make their dividend payments in cash therefore they have to be liquid enough to distribute dividends and also to remain solvent. Current ratio (CR) and cash from operations (CFO) are the indicators of the liquidity position of a firm. Thus, CR and CFO become the first and second variable respectively. Another significant factor is leverage.

A firm with high leverage means large fixed payments for external financing, which indeed is a substitute for the dividend payments. High leverage increases the transaction costs and the risk of the firm (Rozeff, 1982). Contrarily, higher the earning retention rate, lower the chances for external 1 Prowess is a database containing information about large and medium Indian companies and is commonly used by both the researchers and the industry alike in India 2 Bombay Stock Exchange (BSE) is one of the largest stock exchanges of Asia. Its broad based index – BSE 500 constitutes major blue chip companies in India

Decision, Vol. 37, No. 2, August, 2010 The Determinants of Corporate Dividend Policy 67 borrowing and vice-versa. Hence we take debt-equity ratio (DER) and ratio of retained earnings to equity (REE) as proxies for financial leverage exhibiting a negative relationship with the dividend decision. Hence, DER and REE become the third and fourth variable respectively. Further, the relationship between ownership structure and dividend payment behaviour of a firm is also valuable. The control of the firm may lie with the directors or the promoters (insider owners), institutions (institutional owners) or with foreign investors.

The insiders would like to avoid excess payment of dividend whereas institutional owners are usually more dividend demanding (Han, Lee and Suk, 1999). Thus, promoters’ shareholding (PS), institutional shareholding (IS) and foreign institutional investors shareholding (FIIs) represent the fifth, sixth and seventh variables respectively. Profitability has always been considered as the foremost determinant for dividend payment as more profit means more dividends. It becomes essential to consider variables for short-term and long-term profitability of a firm (Myers, 2004). We take net profit ratio (NPR), return on investment (ROI) and ratio of profit before interest & tax to total assets (PTA) as their proxies and therefore, they become the eighth, ninth and tenth variables respectively. In addition, growth opportunities play an important role. Higher the operational growth and growth in profits of a firm, higher shall be the dividend payments by the firm (Kania and Bacon, 2005). The growth factor is represented by annual sales growth (ASG), return on net worth (RONW) and earnings per share (EPS) growth. The growth rates of ASG, RONW and EPS are taken as the eleventh, twelfth and thirteenth variables respectively.

Market capitalization (MC) corresponds to the size of the firm and is the fourteenth variable. Tax effect is another significant determinant as the rates of taxation influence the need for dividend by the investors. High tax paying investors would prefer to postpone receiving dividends and thus, would like to retain their earnings with the firm in order to avoid heavy taxes whereas investors in lower tax brackets would prefer higher dividends (tax clientele effect)3. For this purpose we take ratio of corporate tax to profit after tax (T) as a proxy and the fifteenth variable. A detailed definition of these variables is given in Annexure 2.

Research Methodology The present study re-examines various factors that have a bearing on the dividend decision of a firm by using a two-step multivariate procedure. We have identified fifteen variables from the extant literature that are considered while framing a dividend policy. In the first step, we perform factor analysis on the data to extract prominent factors from these fifteen variables. In the second step we perform multiple regression on the factors extracted. Results Factor Analysis The technique of factor analysis indicates those factors that explain the correlation among the observed variables.

We use principal component analysis (PCA) as the factor extraction method to identify distinct clusters of observed variables (Dillon and Goldstein, 1984; Tryfos, 3 Tax Clientele Effect: See Miller and Modigliani, 1961. Decision, Vol. 37, No. 2, August, 2010 The Determinants of Corporate Dividend Policy 68 1998). The broad factors are further subjected to equamax orthogonal rotation (Alli, Khan and Ramirez, 1993). Table 1 shows the results of Kaiser-Meyer-Olkin (KMO) and Bartlett’s Test. The KMO measure of sampling adequacy tells us whether we can reduce the variables into broad factors or not.

Value of less than 0. 50 indicates that factor analysis would not produce distinct and reliable factors whereas any value close to one would generally indicate that this technique of analysis would be useful with the data. Our results gave a value of 0. 554 indicating that the pattern of correlation amongst the variables is relatively compact and hence, Factor Analysis yields distinct and reliable broad factors (Meyers, Gamst and Guarino, 2006). The Bartlett’s test of Sphericity investigates whether the original correlation matrix is an identity matrix or not.

Our results show that Bartlett’s test has a chi-square value of 1. 500E3 which is significant for p < 0. 01 confirming that factor analysis is appropriate. Table 1: KMO and Bartlett’s Test Kaiser-Meyer-Olkin Measure of Sampling Adequacy. Bartlett’s Test of Sphericity .554 Approx. Chi-Square 1. 500E3 Df 105 Sig. .000 Table 2 gives the Rotated Factor Matrix using Equamax Orthogonal Transformation i. e. a matrix of factor loadings for each variable upon each factor. The factor loadings of less than 0. 30 have been suppressed and are not displayed. The institutional shareholding (0. 853) and foreign institutional investors’ shareholding (0. 735) are positively correlated whereas promoters’ shareholding (-0. 824) is negatively correlated to the first factor i. e. ownership structure. The dividend payout tends to bring a decline in the stock value, thus, a conflict of interest for the insiders. A company with high insider ownership proposes for a low cash dividend payout. Whereas, institutional owners are keen to influence high payouts in order to enhance control over the management for monitoring their external financing matters (Kumar 2006, Myers, 2004, Han, Lee and Suk, 1999).

Our results strongly support the findings in the literature. However, one point worth noting is that the individual shareholdings of promoters, institutions and foreign institutional investors in relation to the total shareholdings of a firm have not been taken into consideration. This can be an area for future research. Factor 2 has high negative loadings for debt-equity ratio (-0. 756), taxation (-0. 704) and earning per share (-. 384) and positive loadings for return on investment (0. 759) and return on net worth (0. 577). We term this factor as leverage.

This suggests that firms would like to pay high dividends if they are utilizing their retained earnings (least risk attached) as compared to external financing (equity and debt). In other words, high interest payments (fixed charge) will result in lower dividend payment (Alli, Khan and Ramirez, 1993 and Rozeff, 1982). Therefore, results indicate that there exists an inverse relationship between dividend rate and leverage. Decision, Vol. 37, No. 2, August, 2010 The Determinants of Corporate Dividend Policy 69 The third broad factor is expressed as Profitability. It includes net profit ratio (0.932), ratio of profit to total assets (0. 932) and current ratio (0. 546). This factor indicates that greater the profit of a firm, higher will be the dividend payout. Therefore, profitability is positively related to dividend decision (Denis and Osobov 2008, Myers 2004). Our results confirm the same. The fourth factor incorporates high positive loadings for cash from operations (0. 809) and market capitalization (0. 789). We coin this factor as liquidity. A firm with high external financing would require availability of cash flows i. e. strong liquidity position to meet its financial obligations.

Therefore, in order to increase liquidity, the firm shall lower its dividend payout. On the other hand, the larger the size of the firm, the greater the availability of free cash flows and the greater will be the dividend payout. A firm with large number of shareholders is expected to pay higher dividends in order to keep their shareholders happy. It has been found that high retained earnings to equity ratio (indicating propensity to pay dividend) would ensure availability of free cash flows or residual cash flows within the firm (Benito and Young, 2001). One would, therefore, expect a direct relation between liquidity and dividend payout.

The fifth factor is termed as Growth. It includes annual sales growth (0. 816), return on net worth (0. 530) and ratio of retained earnings to equity (0. 485) implying that growth in sales and profit is an important determinant for the payment of dividends. Our results support the findings of Myers (2004) who suggests that firms with high growth rate distribute high dividends in order to keep their shareholders happy. Table 2: Rotated Component Matrix Components IS PS FIIs ROI DER T RONW EPS PTA NPR CR CFO MC ASG REE Ownership Structure .843 -. 824 .735 Leverage Profitability

Liquidity Growth .385 .759 -. 756 -. 704 .577 -. 384 Decision, Vol. 37, No. 2, August, 2010 .412 .415 .932 .932 .546 .530 -. 431 .809 .789 .816 .485 The Determinants of Corporate Dividend Policy 70 Regression Results In the second step, multiple regression is carried out to examine the impact of the five independent variables on the dividend rate. The dividend rate is a dependent variable constituting the dividend decision and the five factors extracted from factor analysis viz. leverage, liquidity, profitability, growth, and ownership structure are taken as the independent variables.

Since the factors used in the regression model are derived through the orthogonal transformations, they are free from multi-collinearity problems (Ali, Khan and Ramirez, 1993). Further tests for normality, heteroscedasticity and autocorrelation show that data is normally distributed and there are no related problems. Table 3 gives the results of the regression model. The R-square is 0. 244 i. e. around 25 per cent of the variability in dividend rate is explained by the independent variables tested. The FStatistic of 9. 320 is significant at 1% level of significance.

The Durbin-Watson statistic of 2. 079 signifies that autocorrelation is not present among independent variables. Table 3: Regression Model Summary R-Square 0. 244 F 9. 320 Durbin-Watson 2. 079 Table 4 gives the results of the regression. Out of the five factors analyzed, four factors viz. , leverage, liquidity, ownership structure and growth have expected relationships with the dividend payout. Whereas profitability, shows a sign contrary to what was expected. In line with literature, our results show that the leverage position of a firm has a negative relation with the dividend rate (-0.239), which is significant at 5% level of significance. Higher the exposure of the firm to external financing, higher will be the risk of the firm and therefore, lower would be the dividend payout. Table 4: Regression results Variables Dividend Rate (Constant) Expected sign Standardized Co-efficients Beta Dependent variable T Sig. 3. 840 .000 Leverage Negative -. 239 -3. 013 .003 Liquidity Positive .341 4. 138 .000 Profitability Positive -. 007 -0. 086 .932 Ownership Structure Positive .091 1. 113 .286 Growth Positive .041 .541 .589 Decision, Vol. 37, No. 2, August, 2010

The Determinants of Corporate Dividend Policy 71 Similarly, liquidity (. 341) shows a positive relation with the dividend rate at 1 % level of significance. The ownership structure of a firm representing institutional owners has a positive coefficient (0. 091) but is statistically not significant. Growth (. 041) also shows a positive coefficient, which is not significant. Contrary to what was predicted, profitability shows a negative coefficient (-. 007) but is statistically not significant. Thus, the results of our study indicate that there are two main determinants of dividend decision viz.leverage and liquidity. Conclusion Despite few decades of active research on a number of theories discussing determinants of corporate dividend policy, no significant judgment can be drawn. The present study reexamines the determinants of corporate dividend decision of Indian companies listed on the Bombay Stock Exchange during the period January 1, 2001–December 31, 2007. The study uses Principal Component Analysis for analyzing fifteen variables that have an impact on the dividend decision of a firm. The results gave five broad factors viz. , leverage, liquidity, profitability, ownership structure and growth.

These factors were then subjected to multiple regression with dividend rate as the dependent variable. The results of the regression show that leverage, liquidity, ownership structure and growth showed expected signs whereas profitability did not show the expected sign. Two factors viz. , leverage and liquidity were found to have a strong relationship with dividend rates of Indian companies. While leverage was found to be negatively associated, liquidity was positively related. One point worth mentioning here is that our results are drawn only from the analysis of financial factors affecting the dividend policy of an Indian company.

In practice some non-financial factors such as foreign collaborators’ shareholding, attitude and behaviour of management, company policies, etc may also have a bearing on the dividend decision of a firm. References Alli, K. L, Khan, A. Q. and Ramirez, G. G. 1993. Determinants of Corporate Dividend Policy: A Factorial Analysis. The Financial Review, 28(4): 523–547. Anand, M. 2002. Corporate Finance Practices in India: A Survey. Vikalpa, 27(4): 29 – 56. Anand, M. 2004. Factors Influencing Dividend Policy Decisions of Corporate India. The ICFAI Journal of Applied Finance, 2(10): 5 – 16.

Case Study – Creative Advertising-Sunday Communication Ltd professional essay help: professional essay help

The graph shows that for 1998 – 1999, Sunday had a substantial growth in market, mainly attributing to its view of MNP as an opportunity to lure subscribers away from competitors through Creative Advertising The graph shows that for 1998 – 2005, Sunday had spent less year on year on promotional activities, but could sustain increasing revenue year on year by increasing subscriber base through price discounts 4 The graph shows that for 1998 – 1999, Sunday’s Brand Image creation with high revenue growth in subsequent years while marketing cost kept on varying.

Few of the main reasons why Sunday’s Brand Matra and awareness of 1999 could not sustain beyond 2005: 1. Emotional Modifier as “Life Style” & Descriptive Modifier as “Excitement” failed to get reinforced by the Brand Function of “Liberty”. 2. Exhaustion of Locked-Up consumers. 3. Since heavy investment is made on 3G, Sunday might have planned to Reposition itself differently. Questions at Stake 1. How would Sunday compete in the new era of interactive integrated marketing? 2.

Would the PCCW acquisition challenge the credibility of the innovative, independent brand image that made Sunday such a success? 3. Would Sunday’s irreverent brand image ultimately fizzle out among the new branding superstar? Creative Advertising is an unique key to success through advertising, and you’ll most likely get an answer that echoes the mantra of Stephan Vogel, Ogilvy & Mather Germany’s chief creative officer: “Nothing is more efficient than creative advertising. Creative advertising is more memorable, longer lasting, works with less media spending, and builds a fan community… faster. ” 5

My Alert Case “essay help” site:edu: “essay help” site:edu

Was the first to see the business opportunity in the mobile alerts. The idea was already working well in another channel (Internet). The mobile phone market was growing very quickly. They offered a wide range and tailor-made services. Besides as MyAlert will be the first in the market, the technology investment could became a strength and turn it in an entry barrier, thing that actually happened. For these reasons we can assert that MyAlert was a good business idea.

Which is the competitive advantage of MyAlert when it is launched? How the competitive advantage and business model evolves? Why? Is it sustainable? The competitive advantage of MyAlert at the begging was its own technological platform (MAGO). The platform was Valuable because was the core of the business also it was Inimitable, Rareness and Original due to they developed it from the scratch and was the first in the market specifically designed for its business model.

Content Production Design & Packaging 1- Corporate Customers Distribution Sales 2- Other Customers Provision of Infrastructure (Mobile Operators) Looking at the value chain of MyAlet we can see highlight in red their core activity, their platform allowed them to distribute the content throw the network to the final customers, the key was that the platform has a great scalability able to distribute data throw different technology enablers (GMS, GPRS…)

From the beginning they realized that text alerts could be used to provide customized services for corporate partners exploiting new business opportunities and here we can see a new competitive advantage because the company was able to introduce their investors into its own value chain getting content and a solid customer portfolio. This is a win win situation, the investors provide contents and the MyAlert provides them a new innovative service for them increasing the company revenues as well as turn over for the shareholders, this business model provides feedback itself being able to maintain it in the long run.

After the merger MyAlert, which started providing data services for the mobile industry, changed its product portfolio and business model providing technology and mobile marketing services. Thanks to MAGO platform MyAlert was far superior technologically than Buongiorno!. On the other hand appeared a new product “consumer services” (ring tones, logos…) the new company had to adapt its business model including consumer services which soon produced benefits. Also they were able to keep creating new business models as “Digital Marketing Project”.

As we have seen MyAlert is a good example of how a company is able to adapt and survive in a really dynamic environment what changes pretty fast, adapting and creating new business models and investing in technology in order to keep its leading position. Is the merge with Buongiorno! a must or just a good idea? Definitely the merge was a MUST, MyAlert had become a world leader and to keep this status they needed to remain this position in every market, soon they realized that it was impossible to achieve through organic growth.

The economical environment was unstable due to the dot com crisis, investors become more demanding looking for positives results in the short term, competitors started to appear and revenues from advertising and m-commerce were reduced due to the economic crisis. All this factors push to Mr. Jorge and his team to look for a similar company with the same goal to join forces and survive in the long term, and this is how they found Buongiorno! And merge in order to keep growing in a very competitive dynamic market.

Cost Benefit Analysis admission essay help: admission essay help

Introduction

This section covers 4 areas and should be written about the organisation as a whole not just the key area you will focus on later:- Overview of Business (cover PIC 1. 1, 1. 3, 1. 4) What do they do? How big are they? What external relationships do they have? Who are the key stakeholders? (key customers/ suppliers, staff, shareholders etc) Describe the accounts department structure (include a chart as appendix) How do they link with other departments? Financial Statements (cover PIC 1. 2) What Financial Statements do they produce? Why? – What is the purpose of each?

What regulations are followed when preparing them? (internal policy, Co Act, UK GAAP, IFS, FRSSE) Regulations (cover PIC 2. 1, 1. 5) What other regulations do they comply with? ( tax, data protection, industry specific legislation? What happens when regulations change? Software (cover PIC 3. 3, 3. 4) Describe the accounting packages used, include details of what training is given to staff, do they have operational manuals or other written info, do they have help menus. Why do they use these systems? What are the alternatives, are they better or worse 5 Review of XX system This section reviews one area of the accounting system. ( Pick one where there are weaknesses with potential for errors in the accounts). This section has three areas to be covered:- System requirements (Cover EAS 1. 1) Describe the system requirements. E.. g if you are reviewing a sales system you would explain that the organisation wants a system that will record all sales, at the correct date, quantity, price, etc… Describe the reports that will be useful e. g. aged debt reports, sales by product, branch, manager etc. Potential fraud (cover EAS 1. 2, 1. 4, PIC 2. 1, 2. 2, 3. 1) Describe what fraud is and what regulations there are over fraud.

Describe what potential there is for fraud and what controls there are in place at the moment to mitigate this. Is the resulting fraud risk high or low? You can include the fraud grid from your plan as an appendix. In the report you should write explaining each area in full paragraphs. Other weaknesses (Cover PIC 3. 1, 3. 3, EAS 1. 2, 1. 3, 1. 5) Describe weaknesses where errors are made in the accounts (? x). This could be due to poor training, jobs being rushed, work not adequately supervised or checked, lack of motivation for staff, or poor process and lack of controls.

Describe the impact to the business – ? x error, time wasted et 6 Recommendations (cover PIC 1. 5, 2. 4, 3. 3, EAS 2. 1, 2. 2, 2. 3, 2. 4) You should have one recommendation for each weakness (high fraud risk or other weakness). For each one describe who will do what, how often, how long will it take. What training will be required, will a manual be written, how will the new policy / procedure be communicated to staff so they know what to do? What are the cost ? x and time taken to set up the new procedure. What are the benefits – save time, reduce risk of errors / fraud, quicker info, better info?

Provide a cost benefit analysis with detailed workings in an appendix ( you can use the table from your plan for this). 7 Appendices The appendices should be appropriate to your report and should appear in the order to which you refer to them in the report. Suggested appendices include:- • Organisation chart • Account department chart • Details of interviews with colleagues/ line managers • Bibliography – noting any material referred to – Kaplan notes, books, websites visited. • Fraud matrix (see plan) • Cost benefit analysis (see plan)

Decribe the key issue Abu Ghraib get essay help: get essay help

Outline a key issue for obedience, discuss by using theories/studies from obedience for what happened in Abu Ghraib The Abu Ghraib prison is a notorious prison in Iraq, located in Abu Ghraib, near Baghdad. US soldiers were told to abuse and humiliate the prisoners by their leaders; this included chaining them up, treating them like dogs, and sometimes sexually harassing them. In April 2004 the abuses at Abu Ghraib were exposed with photos and videos showing US soldiers abusing naked Iraqis.

On the 22nd October 2004, a US solider – Staff sergeant Ivan Chip Frederick, aged 38 was sentenced to 8 years imprisonment for sexually and physically assaulting detainees which included performing a mock electrocution on an individual. Chief Warrant Officer Kevin Kramer, a military intelligence officer referred to an email sent by US command in Baghdad telling him to order his interrogators to be tough on prisoners. The email said that they “wanted the detainees to be broken”.

This theory could be used because the soldiers are trained to be agents of authority and believe they have a duty to protect America as agents of society thus as soldiers, they would be agents obeying the orders rather than autonomous individuals making their own decisions. The soldiers would not have been in an autonomous state, and would have therefore been more able to carry out the orders given to them by an authority figure.

This may have been because the soldiers were under the impressions that they would not be held responsible for their actions hence they thought it was acceptable to torture the Iraqi detainees as well as degrading them in the process. The agency theory can be used for what happened at Abu Ghraib. The US soldiers were in an agentic state; they were an agent for the authority, in the soldier’s case the authority was the higher up in command officers. When they were given a job to do for example, to sexually harass a prisoner they did it because they saw it as their duty not their own choice.

The soldiers took no responsibility for their actions because they were told to do them. When the abuse at Abu Ghraib was exposed to the public, all the soldiers said were that “they were only following orders”. In the soldier’s eyes and mind they were only doing their duty they were not committing any wrong. The authority had complete control over them and could tell them to do anything and they would do it. But once this abuse was exposed the soldiers agentic state broke down and they started to realise they had done wrong and got into an autonomous state and then took responsibility for their actions, as they realised they didn’t have to follow them but at the time they believed they had to because they were not in charge. Joe Darby was the one who took the photos and reported them; he was a ‘whistleblower’. A whistleblower is someone who reports something to someone which is engaged in illicit activity. Zimbardo’s prison experiment can also be used as a study to explain what happened in Abu Ghraib. In 1971, psychologist Philip Zimbardo and his colleagues set out to create an experiment that looked at the impact of becoming a prisoner or prison guard.

Zimbardo, a former classmate of Stanley Milgram, was interested in expanding upon Milgram’s research. He wanted to further investigate the impact of situational variables on human behaviour. The researchers set up a mock prison in the basement of Standford University’s psychology building, and then selected 24 undergraduate students to play the roles of both prisoners and guards. The participants were selected from a larger group of 70 volunteers because they had no criminal background, lacked psychological issues and had no major medical conditions.

While the Stanford Prison Experiment was originally slated to last 14 days, it had to be stopped after just six days due to what was happening to the student participants. The guards became abusive and the prisoners began to show signs of extreme stress and anxiety. While the prisoners and guards were allowed to interact in any way they wanted, the interactions were generally hostile or even dehumanizing. The guards began to behave in ways that were aggressive and abusive toward the prisoners, while the prisoners became passive and depressed.

Five of the prisoners began to experience such severe negative emotions, including crying and acute anxiety that they had to be released from the study early. According to Zimbardo and his colleagues, the Stanford Prison Experiment demonstrates the powerful role that the situation can play in human behaviour, Because the guards were placed in a position of power, they began to behave in ways they would not normally act in their everyday lives or in other situations.

The prisoners, placed in a situation where they had no real control, became passive and depressed. This study is much like the Abu Ghraib, even though the participants of Zimbardo weren’t told to be aggressive, they took the authority power, just like the US command did in Abu Ghraib. Conformity is also another study that can be used to explain Abu Ghraib. Conformity suggests some degree of conflict between what the group demands of the individual and what the individual would otherwise do.

If one participant that was chose to be a prison guard started acting aggressive towards the participants being prisoners, conformity would say that the rest of the prison guards would begin to follow that prison guard and become aggressive towards the prisoners themselves. Conformity is changing your belief or behaviour due to real or imagined group pressure and in Abu Ghraib there was real group pressure because the other prison guards were being aggressive so the rest of them though that’s what the experiment wanted them to do.

Hofling’s 1966 experiment can also be a study to support what happened at Abu Ghraib. Hofling’s experiment was when Hofling chose 22 nurses from different wards and hospitals including both private and public hospitals. The aim of the experiment was to see if nurses would obey an order they thought came from a doctor, even though by obeying, nurses would be going against their training. Nurses were called by a ‘Doctor Smith’ telling them to give a patient a dose of 20mg of Astroten, even though the label on the bottle said ‘10mg daily limit’.

Because the order came from a higher authority (the doctor), 21/22 nurses obeyed the order and went to give the patient double the daily amount even though 11/22 read the label. Power and perceive status may have caused high obedience, just like in Abu Ghraib when the US command sent the email to US soldiers to be aggressive towards them; the soldiers obeyed it because they were being ordered to.

My Career Plan essay help for free: essay help for free

My philosophy as a teacher is that the child needs to come first. To say that the only thing that matters in the classroom is my teaching lesson, is to ignore the many situations that students face each day before they walk through the classroom door. The classroom is the place to provide instruction, but it should also be an environment where students feel safe to share experiences, to ask questions, and to feel respected by their teacher(s) as well as their peers. It is my job as an educator to serve as a positive role model, facilitator, and listener to ensure success in their learning environment.

Educating youth cannot be done alone. It takes the work of a community to enrich, educate, and get to know the whole child. I hope to achieve this in my classroom by having an open door policy where everyone feels welcome, maintaining constant communication with parents and staff, and taking advantage of opportunities outside the classroom that will assist students in understanding and transferring skills to the real world. As an educator I will use my available resources to form relations and make connections with students in a way which will allow them to grow academically, socially, emotionally and behaviorally.

If there has been anything that I have learned in the process of continuing my own education and expanding my experiences in the classroom, it is that material should be taught in a way that allows all learners to make connections and be successful with instruction which is differentiated in order to meet their needs. Students that are gifted need to be challenged with higher level content, whereas those who are struggling to keep up with material at their grade level may require extra time or access to materials at their instructional level.

There are so many more different scenarios that must be considered to ensure everyone is learning in the least restrictive environment and to the highest of their ability level. In order for academic learning to take place with minimal discipline problems, there will be three main expectations in my classroom. Students need to be responsible, respectful, and safe at all times. If any one of these components is missing, the dynamics are tarnished and the self-esteem could be crushed.

It is difficult for students then to want to take risks and for meaningful learning and relationships to occur. It is my job to build a positive learning community where everyone tries their best, encourages others, and is responsible for their actions as well as their attitudes towards others. Again the support of other professionals and parents may be necessary to achieve this goal, but when all of these elements are in place students will have the opportunity to achieve greatness in their learning environment.

My future goal is to work with any children in the school setting. I love what I do. I enjoy working with any students whether they have a disability or not because I care about tomorrow’s generation and I want to have a positive impact on their learning. At this point in my career, I have experienced teaching in both special education and regular education settings and have found them equally gratifying. I am grateful for both experiences and just hope that others will see my passion and motivation as well and allow me the opportunity to teach in their district too.

B. Ed. (IInd Year) homework essay help: homework essay help

ES-362: Computers in Education Assignment 1 Answer the following questions in about 500 words each: i) Explain the criteria you would adopt to select a software for teaching with the help of a suitable example. (500 words) ii) Discuss the role of computers in financial accounting in the schools. (500 words) iii) Select a topic of your choice from your teaching subject. Divide the contents in the form of frames and arrange then in the sequential manner. (500 words) ES-363: Guidance and Counselling Assignment 1 Answer the following questions a) Discuss the use of aptitude and achievement tests in classroom teaching.

Give examples. (250 words) b) Discuss the role of teachers in the career planning of their students. c) (250 words) Discuss the concept of inclusive education. You have a learner with disability in your classroom. Write a report on the instructional strategies you would adopt and the teachinglearning materials and environment you would create for making your classroom processes inclusive. (1000 words) 3 ES-364: Distance Education Assignment 1 Answer the following questions in about 1500 words: i) Describe different models of distance education institutions with emphasis on their relative advantages and disadvantages.

(500 words) ii) Discuss the interrelationship between the characteristics of distance learners and those of distance education system. (500 words) iii) The use of media in distance education institutions has led to the evolutionary thinking on the development of distance education. Explain the statement in the context of different generations of distance education? (500 words) Assignments B. Ed (IInd Year) Assignments for two special compulsory courses BESE-065: HIV AND AIDS EDUCATION Assignment 1 Answer the following questions i) Explain briefly the profile of HIV and AIDS.

(500 words) ii) Elaborate misconceptions of HIV, AID and STDs? (500 words) iii) Elaborate your role in a school for preventing Drug addiction and HIV. (500 words) BESE-066: ADOLESCENCE AND FAMILY EDUCATION Assignment 1 Answer the following questions i) Briefly explain the Personnel and Socio-cultural concerns of adolescents. (500 words) ii) Elaborate briefly the merits and drawbacks of Joint and Nuclear family. (500 words) iii) As a teacher, what role do you visualise as an individual in Family life education Elaborate with Illustrations. 4

Summary canterville ghost college essay help los angeles: college essay help los angeles

There was a horrible storm that night, but apart from that nothing scary happened. The nextmorning, however, when the family came down to breakfast, they found the terrible stain of bloodonce again on the floor. Washington cleaned it a second time, but the second morning it appearedagain. The third morning it was there, too, although the library had been locked up at night by Mr Otis himself. The following night, all doubts about the existence of the ghost were finally removed forever. Ateleven o’clock the family went to bed and some time after, Mr Otis was awakened by a strangenoise in the corridor, outside his room.

It sounded like the clank of metal, and it came nearer everymoment. Mr Otis got up and looked at the time. It was exactly one o’clock. So Mr Otis put on hisslippers, went to the door and opened it. There, right in front of him, stood the ghost – his eyeswere as red as burning coals; long grey hair fell over his shoulders and from his wrists and ankleshung heavy chains.? My dear Sir,? said Mr Otis, ? you must oil those chains. It’s impossible to sleep with such a noisegoing on outside the bedrooms.

I have therefore brought you this bottle of lubricator, and I will behappy to supply you with more if you require it.? With these words Mr Otis laid the bottle down,closed his door and went back to bed. Shocked, the Canterville ghost stood quite motionless for a moment, but then he growled angrily. Just at this moment, the twins appeared on the corridor and threw a large pillow at him! The ghosthastily escaped through the wall, and the house became quiet again. When the ghost reached his small secret chamber, he took a deep breath. No ghosts in history hadever been treated in this manner!

Paper essay help for free: essay help for free

The Puritan belief in God was a very strong bond. Puritans gave their whole heart to God and to no other. William Bradford, John Winthrop, Anne Bradstreet, and Mary Rowlandson were strong Christians that believed God was the mightiest over all things, and they wanted to spread the word of the Lord in their eyes. Although Bradford, Winthrop, Bradstreet, and Rowlandson have different opinions of God’s direction and purpose, they all agree that the love and power of God was stronger than all others.

All of these Puritans loved God with full commitment, but William Bradford had an opinion on God that favored his righteousness. Bradford was a strong Christian living in the 1600’s in the American colony of Plymouth. Bradford was a leader in the Plymouth community, and helped his fellow Christians base their community on God. Bradford believed that God was a great, strong power, but also believed that He was forgiving, merciful, and righteous. “But the Lord is never wanting unto his in their greatest needs; let his Holy name have all the praise.

” (Bradford 78), is what Bradford tells, explaining that God is loving and merciful to his followers under all circumstances. Bradford also states, “Thus it pleased God to vanquish their enemies, and give them deliverance; and by His special providence so to dispose that not any one of them were either hurt, or hit. ” (Bradford 79), meaning that God blessed his people with protection, with God’s ultimate providence. Bradford uses the word “providence” quite often when referring to God’s deeds, ultimately explaining His great awe and righteousness.

John Winthrop had a different belief in the direction of God, but ultimately a similar belief in the love and strength of Him. Winthrop was a very strong and strict Puritan. Winthrop believed that God had incredible power, and was the creator and King of all people. “So this great King will have many stewards,” (Winthrop 91), he states, explaining his belief of God as a King, having “stewards”, or Christian followers to listen to his Word. He also believed that the Creator, God made all equal in status, “It appears plainly that no man is made more honorable than another or more wealthy, etc.

… but for the glory of his Creator and the common good of the creature, man. ” (Winthrop 91). Winthrop’s strong idea that God was our Maker, King, and Creator was a common belief of the Puritans, and Winthrop wanted to spread the word of the Lord. Anne Bradstreet was another believer in the love and power of God, but Bradstreet had one quality greater than many other Christians: faith. Bradstreet claims that she has never seen God’s glory or miracles, but still holds a very strong belief in Him.

She also was a very strong believer that if God punished one, it was to ultimately help them grow as a Christian and a person. “If at any time you are chastened by God, take it as thankfully and joyfully as in greatest mercies, for if ye be His, ye shall reap the greatest benefit by it. ” (Bradstreet 124), is what she writes telling Christians not to feel sorry for themselves, but to take it as a gift to help them understand the benefit that comes out of it. Bradstreet dedicates much of her life to God and Christianity, but her faith to God is completely blind in her own opinion.

“I never saw any miracles to confirm me, and those which I read of, how did I know but they were feigned? ” (Bradstreet 125), she asks herself, contemplating if there was actually a God or not. She answers herself, “That there is a God my reason would soon tell me by the wondrous works that I see, the vast frame of the heaven and the Earth,” (Bradstreet 125), reminding herself that a Great being in God had to exist in the beginning and create such a landscape that the universe is.

Bradstreet at points has a tough time putting her whole heart to God and his faith, but Bradstreet’s incredible drive and faith helps her end up happily devoting herself to God. Mary Rowlandson was a settler that had her entire family and town attacked amidst King Philip’s War. Although things looked bleak for Rowlandson while she was held captive for eleven weeks by the Natives during this war, she retained her strong bond with God. Rowlandson believed that God was the strongest and mightiest in the world, and that He would bless those who have

stayed faithful in the end. She knew that God was with her and would carry her to safety during her long captivity. “But God was with me in a wonderful manner, carrying me along, and bearing up my spirit, that it did not quite fail,” (Rowlandson 131), she says, explaining her faith to God and belief that with his power and might, lead her to safety eventually. Rowlandson also states, “That we must rely on God Himself, and our whole dependence must be upon him.

” (Rowlandson 143), explaining that we must depend on God to help us out of situations that we cannot get ourselves out of. “If trouble from smaller matters begins to arise in me, I have something at hand to check myself with, and say, why am I troubled? ” (Rowlandson 143), she states meaning that the small matters should not bring us down, as we have God on our side, and with his might and strength, he can guide us through all tough matters.

Mary Rowlandson had always believed in the power of the Lord, so when she was under heavy pressure in captivity, she kept her steadfast love and belief in the Lord, showing her faith in the might of God. William Bradford, John Winthrop, Anne Bradstreet, and Mary Rowlandson all believed in God and his powerful abilities, but each has a different, but respectable belief in the direction and purpose of God. William Bradford believed that God was merciful and loving to all that worshipped him.

John Winthrop thought that God was a King to Christians, making important decisions, creating people, places, and things, and using his followers to spread the love of his own word. Anne Bradstreet was convinced to god’s love, even though she had never seen his great works and miracles. And Mary Rowlandson stayed faithful to God’s great power during her captivity, believing that he had the might to free her from the Natives. But, Bradford, Winthrop, Bradstreet, and Rowlandson all agreed that God has created a world where he is all-powerful and loving to all that worshipped his word.

Bullying Speech college essay help free: college essay help free

Hello I’m Maddi Beeson as many of you know and I wanted to talk to you about a very important issue at our school. There is the problem of bullying and I would like to say something about it which will hopefully change things. Starting off with this poem I had found on the internet which is a very inspiring poem about bullying. It is called: To This Day- for the bullied and the beautiful by Shane Koyczan.

When I was a kid I used to think that pork chops and karate chops Were the same thing I thought they were both pork chops And because my grandmother thought it was cute And because they were my favorite She let me keep doing it Not really a big deal One day Before I realized fat kids are not designed to climb trees I fell out of a tree And bruised the right side of my body I didn’t want to tell my grandmother about it Because I was afraid I’d get in trouble For playing somewhere that I shouldn’t have been A few days later the gym teacher noticed the bruise And I got sent to the principal’s office From there I was sent to another small room With a really nice lady Who asked me all kinds of questions About my life at home I saw no reason to lie As far as I was concerned.

Life was pretty good I told her, “Whenever I’m sad My grandmother gives me karate chops” This led to a full scale investigation And I was removed from the house for three days Until they finally decided to ask how I got the bruises News of this silly little story quickly spread through the school And I earned my first nickname Pork Chop To this day I hate pork chops I’m not the only kid Who grew up this way Surrounded by people who used to say That rhyme about sticks and stones As if broken bones Hurt more than the names we got called And we got called them all So we grew up believing no one Would ever fall in love with us That we’d be lonely forever That we’d never meet someone To make us feel like the sun Was something they built for us In their tool shed So broken heart strings bled the blues As we tried to empty ourselves.

So we would feel nothing Don’t tell me that hurts less than a broken bone That an ingrown life Is something surgeons can cut away That there’s no way for it to metastasize It does She was eight years old Our first day of grade three When she got called ugly We both got moved to the back of the class So we would stop get bombarded by spit balls But the school halls were a battleground Where we found ourselves outnumbered day after wretched day We

used to stay inside for recess Because outside was worse Outside we’d have to rehearse running away Or learn to stay still like statues giving no clues that we were there In grade five they taped a sign to her desk That read beware of dog To this day Despite a loving husband She doesn’t think she’s beautiful Because of a birthmark That takes up a little less than half of her face Kids used to say she looks like a wrong answer That someone tried to erase But couldn’t quite get the job done And they’ll never understand That she’s raising two kids Whose definition of beauty Begins with the word mom Because they see her heart Before they see her skin Because she’s only ever always been amazing He Was a broken branch

Grafted onto a different family tree Adopted Not because his parents opted for a different destiny He was three when he became a mixed drink Of one part left alone And two parts tragedy Started therapy in 8th grade Had a personality made up of tests and pills Lived like the up hills were mountains And the down hills were cliffs Four fifths suicidal A tidal wave of anti depressants And an adolescence of being called popper One part because of the pills Ninety nine parts because of the cruelty He tried to kill himself in grade ten When a kid who could still go home to mom and dad Had the audacity to tell him “get over it” as if depression Is something that can be remedied By any of the contents found in a first aid kit To this day He is a stick of TNT lit from both ends Could describe to you in detail the way the sky bends In the moments before it’s about to fall And despite an army of friends Who all call him an inspiration He remains a conversation piece between people Who can’t understand Sometimes becoming drug free Has less to do with addiction And more to do with sanity We weren’t the only kids who grew up this way To this day Kids are still being called names The classics were Hey stupid Hey spaz Seems like each school has an arsenal of names Getting updated every year And if a kid breaks in a school And no one around chooses to hear

Do they make a sound? Are they just the background noise Of a soundtrack stuck on repeat When people say things like Kids can be cruel? Every school was a big top circus tent And the pecking order went From acrobats to lion tamers From clowns to carnies All of these were miles ahead of who we were We were freaks Lobster claw boys and bearded ladies Oddities Juggling depression and loneliness playing solitaire spin the bottle Trying to kiss the wounded parts of ourselves and heal But at night While the others slept We kept

Rural Marketing Strategy by Colgate college essay help service: college essay help service

From a modest start in 1937, when hand-carts were used to distribute Colgate Dental Cream Toothpaste, Colgate-Palmolive (India) today has one of the widest distribution networks in India – a logistical marvel that makes Colgate available in almost 4. 93 million retail outlets across the country. The Company has grown to a Rs. 2805 crore plus organization with an outstanding record of enhancing value for its strong shareholder base. The company leads the Rs. 5200 crore Indian toothpaste market by holding 53. 2% of the market share. This report details about the strategies that Colgate adapted in order to expand its market share.

RURAL MARKET SCOPE IN INDIA According to the FDI World Dental Federation, in rural areas of India, the penetration of oral care products is just one third of that in urban areas. Here people predominantly clean their teeth with natural items like twigs of neem tree, salt and ash. One can conclude that a tremendous opportunity lies in the oral care market in rural India. The Accenture report gives several indications, including increase in procurement prices resulting in greater purchasing power of rural population allowing consumers to buy discretionary goods.

Between 2009 and 2012, spending in rural India reached US$69 billion, significantly higher than the US$55 billion spent by urban populations. Rural India accounts for about 50 percent of India’s GDP and nearly 70 percent of India’s population. STRATEGIES ADOPTED Colgate adopted the following marketing strategies for their low end product, Cibaca Top through which they entered rural segment: 1. ‘Sampark’ – Promotion Strategy Sampark – a specialist in rural advertising, was hired by Colgate to promote their product in the Indian hinterland. Main techniques used were door to door selling and use of publicity vans called A/V vans.

These vans were placed at strategic areas on specific market days of different villages in order to access a wider audience. Local salesmen to breach the communication barrier, showcasing of educational films on oral hygiene were additional measures undertaken by Sampark. The major thrust of promotion was through schools and was in line with Colgate’s school dental education plan in collaboration with the Indian Dental Association called “Young India, Bright Smiles, Bright Futures” 2. Van Model – Distribution Strategy Colgate demanded its distributors to be ‘Intellised’, i. e. billing information should be computerized through the company software only. They distribute the product to wholesaler and retailer in the assigned rural area. The distributors are given instructions by the company regarding the frequency of visit to be made by the vans to a particular town. An average subsidy of 4% per van, is offered to the distributors based on their sales. Distributor’s vans take orders from the wholesalers and retailers on their route and deliver the same on their next scheduled visit. The company gives an initial 5% discount to its distributors, who are asked to provide 10% discount to the wholesalers and retailers.

The loss incurred by the distributors is then reimbursed by the company. Thus overall, in order to attract distributor, the company gives extra 10% reimbursement credit on the price of goods sold to wholesalers & retailers apart from 5% initial discount. And the wholesalers and retailers avail the margin of approx 15%. 3. Rs 8 Strategy: Colgate-Palmolive (India) Ltd. launched Cibaca Top at an affordable price point of Rs. 8 which was an instant hit, with Cibaca Top garnering a 5. 9 per cent share of the rural market. Cibaca targeted the low price segment that accounted for around 25% of total category volumes.

Colgate Cibaca caters to low economy segment as a competitor to brands like Babool, Anchor etc. Consumers preferred Cibaca because of the low rates, flexibility and quality assurance. Moreover, as population and purchasing power of the individuals are increasing there is increased market for toothpaste industry. Apart from the above mentioned strategies, Colgate also decreased their expense on advertisement. Despite low sales in the years 03-05, the company experience increased net profit by decreasing their expenses on advertisement. This can be shown via exhibit number 1 and 2.

The green coloured cells indicate the significant increase in the profit.

Calicut Operations Manageent essay help from professional writers: essay help from professional writers

Kentucky Fried Chicken, popularly known as KFC, is a part of Yum! Brands, Inc. (which also owns leading brands like Pizza Hut, Taco Bell) the world’s largest restaurant company with more than 36,000 locations around the world. KFC is the world’s largest chain of fried chicken fast food restaurants, headquartered in Louisville, Kentucky in the United States. It was founded by Colonel Harland Sanders, who began selling fried chicken from his roadside restaurant in Corbin, Kentucky during the Great Depression. KFC primarily sells chicken in form of pieces, wraps, salads and sandwiches.

It also offers a line of roasted chicken products, side dishes and desserts. KFC offers its signature products in India as well. It was the first fast food multinational to enter India. During the initial days in India KFC faced protests by PETA and many cultural and economic activists who used the term ‘junk food’ against KFC. Initially KFC targeted individuals who preferred individual meals of international taste. Later they changed their target to families. In KFC main menu items are Crispy outside Juicy inside Hot and Crispy Chicken; Spicy, Juicy and Crunchy Zinger Burger, Toasted Twister, Chicken Bucket etc.

For the vegetarians in India, KFC also has great offerings that include Veg Burger, Veg Snacker and Veg Rice meals. In Calicut, the sales ratio of non-veg and veg dishes is 95% and 5% respectively. At present there are 223 restaurants across 35 cities. It is now targeting second-tier markets as it looks to achieve $1 billion in system sales and 1,000 stores by 2015 across 85 cities. 2. Organizational Structure KFC, as an organization, has following layers in its structure. 1. Area Coach This is the first level of the hierarchy (for a restaurant).

The Area coach is responsible for all the trainings outside the KFC premises. He is the head of Field training. Under each Area Coach there are the Restaurant General Managers corresponding to the restaurants falling within the area of the Area Coach. 2. RGM (Restaurant General Manager) He is the head of a particular outlet. He is accountable for following the business practises and maintaining health and safety standards within his outlet. The KFC outlet in Calicut outlet has 1 RGM 3. ARM (Assistant Restaurant Manager) The ARM is responsible for the training of the employees for his outlet.

He is an assistant to the RGM and is accountable for the day to day operations such as customer handling, purchases, adherence to safety and health standards etc. The KFC outlet in Calicut has 2 ARMs. 4. SM (Shift Manager) He is an assistant to the ARM and is responsible for his shift. There are 3 shifts and presently there are 3 SMs for the Calicut outlet of KFC 5. Team Member This is the first level in the hierarchy. To move over to the SM level, the employee has to go through an IDP i. e. Internal Development Process.

The IDP is a training Program which is carried out by the in-house SMs as well as Buddy managers who visit an outlet to conduct the training. Presently there are 55 team members in the Calicut outlet of KFC. The number of team members in an outlet varies from 30 for a small outlet to 50-60 for a big outlet. The Hierarchy that exists in the KFC outlet and career path of the employees are shown below. Figure: KFC Organizational Structure Figure: Career Path of an Employee 3. Facility Layout The present location of KFC outlet is National Highway 17, Tazhekkod, Kozhikode, Kerala 673001.

The outlet is strategically located in one of the market complexes on the national highway. The store also has expansion plans in the upcoming HiLite Mall in Calicut. The outlet spans across 5000 sq. Feet and is the largest facility in terms of sq. Feet area all over the country. The kitchen area accounts for approximately 1000 sq. Feet. Biggest outlet in India Seating capacity of the outlet is 210 Average footfall per day is 300-315 Figure: First floor, KFC outlet Calicut The outlet benefits from lesser presence of competitors in the vicinity, the only major competitors being Chic King and Dominos.

Figure: KFC outlet Calicut Layout Design Dining area is equipped with a number of tables of different sizes, shapes and sitting capacity ranging from 2 to 16 in one table. Walls in this area are painted with graffiti designs which are similar for all the outlets across India. Music system is installed with equally distributed speakers across all corners that play soft music with very mild yet audible and enjoyable loudness. Kitchen area is very well isolated from dining area. It is restricted for only authorize personnel access to ensure safety and hygiene standards.

Kitchen area comprises of: 3 storage facilities at different temperature level Manager’s cabin and a room for staff Sanitization and cooking area Kitchen area looks tight packed and constricted in size, but it is well planned standard of KFC outlets to minimize distance and hence travel time between different work stations. 4. Process Analysis KFC is a highly process oriented organization and hence their success largely depends how well they are able to design and implement the process specifically while fulfilling the customer orders.

Like all the other aspects of KFC, preparation of the dishes also follows nation-wide standards to maintain same taste and quality across all the outlets in India. In terms of operation management a Process is defined as an activity that takes inputs and transforms them into outputs that, it is hoped are of great value to the organization than the original inputs. In simple terms we can say that it is transforming inputs into the desired output. KFC applies a Multi Stage Process Approach with a motive of Make-to-Order. Following are the processes involved in the preparation of any typical recipe.

1) Storage of raw material: KFC procures all the raw materials from fixed vendors to maintain constant quality. The process starts from Cold Storage, which is a designated area to store raw chicken and vegetables at varied refrigerated temperatures. Since items procured are of 3 different forms, it has to be stored at different temperatures as given below: a) Dry: Dry storage maintains a temperature close to 10? C to normal room temperature. It stores all the material that does not require cold storage. b) Chilled: The temperature required to store Chilled chicken varies from 1? C to 4? C. The life expectancy for the items in this storage is for 1-2 days. Hence they take raw materials based on their forecasting and store the material accordingly which are to be used within next 2 days. c) Frozen: The temperature required to store Chilled chicken varies from -18? C to -35? C. The life expectancy for dry chicken is of 120 days. The storage room for vegetables and chicken is same but these items are kept at certain distance. KFC maintains a particular height above the ground and away from walls to store the material in all storage rooms.

2) Removing from Cold Storage / Sanitization: Chicken/vegetables are removed from the storage area based upon the daily forecast of the orders which is precisely the daily requirement to support the customer orders on daily basis. After removing from Cold Storage, this chicken is sanitized by washing and cleaning of the raw chicken through three different stages. After properly sanitizing, cleaned chicken is transported to Marination Process. 3) Marinating Raw Chicken: Marination is the process of soaking foods in a seasoned, often acidic, and liquid before cooking to add flavour by immersion in liquid.

The liquid in question, the ‘Marinade’, is acidic in nature (made with ingredients such as vinegar, lemon juice) or enzymatic (made with ingredients such as pineapple or papaya). KFC has reserved the secret recipe of this oil. At the same time various other ingredients are also added which includes flavoured items like herbs, and spices to further enhance the taste. Marination is done through a machine called Marinator. It is simple to operate machine which comprises of a chamber and an electronic controller to operate the chamber.

The Chicken is placed in the chamber, add marinade, add ice cubes and put on the Marinator. Push a button and the unit turns for exactly 10 minutes and you are done. It takes about 300 rounds in 10 minutes. The temperature is controlled to 1? C to 2? C. 4) Breeding: Breeding of chicken is the process of covering the marinated chicken with a layer of secret KFC ingredients. A due care is taken to keep the product mix of the recipe constant at the same time it is another point of Quality control to check and ensure that Veg and Non-Veg section remains separated.

5) Frying & Oil Draining: Computerized VAT process is a form of Deep Frying technique which uses a basket to raise chicken pieces of the oil when cooking is finished. VAT Fryer placed at KFC are equipped with features such as timers with an audible alarm, measures to prevent food crumbs from becoming over cooked, ventilation systems to reduce frying odours, oil filters to extend the usable life of the oil, and mechanical or electronic temperature controls. These fryers are used for cooking many fast foods, and making them crisp.

VAT Fryer is placed opposite to the breeding table inside the Kitchen so as to make sure that the chicken pieces take the minimum time to move from the breeding table to the frying rods. Oil Draining is generally done manually with the help of bucket placed over the VAT fryer. This takes place over the VAT fryer only. Time taken by the process is 3-5 minutes. KFC standards are 5 minutes. 6) Buffering: The fried pieces of the Chicken are sent to the storage buffer for immediate storage. This storage section is called as Buffer. The shelf life of fried chicken is 2 hours, but it needs to be stored at regulated temperatures.

This is important as to keep the freshness of the flavour and taste as it is. 7) Assembling the order: This process takes place at the Counter. The counter person assembles all the parts in Burger like bun, fried chicken, mayonnaise and other items as per the order. 8) Serving: The person at the counter serves the order to the customer along with cordial and warm gestures. 9) Inventory: There are various set of inventories at various points which are to ensure proper scheduling of the order. Automated times are installed to track life of products at the inventory.

After the due lapse of time, inventory products are discarded immediately. For detailed analysis we have chosen following two products of two different categories, 1. Grilled Chicken – Kentucky Grilled Chicken is marinated, seasoned and slow grilled to juicy perfection. 2. Veg Zinger Burger – Assembly process of a burger where crispy fillet of 100% real veggies, topped with iceberg lettuce & mayo, served in a soft sesame bun. Image source: www. kfc. co. in 4. 1 Process Analysis of Grilled Chicken 1. Thawing: Raw chicken is retrieved from cold storage and kept in relatively warm temperature to melt.

Shelf life reduces to 48 hours from 9 months (in frozen storage). 2. Marination: This process starts with cleaning, removing damaged pieces, Removing fins, feathers and extra fat. Now chicken enters in Marinator machine in bundle of about 10 packets. Here it is rotated with secret ingredients, spices and water for 10 minutes. It is rotated for 300 times. 3. Aging: Marinated chicken is kept for 2 hours before further processes. 4. Cooking/Grilling: Chicken is now grilled at 250°C. It is called Convotherm. Minimum 7 pieces are taken, which takes 14 minutes and hence 2 minute per piece. 5.

Staging: Chicken is kept in normal temperature for 5 minutes before serving. At this time, shelf life of the product becomes 1 hour. 6. Delivery: Grilled chicken is delivered at the counter. Activity Designation Predecessors Time Retrieve Chicken/ sanitization A – 3 min Thawing B A 480 min Marination C B 10 min Aging D C 120 min Cooking/Grilling E D 2 min Staging F E 5 min Delivery G F 1 min X represents the Shelf life of the item, after which the item is discarded. Here, X = 1 hour. Cycle Time= 480 minutes Bottleneck = Activity B (Thawing) Throughput Time = (3+480+10+120+2+5+1) = 621 minutes 4.

2 Process Analysis of Veg Zinger Burger All the activities in assembling Veg Zinger Burger are simple and very much similar to that of Grilled Chicken. The only difference is that in this process, there are three parallel lines of activities. Also, the activity ‘F’ in below table i. e. toasting the Bun takes place after a customer has placed the order. It goes through two steps of toasting that takes 35 sec and 9 sec to complete. Activity Designation Predecessors Time Sanitization A – 3 min Patty Cooking B – 4. 5 min Bun Preparation (Thawing) C – 720 min Cutting lettuce D A 5 min Staging of Patty

E B 5 min Toast Bun F C 1. 68 Min Assemble and Deliver G D,E,F 0. 32 min X, Y, Z represent the shelf life of various components before assembling. Any particular component is discarded if it passes this time. X = 48*60 minutes, Y = 24*60 minutes, Z = 25 minutes Cycle Time= 720 minutes Bottleneck= Activity C (Thawing) Throughput Time = 738. 5 minutes 5. Service Effective service is one of the key factors that provide a competitive advantage in this particular field of business. The KFC outlet provides 3 types of services Dine-in Take-away Delivery 5. 1 Service Design Image Source: www.

studyblue. com/notes/note/n/exam-2/deck/2372497? KFC follows the Face-to-Face Tight Specs of service design matrix. The customers have the freedom to choose food items from a given list on display with very little variation while ordering at the counter. However all the activities are standardized, right from the beginning, like accepting the customer’s order, payment receipt till the lead time for the delivery of order etc. Moreover if a new food product is to be launched in an outlet, it will bear the same sort of standards (price, size etc. ) as set by KFC for the whole of India.

Further with respect to workforce also the skill sets possessed by different set of workers (cook, on-floor staff) are standardized i. e. they undergo similar training and gain expertise for routine tasks. 5. 2 Service Blueprint Figure: Service Blueprint, KFC 6. Job Design KFC is internally sectioned into five departments: Cash Kitchen Supply Rider Order Take The structure at KFC can be represented as: The induction of an employee at KFC undergoes various pre-defined stages. The job design is specific in terms of what sequence is to be followed for an employee to earn ‘stars’.

KFC has an institutionalized role orientation and employees have explicit information about the specifications of their job and timeline to be followed. With ‘mastery’ in each department, employee gets a ‘star’ with which salary increments are associated. The other criterion for promotion and salary increment is year-end performance review. Female employees, in most cases, are not able to avail all five stars as they are generally not trained in the ‘Rider’ department shown above due to safety concerns. However, this practice is limited to India unlike U.

S. where female employees can avail all 5 stars. The below figure represents the induction of an employee into KFC: 6. 1 CHAMPS Training The CHAMPS training that an employee undergoes as part of C&O training as mentioned above is to ensure that he can deliver all six aspects that the acronym CHAMPS stands for Apart from these six aspects of CHAMPS, Security is the seventh aspect for which employees are trained and proper precautions are taken. 6. 2 Working Hours KFC employees work in three shifts of 8-hours each for six days a week.

If an employee has an unavoidable situation, he can apply for a leave and other employees are accordingly adjusted flexible so as not to compromise on meeting demands as well as employee motivation. 6. 3 Performance Review Employees are divided into different teams and each team performance is judged on the basis of the following parameters: Projection: Each team prepares food items keeping in mind the expected footfall. The accuracy of this projection determines the team’s performance and hence is an important judging criteria

Punctuality: Each team is rated on how punctual the employees are and to what extent the employees conform to KFC norms Break through ideas: Creativity forms an important part of KFC culture and hence a major performance measuring criteria for the teams The team which excels in all these criteria in a given period of time is given an increment of Rs. 6000 per month and this motivates employees to perform better. 7. Quality Control KFC follows a set of standard measures for ensuring quality across all its outlets present all over the world.

And it is the duty of the manager of the outlet to reinforce these quality checks on a regular basis. Some of them are mentioned below: 1. The procurement of raw materials (like chicken, vegetables, cooking oil) are made from specific vendors which has been entitled for providing the same. These vendors provide the raw materials as per standards set by KFC and the outlets must order/receive from them only. They cannot rely on local vendors for the sake of cost cutting per se. The Kozhikode outlet procured its raw materials from Coimbatore, Bangalore and Pune. 2.

The raw materials are stored in cold storages with proper insulation and at a fixed height from the floor and a fixed distance from the walls. 3. Every food item at the KFC outlet has a certain shelf life associated with it (eg. Burgers have a shelf life of 10 minutes, Rice bowl+ Gravy=1 hr, Grilled Chicken = 2 hrs). On expiry of shelf life these food items are no longer served and have to be discarded. There are separate trash cans for veg/non veg items. 4. The cooking equipment are fully automated which maintains specific temperature for cooking different items.

The oil used for cooking is also inspected on a regular basis and replaced if found below set standards. 5. All the employees of the KFC outlet have to strictly maintain health and hygiene regime. At the onset of joining itself the employees have to undergo medical examinations. Even during working hours after every 30 minutes or so, every working staff has to sanitize their hands. 6. The KFC outlet opens at 11:00 AM, so by 10:55 AM latest all the cleaning activities and cooking pre requisites must be performed. 7.

The staffs are pre-scheduled to work(cooking, service etc. ) upon veg/non veg food items on certain weekdays and also has to wear aprons accordingly(green for veg/red for non-veg) 8. As soon as a customer enters the outlet, s/he must be greeted within 5 seconds. In case the floor people fail to do so, the employees behind the counter must acknowledge them. 9. The food items are prone to contamination by bacteria so they are either kept in cold storages at temperatures ranging from -23°c to 4°c or above 65°c in the display shelves. 10.

There is a Mystery Auditor who visits the outlet just like any other normal customer, whose identity is unknown to the staffs. S/he gives feedback upon the observations made on food quality, cleanliness, service etc. 11. There is another concept known as the Walk-of-8, wherein the manager of the outlet begins an inspection of outlet from a random point (be it kitchen, storage area etc. ) visiting every nook and corner and finally arriving at the start point. This walk has been found to be very effective in maintaining the quality checks and done on a constant basis.

8. Conclusion and Recommendation In Process Analysis, we observed that ‘Thawing’ activity is bottleneck in both the processes. It is an important and compulsory activity in which raw material is retrieved from freezer and kept at relatively higher temperature for several hours. This process can be accelerated using some heating equipments. It would reduce the cycle time. As the store is not in a prime location and also a bit off from the main road with sparse visibility it can put up hoardings to draw more customers.

The outlet is sparsely occupied during morning. There is absence of additional parking space of its own. It can be dealt with offsetting the parking charges for the customers who use paid parking for their vehicles. This would effectively increase the customer satisfaction and hence, would increase sales by the virtue of it. In Calicut outlet, wastage is greater than 0. 5% (as set by KFC world standards). Hence a proper forecast for weekdays/weekends usage must be made judiciously in order to prevent excess wastage.

Conflict Resolution worksheet college essay help free: college essay help free

Complete the Resolving Conflicts in Teams simulation located on the SOC 110 student Web page for Week Four. Reflect on the experiences with different conflict management styles at K24, in Ch. 12 of Small Group and Team Communication, and on your own experiences. Answer the following questions. 1. What are your strengths in resolving conflict? My greatest strength in resolving conflict is the ability to bring a team together to focus on the issues rather than the personalities involved.

I also come from a neutral standpoint when addressing conflict, and have been successful getting members in the team to remove all assumptions and stereotypes and meet me at the same neutral starting point. 2. What skills do you want to improve? I would like to improve my focus on maintenance behaviors. Although I have strong conflict resolution skills as it pertains to tasks, I want to make sure the team interpersonal relationships don’t take a hit as a result of the resolution. 3.

Which of the following conflict management styles did you select in managing conflict at K24? Check all that apply. Briefly describe why you selected each, or why you chose not to try a particular method. XAccommodation Didn’t attempt accommodation as there were two strongly opposing points of view and someone would have been unhappy XAvoidance Didn’t attempt to avoid or nothing would have gotten resolved and there was a deadline XCompromise Compromise was not an option due to the fact that the result had to be choosing or not choosing to go with Emily’s idea

XCompetition I selected Competition first, as there were two competing ideas, and I needed to get all the information on the table about each and why the points of view were supported or not. XCollaboration After hearing all of the information from both sides, I got the group to agree on the goal, then we analyzed each viewpoint to see why we should or shouldn’t support them as a team. 4. What was your dominant conflict management style? collaboration Was this style effective? Why or why not?

This style was effective because it allowed the team to focus on the important issues at hand and analyze the facts after we agreed what the goal was. 5. Provide an example of how you have used the following conflict management styles in your personal or professional life. Accommodation I’ve accommodated team members when a project had requirements in each individual had their own tasks, but may have felt better suited to perform a task that was assigned to me. Being that I was able to complete several tasks, I switched with team members to accommodate them.

Avoidance I have worked with team members who have always wanted to complain about projects after team meetings. I’ve picked up my cell phone right after the meetings and walked off to avoid the negativity Compromise I have wanted to meet with my study group on Fridays because it give me more time to work on our team assignments, but the team didn’t want to work on weekends, so we compromised and chose Monday, therefore it still gives us 2 days to work individually before class on Wednesday. Competition I’ve had a problem that was to be resolved by the team a few members had a different suggestion on how to complete the task.

We’ve each went away and wrote down our solutions and then met as a team and let the team decided a whole which idea was best in moving forward Collaboration In working on our week 4 assignment, we all met as a team, discussed our strengths and weaknesses, deciding what we wanted our paper to look like and the time in which we wanted to have it submitted. This allowed us to divide up the work so that everyone would be pleased with his or her portion and the time in which it should be done. 6. What conflict management styles do you plan to use in future team or group situations?

Explain your answer. I plan to use competition using the nominal group technique and collaboration. I like the idea of putting competing issues out on the table for discussion. I think it’s important to make sure that, in doing so; each member has the chance to voice his concerns and point of view without interruption. I find it equally important that each opposing member have a chance to address why they oppose. This allows everyone’s point of view to be expressed. Then we can focus on what we expect to achieve then collaborate to get that accomplished.

Staffing norms by inc and ana essay help online free: essay help online free

Every organization is primarily depends upon its human resources than any other single factor. The core determines of staffing in the hospital organization are quality, quantity and utilization of its personnel keeping in view the structure and process. The staffing norms should aims at matching the individual aspiration to the aims and objectives of the organization. On the other hand practice standards in the organization also play an important role in providing quality service and elimination of malpractices among staff. This term paper tries to give brief outline about the staffing norms and practice standards set by INC and ANA.

MEANING OF STAFFING Staffing is a systematic approach to the problem of selecting, training, motivating and retaining professional and nonprofessional personnel in any organization. It involves manpower planning to have the right person in the right place and avoid ‘square peg in round hole”. Staffing is a logical operation that consists of several interdependent actions as given below. 1. Identify the type and amount of services needed by agency client 2. Determining the personal categories that have the knowledge and the skills to perform needed service measures. 3.

Predicting the number of personnel in each job category that will be needed to meet and anticipated service demands. 4. Obtaining, budgeted positions for the number in each job category needed to service for the expected types and number of client. 5. Recruiting personnel to fill available positions. 6. Selecting and appointing personnel from suitable applicants. 7. Combining personal into desired configurations by unit and shift. 8. Orienting personnel to fulfill assigned responsibilities. 9. Assigning responsibilities for client services to available personnel. MANPOWER PLANNING

Manpower planning may be defined as a strategy for the accusation, utilization, improvement and preservation of the human resources of an organization. The objective of manpower planning is very wide and varied. The most important once are as follows, 1. Ensuring maximum utilization of the personnel. 2. Assessing future requirements of the organization. 3. Determining the recruitment sources. 4. Anticipating from past record. 5. Determining training requirements for management’s development and organizational development. The major activities of manpower planning includes, a) Forecasting future manpower requirements.

b) Inventorying present manpower resources and analyzing the degree to which the resources are employed optimally. c) Anticipating manpower problem by projecting present resources into the future and comparing them with forecast of requirements to determine the adequacy, both quantitatively and qualitatively. d) Planning the necessary programme, recruitment, selection, training, development, motivation and compensation, so that the future manpower requirements will be met. To achieve the above objectives, manpower planning involves the following steps, 1. Scrutiny of present personnel strength 2.

Anticipation of manpower needs 3. Investigation of turnover of personnel 4. Planning job requirements and job description The following are the sequential steps of staffing responsibilities, although each step has interdependence with all staffing activities. 1. Determine the number and the types personnel needs to fulfill the philosophy, met fiscal planning responsibilities, and carry out the chosen person care management organization 2. Recruit, interview, select and assign personnel based on established job description performance standards. 3. Use organization resources for induction and orientation. 4.

As certain that each employees is adequately socialized to organizational value and unit norms. 5. Use creative and flexible scheduling based on patient care needs to increase productivity and retention. 6. Develop a programme of staff education that will assist employees meeting the goals of the organization. STAFFING POLICIES The word “policy” has a greater significant in the organization for giving a direction to the activities in the field of finance, marketing, production, personnel etc. policy is a predetermined and accepted course of thoughts and actions established as a guide towards accepted goals and objectives.

The following things needed for the personal policies This is a predetermined course of rules or actions. Policies guide the performance of objectives. Policies provide the standard or ground for the objectives. The process of developing personnel policies involves the assessment of the following factors. 1. Identification of the purpose and objectives, which the organization wishes to attain with regard to its workforce. 2. Analysis of all the factors under which the organization’s personnel policy will be operating. 3. Examining the possible possibilities in each area in which the personnel policy statement is necessary.

4. Implementation of the policy through the development of procedures to support the policy. 5. Communication of the policy and procedures adapted to the entire organization. 6. Auditing the policy so as to reveal the necessary changes. 7. Continues re-evaluation and revision of policies to meet the current needs of the organization. FORMULATION OF PERSONNEL POLICY Formulation of personnel policies is a top management decision, affecting the operation of the organization. The formulation of these policies is different according to the level of expertise and the skills of the staff.

In certain organization, the personnel manager may be totally responsible for the entire process. In other organizations, the groups of line managers and employees representing the various departments assemble to formulate the policies with the personnel staff. All personnel policies should be flexible enough to offer sufficient scope for the developmental managers to meet different situations. The steps of formulating the personnel policy includes, 1. Fact finding: fact finding is usually a job delegated to the committee who through interviews and conferences collect data from inside and outside of the organization.

The facts should be dependable, diverse and qualitatively superb. When the investigation is over the committee proceed further in this matter. 2. Reporting Of Proposed Policy: Policy formulation committee shall report to the top management it’s considered opinions integrating the committee’s judgment and findings. The personnel manager plays a key role in this matter. He may be the principal spokesman of the committee. He should take adequate precautions to ensure correct timings and presentation of the report so that management finds it acceptable. 3.

Writing the proposal policy: Policies should be always in writing. There are two compelling reasons for it. Firstly, the policy will be vague unless it is written down. Secondly, if the policy is in writing, it will show what exactly the management means. Special skill is required to adhere to policy language which will state the synthesis principles, commitment for actions and scope for discretion. 4. Discussing the proposed policy: A proposed policy should always be discussed with the participation of those who use and live with the result it gives.

The discussion stage offers an opportunity to gauge the thoughts of the employees. Management can reasonably expect that those who have not testified against the proposed policy will abide by it. If a group of employees is not convinced, the management should examine their views in detail. Opportunity for upward communication should be given to the employees to respond constructively to the policy. 5. Adopting and launching the policy: Adopting and launching the policy rest on the top management who can decide whether the policy adequately represent the organizational objectives or not.

6. Communicating of policy: The issuance of formal personnel policy is limited by the management. The Personnel policy manual or handbook should be maintained by the personnel department on all policies and procedure of all personnel matters. Booklets on personnel policy giving important points of interest to employees should be issued. 7. Appraising the policy: Policy formulating committee consisting the representatives of management and their employees who are affected by a given policy decision can develop the experience to appraise its appropriateness and usefulness.

Any serious difficulty in overcome the new or revised policy should be reported to the top management along with the constructive suggestions. FACTORS INFLUENCING PERSONNEL POLICY The following factors will influence determining of personnel policies of an organization. 1. Law of the country: the various laws and labour legislation govern the various aspects of personnel matters, Policies should be conformity with the laws of the county. 2. Social values and customs: There are codes of behavior of any community which should be taken into account in framing policies. 3.

Management philosophy and values: Management cannot work together for any length of time without clear broad philosophy and set of values which influence their actions on matters concerning the workforce. 4. Stage of development: All changes such as size of operations, scale of technology, innovations, fluctuations in the composition of workforce, decentralization of authority and change in financial structure influence the adoption of personnel policies. 5. Financial position of the firm: The personnel policies cost money which will be reflected in the price of the product.

Because of this, prices set the absolute limit to organization’s personnel policies. 6. Union objectives and practices: How well employees are organized? What is their bargaining capacity? What are their pressure techniques? All these factors are responsible to personnel policy. 7. Type of workforce: The assessment of characteristics of workforce and what is acceptable to them is the responsibility of the effective personnel staff. CHARACTERISTICS OF PERSONNEL POLICIES

Personnel policies should possess the following characteristics: They should present the principle that will guide the organizations actions and reflect a faith in the ethical values of employees. They should be stated in the broadest possible terms so as to serve as a guide in practice now and in future. They should be formulated after taking the long range plans and needs of the organization. They should be flexible to cover a normal range of activity. They should be stable to produce excessive alterations. They must be developed with the active participation of the management and employees.

They should be definite so that it is easy to understand. They should be communicated in writing so as to remove any confusion. ADVANTAGES OF PERSONNEL POLICIES Personnel policies set up by the management for the following advantages: Helps managers at various levels of decision centers to act with confidence without the need for consulting the superiors every time. Ensures promote action for taking decision within the overall framework of the objectives of the organization whenever any situation arises. Provide a rational and continues system of achieving results through better control.

Clearly lies down liberate the management from their personal bias and self-interest. Ensures long term welfare of employees and makes good relation between management and workers. Makes the employees aware of where they stand in the organization and creates confidence in them. PHILOSOPHY OF STAFFING IN NURSING Nurse administrators of a hospital nursing department might adopt the following staffing philosophy; 1. Nurse administrators believe that it is possible to match employee’s knowledge and skills to patient care need in a manner that optimizes job satisfaction and acre quality. 2.

Nurse administrators believe that the technical and humanistic care needs of critically ill patients are so complex that all aspect of care should be provided by professional nurses. 3. Nurse administrators believe that the health teaching and rehabilitative needs of chronically ill patients are so complex that direct care for chronically ill should be provided by professional and technical nurses. 4. The nurse administrators believe that patient assessment, work qualification and job analysis should be used to determine the number of personnel in each category to be assigned to care for patients of each type.

5. Nurse administrators believe that a master staffing plan and policies to implement the plan in all units should be developed certainly by the nursing heads and staff of the hospital. 6. Nurse administrators believe that staffing plan should be administered at the unit levels by the head nurse, so that selected plan details, such as shifts start time, number of staff assigned on holidays, and number of employees assigned to each shifts can be modified to accommodate the unit work load and workflow. OBJECTIVES OF STAFFING IN NURSING 1.

Provide an all professional nurse staff in critical care units, operating rooms, labour and delivery units, and emergency room. 2. Provide sufficient staff to permit a 1:1 nurse patient ratio for each shift in every critical unit. 3. Staff the general medical, surgical, obstetrics and gynecology, pediatric units to achieve a 2:1 professional practical nursing ratio. 4. Provide sufficient nursing staff in general medical, surgical, obstetric, pediatric and psychiatric unit to permit a 1:5 nurse patient ratio on a day and afternoon shifts and 1:10 nurse patient ratio on night shifts.

5. Involve the heads of the nursing staff and all nursing personnel in designing the departments overall staffing programme. 6. Design a staffing pattern that specifies how many nursing personnel in each classification will be assigned to each nursing unit for each shift and how vacation and holiday time will be requested and scheduled. 7. Hold each head nurse responsible for translating the department master staffing plan to sequential eight weeks’ time schedules personnel assigned to her/his unit. 8. Post time schedules for all personnel’s at least eight weeks in advance.

9. Empower the head nurse to adjust work schedules for unit nursing personnel to remedy any staff excess or deficiency caused by census fluctuation or employee absence. 10. Inform each nursing employee that requests for specific vacation or holiday time will be honored within the limits imposed by patients care and labour contract requirements. 11. Reward employees for long term service by granting individuals special time requests on the bases of seniority. RECRUITMENT PROCESS Recruitment is a process of securing applicants to fill vacant positions.

It covers both the filling of new and replacement of previously established posts which fall vacant. Sources of recruitment In general, there are two sources of recruiting employees Internal External 1. Internal sources: Many organizations completely overlook the value of recruitments from within. It is not only reasonable but wise to let the existing employees know of vacancies by internal advertisement. But now it is being realized that the best source of supply for higher posts is the personnel already in the organization.

The existing talented employees may be given the adequate training to be eligible for promotion to higher positions in the organization has an advantage of stimulating and preparing possible transfer or promotion, increasing the moral of the employees and simplifying selection and placement problems. 2. External sources Any business undertaking has to go to external sources for lower entry jobs, for expansion and for positions whose specification cannot be met by the present employees. The commonly used outside sources are: Advertisement Employment exchanges Educational institutions

Recommendations Casual callers Labour contractors Employment STEPS IN RECRUITMENT PROCESS Recruitment has been described as the process of getting potential employees willing to apply for job or jobs in the organization. If recruitment is successful, several candidates will apply and out of these, the most suitable candidate will be selected. But this selection is not an easier process. It is a problem of matching a man to the job. Thus selection process involves choosing individuals who possess necessary skills, abilities and personality to specific jobs in the organization.

Thus, proper and thorough selection policy must be followed by the management. There must be definite selection procedure established for screening out the undesirable candidates. The following are the important steps involved in the satisfactory selection procedure. A. Preliminary interview B. Application blank C. Employment tests D. Employment interview E. Reference check F. Physical examination G. Final selection A. PRELIMINARY INTERVIEW The preliminary interview is generally quiet brief and has the object of eliminating the obviously unqualified or unsuitable candidates.

Lack of certain requirements in education, training or experience may determine unsuitability. Appearance, ability in communication, impression etc. of the candidates are quickly evaluated and the candidates salary requirements are obtained. If the applicant appears to have some chance of being selected, he is given the application blank to fill in. B. APPLICATION BLANK This is one of the important steps in hiring a man for the organization to get a written record of qualifications, experience or any other specialization of the candidate.

There is a high degree of similarity between the applications blanks of various organizations because of the basic information about the individuals to which all organizations give importance. Application blank is used to obtain information in the applicant own handwriting sufficient to properly identify him and to make tentative inferences regarding his suitability for employment. C. EMPLOYMENT TESTS The use of tests is perhaps, the most controversial of all personnel selection procedures. ADVANTAGES A test is an objective and standardized behavior sample, and tends to be less subject to bias.

Test can help to uncover talent that may otherwise be overlooked and also to differentiate between the ability required for the present job and those required by new once. A great deal of personal information about a person can be collected in a relatively short period of time using tests. Tests reduce the cost of selection and placement because large number of applicants can be evaluated within lesser period of time. Tests provide a healthy basis for comparing applicant’s background. DISADVANTAGES It measures only a part of the total amount of information needed to make an accurate selection.

Tests are sometimes cannot predict changes of success of an applicant because he was nervous. But this is valid only when the test results of the entire group are not valid. CLASSIFICATION OF TESTS It is possible to classify the tests that have been used in the selection of workers into the following categories. I. Intelligence test It is the test used to judge the mental capacity of an applicant. It measures the individual learning ability, ability to catch or understand instructions and also the ability to reason and make judgment.

There are various verbal as well as nonverbal intelligence tests designed by many psychologists for different jobs. II. Aptitude tests Aptitudes are the potentialities which the individuals have for learning the skill required to do a job quickly. Tests designed to measure such potentialities are called aptitude tests. Aptitude tests are one of the most promising indices for predicting workers success. Their continued use is assured because of the ever changing nature of occupations in an industrial society under continues fluctuations occurring in the labour market. III.

Trade tests Proficiency or trade tests are those tests which are designed to measure the skills already acquired by the individuals. These are also known as the performance tests. I. e. tests of level of knowledge and proficiency in certain skills about a particular job. IV. Motor tests Dotting- these tests emphasize speed and precision of movement. The individuals makes a single dot in each of a series of small squares or circles which are likely to be arranged in irregular order. Tapping- tapping tests are similar to dotting tests except that the emphasis is on speed alone.

Finger dexterity- the individual is requires picking up small pins and inserting them in holes. Complex reaction- these tests are frequently used with motor vehicle operators. In complex reactions several stimuli are presented serially to the individual and he must make differential response to them. D. EMPLOYMENT INTERVIEW Although application blanks, tests and group discussions provide much valuable information about the candidate, yet they do not provide the complete set of information, required of the applicant. Interview may be of great help in such cases.

Interview may be taken to secure much information about a candidate to enable the organization to know about the applicant and vice versa. Purpose To find out the suitability of the candidate To seek more information about the candidate To give the candidate an accurate picture of the job with details of terms and conditions and some idea of organization policies and employer employee relations. Limits Interview is an expensive device and sometimes, it is interpreted as having greater meaning and validity than is justified.

Interview can test only the personality of the candidate and not his skills and ability for the job. Interviewer many not be an expert and many not be in a position to extract maximum information from the candidate. It depends too much on the personal judgment of the interviewer which may not always be accurate. E. REFERENCE CHECK A referee is potentially an important source of information about a candidate’s personality if he holds a responsible position in some organization or has been the boss or employer of the candidate.

Prior to final selection, the prospective employer normally makes an investigation on the reference supplied by the applicant and undertakes more or less a thorough search into candidates past employment, education, personal reputation, financial condition, police record etc. F. PHYSICAL EXAMINATION The pre-employment physical examination or medical test of a candidate is an important step in the selection procedure. Objectives It serves to ascertain the applicant physical capabilities to meet the job requirement. It serves to protect the organizations against the unwarranted claims under workers compensation laws.

It helps to prevent communicable diseases entering the organization. G. FINAL SELECTION Based on all the above procedures, successful candidates fit for the job is selected and appointed to the job. INC (Indian Nursing council) The Indian Nursing Council is an Autonomous Body under the Government of India and was constituted by the Central Government under the Indian Nursing Council Act, 1947 of parliament. It was established in 1949 for the purpose of providing uniform standards in nursing education and reciprocity in nursing registration throughout the country.

Nurses registered in one state were not registered in another state before this time. The condition of mutual recognition by the state nurse’s registration councils, called reciprocity was possibly only if uniform standards of nursing education were maintained. FUNCTIONS OF INDIAN NURSING COUNCIL To establish and monitor a uniform standard of nursing education for nurses midwife, Auxiliary Nurse-Midwives and health visitors by doing inspection of the institutions. To recognize the qualifications under section 10(2)(4) of the Indian Nursing Council Act, 1947 for the purpose of registration and employment in India and abroad.

To give approval for registration of Indian and Foreign Nurses possessing foreign qualification under section 11(2) (a) of the Indian Nursing Council Act, 1947. To prescribe the syllabus & regulations for nursing programs. Power to withdraw the recognition of qualification under section 14 of the Act in case the institution fails to maintain its standards under Section 14 (1)(b) that an institution recognized by a State Council for the training of nurses, midwives, auxiliary nurse midwives or health visitors does not satisfy the requirements of the Council.

Sister/ANS for Emergency Unit depending on emergency casualty etc. the No. of beds OUT PATIENT DEPARTMENT-BASE ON ACTUAL OBSERVATION. NO OF STAFF Minor Operation Theatre 1 Staff Nurse for every 13 Patients Injection Room 1 Staff Nurse for every 86 patients Surgical 1 Staff Nurse for every 120 patients Medical 1 Staff Nurse for every 140 patients Gynac. 1 Staff Nurse for every 35 patients Children (Pediatric) 1 Staff Nurse for every 85 patients Orthopedic 1 Staff Nurse for every 120 patients Dental 1 Staff Nurse for every 120 patients ENT 1 Staff Nurse for every 120 patients Eye

1 Staff Nurse for every 86 patients Skin 1 Staff Nurse for every 100 patients Similarly other outpatient Department need to be staffed based on actual observation. JUSTIFICATIONS: 1) Needs may vary from hospital to hospital depending on the size of hospital and servicerendered more staff than anticipated will be required. 2) Special attention is needed for supervision of patient care on the evening and night shift. 30% leave reserve is suggested because nurses get 2 off, 30 Earned Leave and 12Casualleave/24 days off in a year. Also it has been observed that on any working day 25% ofthe staff on casual leave etc.

Differentiate intensity of care among definite classes Measure and quantify care to develop a management engineering standard. Match nursing resources to patient care requirement. Relate to time and effort spent on the associated activity. Be economical and convenient to report and use Be mutually exclusive, continuing new item under more than one unit. Be open to audit. Be understood by those who plan, schedule and control the work. Be individually standardized as to the procedure needed for accomplishment. Separate requirement for registered nurse from those of other staff. Purposes The system will establish

Discuss the usefulness of Dunning’s eclectic paradigm in helping us understand how firms internationalise research essay help: research essay help

Introduction: Dunning Eclectic paradigm was appeared in by J. H Dunning. After this journal published, dunning eclectic paradigm becomes the most influential theory in research of foreign direct investment (FDI) and multinational (MNE). It is used comprehensively to analysis the motivation and advantages of MNE in term of FDI. In the following essay, I am going to talk about the importance of MNE and the development of eclectic paradigm in order to have a brief background for the reader. After that, I will begin to discuss the usefulness of Dunning’s eclectic paradigm in helping us understanding how firms internationalise.

The importance of MNE MNE is acting a more and more important role in advancing globalization. According to world investment report, there are more than 60 thousands MNE in 1999. These MNE own around 500 thousands of branches which covered more than 160 countries. They have an extremely powerful influence for the global economic due to their super-large scale and capital. Lots of local company are trying to become one of the MNE but eventually more of them failed. The companies which fail to access the global market have not enough preparation and understanding of the global environment.

To deal with such problem, Dunning’s eclectic paradigm provides a clear and comprehensive analysis of MNE. These analysis helps the company understand what they needed if they want to become MNE. Development of eclectic paradigm In 1960, Stephan Hymer proposed Monopolistic Advantage Theory in his dissertation. He thinks market failure is the main reason of MNE carrying FDI. A foreign company own monopolistic advantage that other local company haven’t so the foreign company can run their business overseas and earn much more profit. C. P. Kindleberger, H.G Johnson, R. E. Caves and F. T. Knickerbocker keep completing and modifying this theory. However, it still can’t explain why some companies in developing country invest to developed country even they don’t have monopolistic advantage. In 1996, America economist R. Vernon in challenge Monopolistic Advantage Theory that can’t explain why the company must go through FDI but not licencing or exporting. He suggested that monopolistic advantage, product life cycle and location should be combined in order to look at a MNE. In 1976, P. J. Buckley and M.

Casson provide a new theory “Internalization” It stressed companies’ monopolistic advantages are not caused by market failure, but market failure assist the company to keep monopolistic advantages in their company. In 1981, J. H Dunning summarized all the theory above and created a new theory called dunning’s eclectic paradigm. The usefulness of Dunning’s eclectic paradigm Dunning’s eclectic paradigm concluded the previous academic’s theory and provide a detailed, comprehensive and clear analysis for people to understand how firm internationalise.

It clearly pointed out that a MNE must own ownership specific advantages, internalization advantage and location advantage. I will explain both of them in detail in the following essay. Also, the case of Lenovo will be used as an example to show how to understand firm’s internationalisation through Dunning’s eclectic paradigm. Ownership Advantage: This idea first brought up by Hymer in 1960. It becomes one of the basic contexts in Dunning’s eclectic paradigm. Ownership advantage can be called as monopolistic advantage or competitive advantage.

It means that a firm own some advantages over other company in the markets in which it is located or in which it is considering locating. It helps a foreign company gain a better power which the local company don’t have. These ownership advantages can be classified as two aspects. One is the advantages caused by a company occupying the intangible assets, such as patents, proprietary technology, trademark rights, copyright, land user and franchises. Another is caused by the economics of scale the company owned, which included technology and general innovative capacities, information, and managerial and entrepreneurial skills.

The ownership advantage can help people understand why a firm is going to have foreign direct investment. The reason why MNE willing to have FDI is because they got the ownership advantage but their local competitor doesn’t have which makes sure MNE can access the market and earn the profit they want. However, if a company only got the ownership advantage but not own location and internalization advantages as well, then they can only through licencing but not FDI. Here is the example of Lenovo. Lenovo is a Chinese brand, which internationalised since 2000. First of all, let’s take a look of the ownership advantage Lenovo owned..

As a high-tech product producer, Lenovo owned more than 1000 inventions with patent and it is keep investing in their R&D department. Besides that, Lenovo has modern production base in Beijing, Shanghai and Guangdong, which produce more than 5 million high-tech product each year. Also, the vice chairman and president of Lenovo Liu innovated the structure of company and combined with western managerial theory. The excellent product, well service and honest culture built up Lenovo’s wonderful brand image and it assisted Lenovo get the advantage in financing and crediting.

Therefore, we can analysis through dunning’s eclectic paradigm to conclude that Lenovo got the advantage in technology and general innovative capabilities advantage, managerial and entrepreneurial skills advantage and scale advantage. Lenovo owned the ownership advantages while other company lack of so they can access the foreign market and began to build up overseas R&D centre and recruit the talent overseas. As we saw, dunning’s eclectic paradigm help us to point out what kind of advantages Lenovo have and what are they rely on in order to access foreign market.

Internalization Advantage: Internalization advantage is another factors explained in dunning’s eclectic paradigm. It explains how the company use their ownership advantages. Most likely company will utilize their ownership advantages in two ways. One is selling their ownership advantages to other company which we can call it externalization. For example, Eastman Kodak Co sold their patent of digital imaging technology and earned $525 million in 2013. After they sold this patent, they are not longer to use it anymore, that what we called externalization.

However, what is internalization? Internalization means that the company use the ownership advantages themselves but not selling to others. Then, how will the company make decision between externalization and internalization? It depends on the profit they can earn and some other factors. In most of case, firm will prefer internalization when market failure or imperfection existing. Here are some reasons why company will internalize: (1). to prevent the outflow of technology advantages (2). to form the economics of scale (3). to escape foreign exchange control, traffic and tax .

These reasons support why company will choose internalization but not externalization because they can gain a greater profit through internalization. Let’s look at the case of Lenovo and see how they internalize. Lenovo wanted to access a country with high tariff and barrier. In order to overcome such market failure, Lenovo has to set up a company and branch in that country. It can actually escape the traffic and barrier when Lenovo sell their product. If Lenovo just export their product, the exporting cost will much more higher than they internalize.

Also, licence is a very dangerous way for the high-tech company like Lenovo. It is extremely easy to divulge their technology advantage and damage the profit of company. As we saw, dunning’s electric paradigm help us understand how a company use their ownership advantage and keep them in their own company. Location Advantage: Dunning’s eclectic paradigm help us understand where will a company going to invest. In order to internationalise, company have to choice which country they are going to invest. The country they are going to invest must own some advantages which their original country hasn’t.

When a company have ownership and internalization advantage, then they need to make a choice between domestic investment and FDI. It depends on which one can bring more profit to the company. Location advantages are specific to a particular country but are available to all firms, which can include natural resources, labour, society, domestic economics, geography, technology, culture, education, politics and transport. If these factors can benefit for a company and help them earn as much as they want, they will choice that country to invest. Location advantages can be classified as two types.

The first one is direct location advantages which the advantage owned by the targeting country, such as wider market, labour intensive and preferential investment policy. The second one is indirect location advantages which are caused by some unfavourable factors in the investing country and targeting country, such as high transportation cost or insurmountable trade barriers. For example, whenever Lenovo want to invest in a new country, they will analysis the environment of that country and look whether they can benefit through the environment or not.

This is a very important issue for the company to consider the environment of country. If they can utilize the benefit from the environment, most like they will success in that country. However, if a company ignore the importance of environment, it is a disaster and they will fail no matter how powerful they are. To conclude, location advantages determine whether the company is going to invest overseas or not and where they are going to invest. Four conditions: Dunning’s eclectic paradigm help us understand an MNE’s degree of foreign value-added activities depends on the satisfaction of the following four condition.

1. The degree to which a firm possess ownership advantages over other firms in a particular market. If a firm can own advantages greater than others, they will have more value-added activities. 2. The degree to which an MNE believes it is in its best interests to exploit its ownership advantages rather than sell them to another firm, perhaps in the form of technology licensing or franchising (the internalization factor). It means that if the firm believe that they can earn more profit through FDI than licensing, they will increase their value-added activities. 3.

The degree to which there are location-specific advantages of a particular country which raise the value of ownership advantages relative to elsewhere. A place can provide a greater benefit for the company’s ownership advantages, and then the company will invest more in that particular country. 4. The degree to which foreign production is consistent with the long-term strategy of the firm. If the firm is tracing for a long-term strategy, they will more care and stress about the foreign value-added activities. Diagram of dunning’s eclectic paradigm Ownership advantages Internalization advantages Location advantages FDI Yes Yes

Yes Export Yes Yes No Licence Yes No Yes In dunning’s eclectic paradigm, it stressed that a company must have both of three advantages in order to have FDI. A company rely on ownership advantages against the local company. Also, they choose a right environment which can benefit their business. Then they internalize their business into that country and expand their business. Therefore, only the company with ownership, internalization and location advantage can be called as MNE. When a company possess ownership and internalization advantages but lack of location advantage, they can only sell their product through exporting.

It means that they can only utilize their advantage domestically because they can’t find a suitable investment country. Also, if a company have ownership and location advantage but no internalization advantage, they will licence other company. Lacking of internalization advantage means that the company’s ownership advantage can’t be utilized within their own company and they have to sell or translate those advantages to others in order to earn profit. Meanwhile, a company with internalization and location advantages means that they lack of the most basic criterion to have FDI because ownership advantage is the precondition of FDI.

Limitation: Although dunning’s eclectic paradigm help us a lot in understanding how firm internationalize, some limitations still exist in this theory. Some academics criticize that eclectic paradigm is not dynamic enough to explain the changes in strategy by MNEs. Also, it has not a deep study in the connection between internal management and FDI. Besides that, dunning’s eclectic paradigm mainly concern the MNEs in developed country but not the company in developing country. These companies also have FDI but eclectic paradigm can’t have a detailed, scientific and comprehensive explanation for these firms.

Conclusion: Dunning’s eclectic paradigm summarize previous theory about firm’s internationalization and created a new way to analysis MNEs. It captured the essence of former and overcame the insufficient part of their theory, which dunning modified them into a comprehensive and understandable theory. The core concept of eclectic paradigm is ownership advantage, internalization advantage and location advantage. These three advantages help us to understand the ‘why’, the ‘where’ and the ‘how’ of the internationalization of production respectively.

Ownership advantage explained why company is going to have FDI and what they rely on in order to battle with other firm. Internalization advantage explained how the company keep their ownership advantage within own company. Location advantage explained which country can benefit for the business of company. However, dunning’s eclectic paradigm is a static and microscopic theory which limited the usefulness of this concept. Although dunning’s eclectic paradigm had such limitation, it doesn’t affect this theory become the most influential way in analysing company’s activity in FDI.

Philosophy of Nursing essay help app: essay help app

As a nurse in a long term acute care hospital (LTAC). A person to me is an individual, families, and communities in all ages and backgrounds that are in need of nursing care. A person is a sick patient in the hospital in need of nursing care to promote healing and maintain health. The patients are surrounded by their environment, internal and external.

Internal environment is their biophysiological self and their families while the external environment are things in the space that surrounds their physical present such as lightening, cleaningness, and temperature of their room, in addition to culture, religion, community, financial and health insurance needs. Environmental factors have a great influence in a patient’s health statue. Butts and Rich (pg 387, 2011). For example, a fairly independent patient that is unable to reach the call bell slid on a wet floor and breaks his hip.

Health is not the absent nor presence of a disease, but it is the absent of illness and a complete maintenance of the physical, mental, and social wellbeing. It is promoted and maintained by the nurse in a holistic manner. Health is when a patient is satisfied with his or her wellbeing, can manage those symptoms that exacerbate illness, and have the adaptive abilities to maintain health from the nurses support on health promotion education on managing those environmental factors that affect health. Butts and rich (2011).

Being a nurse is a call from God, and it is sometimes said, “Nurses have healing hands. ” Nursing profession is in existence as a requirement to provide care for humans. Caring is a beautiful art known to be the first step in the healing process. Butts and Rich (2011). That being said, it is the nurse’s responsibility to provide compassionate nursing care to patients, families, and communities of all kind in a non judgmental fashion. Separating their personal and professional values will help reinforce this belief.

Except in situations where personal values like, “ treat others the way you want to be treated” can help to enhance professional values. In all honesty, the nurse should view the patients as a whole, focusing on the physiological, psychological, and spirituality when providing a comprehensive data collection to treat and maintain wellness. Due to the fact that nurses decided to become a nurse, they are obligated to provide care base on the moral commitment as reflected by the Code of Ethics for Nursing. Butts and Rich (2011).

Masters defined nursing as, the “attention to the full range of human experiences and response to health and illness without restriction to a problem-focused orientation, integration of objective data with an understanding of the subjective experience of the patient, application of scientific knowledge to the process of diagnosis and treatment, and the provision of a caring relationship that facilitate health and healing. ” Nurses should be up to date with research and evidence base practice as stated in the in the scope of standard practice for nurses.

I am a registered nurse in a long term acute care hospital caring for patients on ventilator, tracheostomy, wounds care, sepsis and IV antibiotic therapy, diabetics on insulin drips, tube feeds, etc. I am a kind of nurse who doesn’t bit around the bush. When it comes to my professional responsibilities, my patients come first. Patients and families satisfaction is my number one priority. The patients are viewed through the holistic approach, addressing their mental, physical, and social needs.

And their healing is foster by applying compassion, help, listening, monitoring, mentoring, coaching, teaching, exploring, being present, supporting, touching, intuition, empathy, service, cultural competence, tolerance, acceptance, nurturing, and conflict resolution. Nursing: Scope of Standard of Practice. (2010). I do belief that satisfying the patients and their families results to a huge benefit in the advancement of their healing process. Satisfying patients begins by creating a trustful nurse-patient relationship. Trust has been related to better healthcare outcome. Brodsky-Israeli and Ganz (2010).

Regular rounding on patients to check on their basic needs, surroundings for safety, and immediate respond to their call lights decreases patient’s pain and anxiety, increases patients satisfaction and promotes healing. This has been proven to increased discharges, reduced length of stay and of cause reduced cost and readmission. Ciccu-Moore, R. et al (pg, 537, 2013). I do belief in teamwork. Working as a team in collaboration with other healthcare professionals speeds up a patient’s recovery period, and promote cost effective care. Healthcare has become one of the biggest business industries in our capitalist society.

Competition with one other is crucial among these organizations. Therefore, providing quality nursing care with the use of scientific and evidence base practice results to a better patient outcome, shorter hospitalization period which subsequently reduces healthcare cost, increased patient referral, as well as increase chances for returning to the organization in the future when needed. Milutinovic et al (2009). I do belief in rules and regulations. Abiding with the organization’s policy and procedures promotes patient’s wellness and also helps the organization to pass join commission inspection which will keep the organization running.

I believed in maintaining my professional commitment as a nurse to care for patients of all kind in reflection to the below statement from the Code of Ethics for Nurses; “The nurse respects the worth, dignity and rights of all human beings irrespective of the nature of the health problem. ” Lachman (pg, 114, 2000). The intensions of my professional values and beliefs are to promote cost effective quality nursing care, patient satisfaction, disease prevention and health maintenance, in addition to personal professional growth.

Patients comes first and view as a whole using the holistic approach to care for in collaboration with other health care professional to provide satisfaction. These philosophical ideas are related to Virginia Henderson in that she viewed a nurse’s role as stated “Assisting the individual, sick or well, in the performance of those activities contributing to health or its recovery (or to a peaceful death) that he will perform unaided if he had the necessary strength, will, or knowledge.

And to do this in such a way as to help him gain independence as rapidly as possible. ” Kearney-Nunnery (pg, 15, 205). She uses her fourteen component of nursing care for a comprehensive data collection in reflection to the holistic approach for the diagnosis and treatment of human responses to actual or potential health problems. Henderson integrated restorative, supportive, and promoting practices with an emphasize on patient independence as standing out. Butts and Rich.(pg, 394, 2011). Learning about philosophy, theory, and conceptual model is like a wakeup call for me, a reminder, influential, and motivational to continuously practicing my professional values and beliefs as stated above. This will not only be of great benefit to my patients, but also to healthcare organizations as to meet up with competitions. This will also give me a personal feeling of satisfaction, as well as respect for the nursing profession in the eyes of other disciplines.

What I do know is that, healthcare will continuously be a booming and competitive business in the future. Therefore satisfying the patients will always have a great impact in that competition. Fortunately, my beliefs will not change in that stand point. The fact that nurses will always be available to provide care to their patients as long as humans exist; I have made a decision to extend my nursing knowledge in advance to become an advance practice nurse. References

The Omega House Hospice cheap essay help: cheap essay help

This case study is based on a hospice by the name of Omega House. Due to financial distress, the Omega House was closed for several years. Thankfully, the Social Action Consortium (SAC) assumed responsibility for the Omega House; and it was able to reopen for those terminally ill patients who were in need of the best care during their remaining days. Ellen started off as a full-time nurse at Omega House who was deprived of sleep. Although the position as a nurse was exhausting, Ellen was able to go home from a day of work and leave any problems she had right there.

However, three years into working at Omega House, Ellen was given a temporary position as the program director there. As the program director at Omega House, Ellen took on the managerial responsibilities as well as clinical oversight of patient care. At the time of being given this position, Ellen had no managerial experience on her. When she agreed to the position, she also agreed to managerial training by the Social Action Consortium. Unfortunately, two years later with this “temporary” position still in tow, Ellen still awaits that training.

Luckily, Ellen had a strong clinical staff, a devoted kitchen crew, and a dedicated volunteer coordinator. The one thing Ellen always found herself discomforted taking on was her managerial duties when it came to her Social Action Consortium relations. Before the Social Action Consortium took responsibility of the Omega House, many employees remember the structured hospice; when mandated changes come about, these very employees are skeptical and tend to hesitate. However, they are left with no choice but to follow the orders of the Social Action Consortium.

Ellen took great concern about the Omega House’s financial history, which is why she thought George, Omega House’s new development officer, would be of great assistance to the hospice. George came with an expertise in professional fundraising, which obviously could be of great use to the Omega House considering they still suffered from financial distress. Ellen felt that since George had been hired with money from a development grant previously given to the Omega House, he should spend most of his time serving the needs of the Omega House.

However, that was not the case once Ellen decided to take interest in what George had been doing for the Omega House. Ellen found it difficult to completely trust George when she found out based on gossip that George’s past job history involved a personal indiscretion that had led to his termination with another employee. After learning from a fellow employee, Dan, that George comes into work at different hours every day, Ellen took it upon herself to confront George later on that day.

Moreover, Ellen felt that need for a talk when she came to an understanding that the numbers in fundraising efforts hardly changed from the last year. Being that Omega House employs George, these numbers need to be showing significant change. As Ellen went to approach George, she finds him at the photo copy machine making his own personal copies. Although he provided his own ream of paper, the three hundred copies were still costing Omega House. Even though Ellen does not enjoy putting on this tone, she felt the need to mention that very fact to him.

George was nice enough to offer a reimbursement for the copies. As they sat in the office to discuss George’s work for the Omega House, Ellen started by complimenting George on the “casino night” fundraising event that took place a week ago and went very well. Ellen felt the need to change the mood from the disciplinary one it was just in. George was supposed to be leading an internal committee formed by Ellen in order to advance fundraising tactics for Omega House. Lisa, the temporary intern, was taking on the leadership role more than George even attempted.

This was a problem considering George was assigned to Omega House for the purpose of raising money so Ellen can fulfill her facility needs. When Ellen asked George to participate more in the committee meetings, George said that he needed to focus his energy more on SAC’s needs rather than Omega House. At the end of the conversation, Ellen made it very clear that George’s salary comes out of Omega House and not SAC’s, hence he needs to reconsider where he’d like to invest his energies. Issues/Factors Issues at hand of this case study would be in regards to employees knowing their positions.

George, in my opinion, seems to think due to his expertise, attending those meetings and completing work-related duties at his workplace are unnecessary. Some may describe this behavior as arrogance, and I happen to agree with that. Furthermore, George is displaying more loyalty to the Social Action Consortium rather than to the actual workplace that provides his salary, Omega House. He also lacks respect when speaking to ones above him. Ellen clearly did not appreciate his tone when she approached him.

As an employee for Omega House and working under the orders of Ellen, George should not have the ability to question where his loyalty lies or whose orders he should be following. I feel that George thinks he was assigned to Omega House as a favor to Ellen and he doesn’t need to follow her orders. George has the idea that he only has do what the Social Action Consortium tells him versus what Ellen at Omega House orders him to do. In any workplace, ethics plays a hefty role. Knowing right from wrong is something George needs a better understanding of.

All in all, both insubordination and unclear loyalties are the problems. Furthermore, Ellen is still unsure of herself as a program director and the managerial functions that come with that title. In order to carry through her duties, including disciplinary ones, Ellen must have full confidence in herself. Despite walking into this position with no experience and no intentions on doing it for a long period of time, Ellen seems to be doing a fairly good job and should always remain rest assured of just that. Strategies/Recommendations

If I were in Ellen’s place, I would conduct an extensive meeting amongst myself, George, and Lisa. At this meeting, everyone’s position will be made crystal clear including me. George will grasp a better understanding of who pays him, what duties he must complete, as well as, what tone to use when speaking to those above him. Ellen did not approach him with an intention of disrespect, she just wanted to know why attending those committee meetings were not happening for George. He claims his energies needed to be more focused on the needs of the Social Action Consortium rather than Omega House.

George needs to understand that he was assigned to Omega House to help raise funds to facilitate needs of Omega House; if he cannot show improvement in numbers from the last year than he needs to step his game up. If attending those meetings has proven to be beneficial to Omega House’s financial aspect, then George should do so considering he’s the expert in fundraising. Lisa, the temporary intern, should not be attending those meetings as the leader. Lisa should also be aware of her duties and whose orders she should follow.

It’s great that she wants to take on a bigger role and it’s an even greater learning experience for her; however, because of that George does not display cooperation in these meetings. As for Ellen, Ellen needs to always be sure of herself and her managerial responsibilities. It seems that she is doing a pretty good job as the program director at Omega House, she should be confident. She knows where she stands in the business; she just has to reassure others of their positions every now and then. At the end of the meeting, neither harm nor disrespect should have been relayed to anyone.

If anything, everyone should have a clearer understanding of their positions at Omega House and what they should be contributing to the success of Omega House. Insubordination will no longer be tolerated. Unclear loyalties will now be crystal clear. Considering that George’s salary comes from Omega House’s budget, his time should be well invested into Omega House’s fundraising activities. Ellen has proven to be a good program director and should continue to do so. Conclusion I feel that meetings where everyone brings their issues to the table and contribute to finding ways to resolve them are always resourceful in a business.

Ellen needed to make sure George knew his place at Omega House and with a meeting she had the ability to do so. George had the ability to learn where he should focus his energies. Insubordination is defined as defiant of authority or disobedient to orders. That is exactly what George displayed to Ellen and Omega House. George being more concerned with fulfilling his duties for the Social Action Consortium rather than Omega House is an example of unclear loyalties. Insubordination and unclear loyalties were the issues at hand with George. Hopefully a meeting set out strictly for clarification helped in eliminating those issues for Ellen.

Essay on “Good People” medical school essay help: medical school essay help

What does it mean to be a good person? How can one respect oneself without hurting others? Are we able to judge whether a decision is wrong or right? Do we really know what love is? … Questions like these have always existed, but what happens when an author tries to comprehend the complexity of being ‘good people’? Is it possible to write about an issue like this? In David Foster Wallace’s short story “Good People” from 2007 we experience an attempt to do so. In the short story ”Good People” Wallace manages to reflect upon the complex discussion of what ‘good people’ are, as this is the main theme of the text.

To discuss this the story revolves around supporting themes of religious, existentialistic and ethical character. The religious theme is expressed in the discussion of abortion, in which the main character Lane at one point admits that “he did not know what to do”1 about this dilemma. The existentialistic theme is conveyed in Lane’s realization that he had not “once said it, avowed that he did love her”2. The ethical theme we meet in the dilemma of Lane discussing whether he is dishonest and respectful.

Admitting that “he could not say he did: it was not true3” that he loved her, Wallace creates a starting point for a discussion on ethics about honesty, respect and self-respect. The plot of the story consists of one long reflection in the mind of our main character, plot-wise known as an internal conflict. He reflects on the difficult situation, that he and his fiancee find themselves in, by creating imaginary conflicts between the two of them, while also circling around the supporting themes with relevance to the main theme.

The internal conflict of the main character, created as the basis of the plot, results in a plot driven by a non-chronological structure. Instead of unfolding the subject of the story linearly, the story moves forward in circles. Along with this it describes a development in the main character’s cognitive understanding of the issue. The plot on one side consists of a sporadic, incoherent and associating reflection on the main theme, and on the other side it deals with an on-going cognitive development.

One of the most remarkable proofs of this is expressed in the following quotation, where several different topics jump to Lane’s mind: “Two days before, he had awakened very early and tried to pray but could not. He was freezing … but he had not thought of his father … which had once filled him with such pity … Lane Dean, Jr. , felt sun on one arm as he pictured in his mind an image of himself on a train, waving mechanically to something that got smaller and smaller as the train pulled away. Sheri’s hair was colored … They’d sat here long enough that only their right side was shaded now.

He could look at her head, but not at her. Different parts of him felt unconnected to each other”4. In the above quotation we see how Lane’s thoughts sporadically differ between four different things in only eight lines. Together with this the quotation illustrates that the associations stresses this common feature of the plot of revolving on the main theme in this rather incoherent way. The statement saying “Different parts of him felt unconnected to each other” explicitly shows an actual realization in the cognitive development..

This two-sided aspect of the plot is reflected in the rest of the story in different ways; in the narrative technique and in the characters and their relations. Through the narrative technique we comprehend how Wallace elegantly portrays the main theme. Wallace uses a 3’rd person restricted narrator with the point of view placed on Lane, creating a subjective perspective on how the story unfolds. The strongly placed point of view creates a characteristic voice in the story.

The voice ultimately reminds one of a ‘stream of consciousness’-technique, which influences the story in general. The element of changing appellations stresses how the two kinds of processes are going on in the story; the associating way of reflecting along with the developing state of mind. The different use of how the main character titles himself from “Lane A. Dean, Jr. … Lane Dean, Jr. … Lane Dean … Lane”5 shows how he is mentally changing back and forth, emphasizing this circularly and non-linear reflection.

On the other hand the naming of Lane’s girlfriend, Sheri, shows a linear development from “his girlfriend … the girl … she … Sheri … Sheri Fisher”6. The way in which the girlfriend is named gives an impression of how the main character is developing his view of the girlfriend throughout the story. From an anonymous approach, ‘the girl’, to actually addressing her by her full name “Sheri Fisher”, This use of the narrative technique creates a stream of consciousness and creates an associating but yet authentic feeling – a feeling that enlightens the complex main theme of the story.

The construction of the characters and their relation is also important to the perception of the story. Given the fact that the story is told from the perspective of Lane, it is interesting that Sheri’s character is described in a flat and static way. The author makes a construction where we only understand Sheri through Lane’s view on her, and Lane ascribes her some specific but changing values through the story. In fact Sheri’s function is to be a mirror to the way Lane feels at a specific moment through the story.

Lane’s character on the other hand is dynamic and round as his internal conflict about defining what ‘good people’ are evolves through the story. What seems to be a conflict between the two characters in the plot is actually Lane’s internal conflict of being split. This appears when he gets a “vision or moment of grace”7 in which he suddenly feels the capability to see “into Sheri’s heart”8 although they “through all this frozen silence”9 had not shared a word with each other.

He verbalizes an imaginary reaction in the example that could possibly create a conflict, but really this conflict is an expression of Lane’s own internal conflict projected onto Sheri’s character.. Conclusively David Wallace has written a short story that in its form and content emphasizes the difficulties of understanding the complex problem of defining ‘good people’. Wallace creates an authentic, reliable and identifiable story through the characters and the narrative technique with its stream of consciousness,.

He creates a form, which with its associating feeling, comes close to resembling a complex dilemma from real life. Ultimately Wallace enlightens that neither the religious, existentialistic nor ethical aspect of the dilemma can stand alone when defining ‘good people’. In fact it is still extremely difficult to answer the question when considering all the aspects. In the end it stands clear that Wallace wants us to understand is that the answer to such a complex question lies in ourselves – every person has their own conclusion on issues like these.

Observation technique high school essay help: high school essay help

Checklists are lists of specific traits or behaviors arranged in logical order Check lists are especially useful for types of behavior or traits than can be easily and clearly specified Information from anecdotal and running records can be transferred to checklists to make interpretation easier Advantages 1. They are easy and quick to use; 2. Little training required; 3. They can be used in the presence of the child or recorded later; 4. Helps to focus observations on many behaviors at once; 5.

Can be used for curriculum planning; activities can be planned to encourage certain behaviors that have not yet been observed; 6. Can be used to condense information from running record or anecdotal records. Disadvantages 1. Not very detailed; 2. Little information about the context or sequence of events; 3. May miss important information not included on the checklist. 4. Notes if a behavior occurred but not how often it occurs or the duration of the behavior. Something that happens once may not be very meaningful. Target child observation

This form of observation is used in group settings to find out whether children are getting worthwhile experiences in the group. The child may be selected for a particular reason or at random. The child is observed for a concentrated period of time noting: ? The language they use ? How they interact with others ? What they are doing ? What materials they are using Particular attention should be paid to whether the child is being challenged by activities that make them think, work things out and whether they concentrate on activities.

To gain an accurate picture of a child’s development at a given time it is advisable to complete observations over a few days or a week. The observer must bear in mind that one isolated observation, even though it may reveal a surprising amount of information about a particular child, should never form the basis for reaching conclusions about a child’s ongoing development. If the practitioner wishes to get a full picture, they will need to collect a series of observations made at regular intervals over a period of time. Checklist Observation

A guide used for assessing a child on a particular day against a list of specific ‘milestones’that should be reached at a certain time. Checklists can be used on all children on aregular basis to enable you to plan for each child’s needs. Advantages • It is quick and simple to use. • It is a fast way of presenting a great deal of information. • It can be used as part of a Longitudinal study. • It can be regularly repeated to assess developmental progress. • Parents/carers can use it. • The guide can also be used on a group of children to find out more detail about thegroup. e. g. Gender differences-or show that there are none. Disadvantages • It may allow you narrow and limited information. • The checklist may not give a true picture on the day if the child is upset or unwell. • It may be tempting to put a tick against a skill you think a child has achievedtherefore you are not being objective and may disadvantage the child. Focus /Target Child Focus/target child is the observation of a particular child for a specific amount of time. Pre-coded categories are used to record what is being observed this technique is a good wayof collecting data.

Advantages • Focus/target one child, providing a collection of precise data over a period of time. • Information and data are easily accessible. • Demonstrates areas mostly used by the child in the setting. • Shows which area promotes conversation. Disadvantages • Information and data are limited. • More interesting information may be obtained but left out. • Codes have to be learnt by the observer, • The observer needs to focus on one particular child. • The observer needs to develop the skill to summarise precisely.

Studing is what matters argumentative essay help online: argumentative essay help online

Brain drain is also known as “The human capital flight”. It can be simply defined as the mass emigration of technically skilled people from one country to another country. Brain-drain can have many reasons, for example-political instability of a nation, lack of opportunities, health risks, personal conflicts etc. Brain-drain can also be named as “human capital flight” because it resembles the case of capital flight, in which mass migration of financial capital is involved. For the balance of power and for the staggered development of the world, it is very important to stop the phenomena of brain-drain.

This will help a particular country to use all local skilled citizens for development and proliferation. But to hold these skilled workers at their native places, it is also important to provide them enough work opportunities and living facilities. For this purpose, developed nations should help developing countries with necessary money and resources. So that each and every human of this planet can have good standard of living and each and every nation can introduce itself as a developed nation. ****

Brain drain (or human capital flight), is the large-scale emigration of a large group of individuals with technical skills or knowledge. The reasons usually include two aspects which respectively come from countries and individuals. In terms of countries, the reasons may be social environment (in source countries: lack of opportunities, political instability or oppression, economic depression, health risks, etc. ; in host countries: rich opportunities, political stability and freedom, developed economy, better living conditions, etc. ).

In terms of individual reasons, there are family influence (overseas relatives), and personal preference: preference for exploring, ambition for an improved career, etc. Although the term originally referred to technology workers leaving a nation, the meaning has broadened into: “the departure of educated or professional people from one country, economic sector, or field for another, usually for better pay or living conditions”. [1] Brain drain is usually regarded as an economic cost, since emigrants usually take with them the fraction of value of their training sponsored by the government or other organizations.

It is a parallel of capital flight, which refers to the same movement of financial capital. Brain drain is often associated with de-skilling of emigrants in their country of destination, while their country of emigration experiences the draining of skilled individuals. The term brain drain was coined by the Royal Society to describe the emigration of “scientists and technologists” to North America from post-war Europe. [2] Another source indicates that this term was first used in the United Kingdom to describe the influx of Indian scientist and engineers.

[3] The converse phenomenon is “brain gain”, which occurs when there is a large-scale immigration of technically qualified persons. There are also relevant phrases called “brain circulation” and “brain waste”. Brain drain is common among developing nations, such as the former colonies of Africa,[4] the island nations of the Caribbean,[5] and particularly in centralized economies such as former East Germany and the Soviet Union, where marketable skills were not financially rewarded #theme :technologiE

introduction: throught history technological innovations have helped humankind improve their standards of living,begining¬ with the simple invention of bonetools of prehistorie times,continuin¬g on to and beyond modern air conditioners,au¬tomobilies and super computers. nowad¬ays,when the rapideness of development and research is so imprssive ,it’s easy to think about the advantages of modern technology. .Nevertheless,t¬echnology can save lives and give us a lot of comfort provided that it doesn’t fall in the wrong hands. Yet,it’s blatantly conspicuous that the deleterious effects of technology out wrigh its benefits.

Teach¬ children self confidence+lear¬n them how to deal with certains obstacles ,how to defend him self+teach children how ti use their ineligence+faci¬lities researches communicatin+th¬e computer games are the best alternative to keep children safe at home ery good job also you can add this:To live, learn and work successfully in an increasingly complex and information-ric¬h society, students must use technology to Innovate, Collaborate, Investigate and Think Critically. Benefits*techno¬logy can save people’s lives*it shortens distances*it solves the problem of many childless parents*technol¬ogy improves other fields*the internet is a source on valuable information*tv makes the world look like a small village Understand that modern technology has benefited human beings by increasing production of goods and services, reducing the amount of labor needed to produce these goods and services, and providing higher living standards. – Understand that technology has also had negative effects on society—environ¬mental pollution,deple¬tion of natural resources, unemployment, and the creation of ethical dilemmas, among others.

Disadvantages*i¬t can teach violence*it can harm the eyes*it can cause pollution*cloni¬ng is perceived as smoothing immoral*childre¬n can be addicted to it*nuclear power and weapons destroy our world*machines can replace men at work characteristics of inventor ,, everyone dreams of being famous and remembered forever. some are known for their skills in inventing and designing new things to facilate humans life. in fact there ara many caracteristics required to be a seccessful inventor . first an inventor imagines , disigns and refers many times to previous results to build on tham, second inventors are determined to work intensively and at many time to earch a result. morever an inventor is commited to his work that is he dedicates his time , his mony as well as his effort to creating a useful appliance medicament or even an item of clothes ,, in this context ,, i may mention the work of alfred nobel who devoted his wealth to sponsoring students only to show that his invention was for the benifit of humanity. all in all we should encourag all the inventors and support tham.

•• Advantages and disadvantages of living in the country and in the city. There is a tendency in the modern society to abandon the country and to migrate to the city. More and more people, especially young and well educated, decide to live in large metropolises rather than in small towns or villages. The main factor that influences their decision is unemployment problem which is very acute in the country. The city offers many opportunities to young people. First of all, they can attend there the best universities and use the best learning resources which will allow them to develop their knowledge and skills.

Good educational background increases their chances to find employment in good companies which will offer them lucrative posts. People who are ambitious and want to be successful and pursue their careers find in the city many possibilities to realize their potential and to gain the best professional experience. Besides, large modern metropolises provide their inhabitants with limitless sources of entertainment. Young people can socialize in cafes, pubs, clubs or discos or take part in various cultural events, like for example concerts, art exhibitions or spectacles in the theatre.

Moreover, they can enjoy shopping in large shopping centres or department stores. All these charms and attractions of the city are appealing to young people, however when they start their own families they usually start missing peacefulness and tranquillity of country life. As they become older, people are tired with the hectic and stressful city life and often decide to move outside the city. However, country life, although more quiet and peaceful, has also disadvantages. ***Where shall we live? Some may choose to live in big cities, while other like the natural and quiet surroundings in the countryside.

As far as I am concerned, I would like to live in a big city because living in a big city has more advantages than living in the countryside. To begin with, the city is the symbol of human civilization and there are a many facilities for living, recreation and health care. Therefore, living there is more convenient than living in the countryside. Living in such a big city has a lot of advantages. There is a big offer how to spend free time. There are always plenty of social activities, sports events, concerts and other ways of entertainment.

There are more recreational places in big cities, such as opera houses, movie theatres, clubs, and swimming pools. You will have many kinds of entertainment in big cities, and meet many people. In countryside, however, the life may be dull and quite, and you may only have a few neighbors. In a big city, people can take the chances to study and work best. There are many good University choosing in a big city. There you can express your ability to study what you like. Moreover, when you graduate, you also find it easier to find chances to get a good job with good salary, that is quite difficult in small citiesor countrysides. On the other hand, there are some disadvantages of living in a big city. Cities are very crowded. Everywhere there are crowds: on the pavements and in the buses. What is more, the traffic is heavy and city’s car parks are always very full. Sometimes it is very difficult to get from a given place to another. It may take hours! And it follows to that, that the air in the city is more polluted, than in the countryside. People in the city are like ants. They are always in hurry, busy and out of time.

Roles and responsibilities of Human resource professionals college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help

?Roles and responsibilities of Human resource professionals Human resource professionals need to work together with line management in the management of the organisation’s human capital. The human resource professionals key responsibilities in this regard are to formulate and implement policy, advise and counsel, render a service, control personnel affairs, communicate, as well as be an employee advocate. Formulate and implement Policy: Human resource professionals draft policies and procedures relevant to the organisation’s people management.

Once accepted by management these policies and procedures then need to be implemented together with line management. The human resource department is responsible for monitoring the implementation of the HR policy by line departments. They also assist line management in the interpretation of the policies. Advise and Counsel: The human resource professional acts as an internal consultant to employees, supervisors, managers and executives.

Their knowledge of internal people management issues and the dynamics of the external environment allow the human resource professional to provide invaluable advice for the making of organisational decisions. Render a Service: Human resource professionals provide a range of services such as recruiting, selecting and training. The services offered by Human Resource should be directed towards facilitating the achievement of the organisation’s goals.

Control Personnel Affairs: The human resource professional monitors and controls the implementation of human resource related policies and procedures. Examples of control functions which human resource professionals perform include the following: Analysis of employment related data (example recruitment, training, promotion statistics) to identify the degree to which employment equity goals are being achieved. Analysis of data from performance appraisals for the purposes of determining whether performance management is being fairly conducted.

Analysis of absenteeism and grievances to determine problem areas. Communicate: Communication is critical to the effective functioning of any organisation, and human resource professionals play a critical role in the designing and implementing companywide communication strategies. Examples of types of communication methods which the human resource department facilitates are: New employee orientation Bulletin boards Communication meetings Newsletters

Employee handbooks Surveys Employee Advocate: An important responsibility of the human resource professional is to be an employee advocate. This involves actively listening to employee’s concerns and addressing these with management. In this way, human resource professionals can facilitate a greater fit between the employees and the organisation and in so doing promote employee satisfaction. Adapted from Mancosa Business Management 1B study guide pages 89 -91

Dr Pepper english essay help: english essay help

Inventing in coolers and vending machine. (Details to convince): In the United States, Dr Pepper Snapple Group does not have a complete network of bottlers and distributors, so the drink is sometimes bottled under contract by Coca-Cola or Pepsi bottlers. Currently, the majority of Pepsi and Coke bottlers bottling Dr Pepper are owned by PepsiCo and The Coca-Cola Company after their buyouts of their major bottlers.

Presently, Dr Pepper Snapple relies on its own bottling group to bottle and distribute its products in more than 30 states. And it is now also sold in Europe, Asia, Canada, Mexico, Australia,New Zealand (as an imported drink), South Africa (also as an imported drink), and South America. Dr Pepper’s company in US Promotion Free source of communication was achieved Secondary associations was also achieved Support of off-beat personalities, achieve cult-like status Use of real and natural communication means

Important of having spokesperson (Details to convince) :In the 1960s, Dr Pepper released the “Charge” ad The “Be a Pepper” series referred to fans of Dr Pepper as “Peppers”, and often featured crowd dance scenes with elaborate, over-the-top choreography. This became grist for a number of pop culture references and parodies. ( ph? n nay tui co down clip, khi nao lam powerpoint send sau cho) In the early 1960s, Dr Pepper promoted the idea of serving the drink hot with lemon slices in winter.

This idea appeared in the film Years later, another example is in the video game Pikmin 2, where one of the collectible treasures is a Dr Pepper bottle cap. Also, it appeared on the books. They also started an onpack promotion for free ringtones with up to 20 to collect. In 2010, Dr Pepper was part of a marketing/promotional campaign to promote the summer blockbuster Iron Man 2 In 2011, rapper Pitbull appeared in a commercial with the slogan “Let’s have a real good time. “

Parenting skills essay help: essay help

1) What role do you think discipline plays in developing a child’s self-esteem? What forms of discipline best serve the self-esteem of the child or adolescent? -the best self esteem comes from letting your child try reasonable challenges, helping just enough for them to see that they can succeed if they try , also I think discipline plays a vast role in developing a child’s self-esteem , it determines the way children collaborate with the public and theirs cause and effects to what may happen to the child depending on the way they were disciplined as a minor, such as knowing the difference from punishing and abusing a child.

Punishing a child too harshly can scar them for life and have them grow up with low self-esteem and not giving those enough punishments that they deserve might turn the child into a monster. The forms of discipline that best serves the self-esteem of a child might include boundary-based discipline, and emotion coaching. 2) List and discuss how activities, clubs, or sports, impact the self-esteem of children and parents. Provide at least two activities, clubs, or sports in your answer. -Children that participate in sports, clubs, etc. are more likely to have a high self-esteem because self-esteem partially comes from accomplishments and success and when children succeed in the sports and clubs that they are devoted in will give them that satisfactory that they have been striving and working hard for , Such as basketball players working hard on different techniques on how to win a game, that takes time, effort, and determination also , Being involved in a debate club also gives you that boost of excitement knowing that whatever your thinking is being heard and your knowledge is being shared with those who are present, after winning versus someone else gives you that high self-esteem, because you’ve just accomplished a great self-achievement .

Language Essay devry tutorcom essay help: devry tutorcom essay help

Most professions or trades use language specific to that line of work. In the workplace of psychiatrists, psychologists, and therapists, there is a specific language used in assessing, diagnosing, and treating clients and patients. I have come to be familiar with this as my mother is a therapist and we have talked about her work and diagnosing people with a variety of mental health disorders. The problem with such language and expressing that language in a book like the DSM (Diagnostic and Statistical Manual) is that it can be used against people in a way that is not healing but harmful and something that very often too few people consider.

This language is sometimes used to take very human and real and normal life situations, like bereavement and trauma and sadness and anxiety, and somehow attach a medical diagnosis to them. And, of course, if there is a medical diagnosis, than there must be an accompanying treatment or cure for a cost. According to Philip Hickey in his article entitled, “Behaviorism and Mental Health” (2011) in 1952, homosexuality was listed in the DSM as a sociopathic personality disturbance and according to the American Psychiatric Association homosexuality was a mental illness up until 1974.

Neil Postman states in his essay The Word Weavers/The World Makers, “By naming an event and categorizing it as a “thing”, we create a vivid and more or less permanent map of what the world is like. ” (853) That is what happened in the world of psychology and psychiatry regarding homosexual behavior. The American Psychiatric Association agreed that this “thing”, homosexuality, is an illness and we are Page 1 attaching a name to it: sociopathic personality disorder. It suddenly becomes something very different by the use of those three words, something more frightening and more dangerous sounding according to Hickey (2011).

The language of psychiatry, defining a person’s behaviors and feelings and thoughts, and attributing to certain collections of these behaviors, feelings, and thoughts, a mental illness can be dangerous when not used with extreme care. How many people underwent intensive and costly therapy to “cure” their homosexuality and how many felt intense guilt and self-loathing? How much pain was caused and harm done in a profession whose first oath is to do no harm? Homosexuality is just one example of that.

Not to mention the fact that suddenly after 1974, homosexuality was not a mental disorder anymore. Were homosexuals suddenly “cured”? Of course not. A group of people who believed that their feelings, thoughts, and behaviors were not indicative of illness, gay rights groups, protested and brought enough pressure to bear that language was changed and, slowly, so were attitudes and beliefs. This year an up-dated edition of the DSM-5 was published. This manual lists the symptoms and names of the mental health disorders diagnosed and treated in this country.

Prior to this year the DSM-IV included the term Mental Retardation to describe people whose intellectual functioning fell below a certain pre-determined set standard. That term is now excluded and no longer used as it is considered hurtful and offensive. Why? Because a term that originally was used clinically as a short cut and more descriptive term for professional purposes became something used to insult people and put people down. As stated by John Grohol in “The Dangers of Diagnosis” (1996) the language and the term became harmful, not healing.

These professionals use terms like bi-polar, schizophrenia, depression, and others to quickly communicate to others who are familiar with the language. But often those short cut terms are used in hurtful ways or are simply misunderstood and used incorrectly. Page 2 Proponents of the DSM argue that one of the many reasons to use such specialized language is to have a short cut in discussing topics related to the work and as a tool to allow professionals to have a common understanding and clarity in the work.

Grohol (1996) states in “The Dangers of Diagnosis” it is needed in speaking to other professionals and it is needed to access the system of insurance and managed care. The language helps to communicate efficiently and effectively and the professionals who speak that language can move through the work more quickly and, at the same time, often get paid because it has become what not only the psychiatric and psychological businesses use, but also what insurance companies have come to use in way of what they will or will not pay.

The power to define is great and it should be used carefully, cautiously. Postman states, “For the point is that in every situation, including this one, someone (or some group) has a decisive power of definition. In fact, to have power means to be able to define and to make it stick” (837). The other power is that these labels and this language is used to access insurance and money that, without the labels, is otherwise withheld from people. Insurance companies will pay for certain conditions and not others.

They take the language and the list of symptoms and decide what is worth paying for and what is not. There is danger in that because someone could be labeled or diagnosed simply because it is the thing that the insurance company will pay for. Just because a small group of people have this ability to label behaviors and feelings and thoughts as certain “things”, does not mean the people in the field must use these terms or get so use to using these short cut terms that humanity in the field of psychiatry and psychology is lost or forgotten.

As Judith Butler states in Undoing Gender, “…relations of power that circumscribe in advance what will and will not count as truth, which order the world in certain regular and regulatable ways, and which we come Page 3 to accept as the given field of knowledge” (743). We are complicated, complex human beings experiencing a variety of wonderful and terrible things throughout our lives. Sometimes forgetting the labels and the short cuts and taking the time to focus on the person and what their unique experience is could be a way to improve the process.

As the reading states, our control of language aids in our perception of the world. We use language to bring what we see under control and make the complexities of the experience manageable. This is what diagnostic language is used to do. According to Grohol in “The Dangers of Diagnosis” (1996) some diagnosis are needed so that two professionals do not sit across from one another and recount fifteen types of behavior and thoughts when two words, for instance, paranoid schizophrenic, would do.

However, maybe what is needed is more conversations about those symptoms and what they mean. In a world where there is less time and more demands than ever, the answer to some of this might be to slow down and have conversations with colleagues about what patients are experiencing and perhaps bringing some of that power to bear over insurance companies. These days and in conjunction with the new Obamacare legislation that power could somehow be used so that mental health issues are covered in their entirety.

Because of the way language is used clinically some people do not seek treatment because of the fear that somewhere a diagnosis will be put on them that will follow them the rest of their lives. Clinical language is meant for helping professionals in their work not to stick someone with a label that will follow them wherever they go and maybe, unnecessarily restrict them in the future from doing things or holding certain jobs. The point of clinical language is to help the clinicians and doctors, not burden the patient with a label when they are already suffering with a mental health challenge. Page 4

Research Paper on PTSD assignment help sydney: assignment help sydney

Post Traumatic Stress Disorder(PTSD) is a disorder that occurs in people who have suffered through a traumatic event. Such as sexual abuse, natural disasters, war, etc. These people then go through three different types of symptoms; the first is called re-experiencing where they relive the event through nightmares, flashbacks and bad thoughts.

Then there’s the second set of symptoms which are called avoidance symptoms where they do things like avoiding an area where the event occurred or somewhere that reminds them of that event, getting a strong sense of guilt, depression, worry or becoming emotionally numb, not being able to remember the event or losing interest in things that they once enjoyed doing. Then there is the third set of symptoms called hyperarousal symptoms which include having angry outbursts, trouble sleeping, being easily startled and feeling on edge(“Post Traumatic Stress Disorder” 1).

PTSD can occur in anyone and it is something that is becoming a major disorder in today’s society with the Iraq/Afghanistan wars that have been going on since 2001. There has been a lot of research done on it to prove that PTSD is actually real and that it is affecting more and more people, especially war veterans, and going untreated. Review of Research: There was an experiment that was done by 7 doctors who have M. D. s and Ph. Ds. They did a random, controlled experiment on a small group of active service members with the goal of comparing which treatment for PTSD has better results, TAU or VR-GET.

The experiment procedures were approved by the Institutional Review Board and an independent medical monitor. It was conducted at U. S. Navy medical facilities in San Diego and Camp Pendleton and followed all federal and military guidelines in the treatment of Service Members and research participants(McLay 224). The experiments and patients both were aware of what was going on in the experiment, had to sign consent forms that said they were allowed to leave at any time knowing that they would not receive active duty pay and that they were participating willingly and then the patients signed up for VR-GET or TAU and there was an equal amount of patients in each type of treatment(McLay 224). The abbreviation TAU means treatment as usual which means that the service members go through normal treatments for PTSD like prolonged exposure, cognitive processing therapy, Eye Movement Desensitization and Reprocessing, substance rehab, inpatient services or a combination of them(McLay 225). And the abbreviation VR-GET means Virtual Reality-Graded Exposure Therapy which is as it sounds.

It is a virtual reality simulation that allows the patient to experience their traumas and phobias in a controlled environment and also be monitored by equipment that measures their response to their surroundings in the virtual reality they’re experiencing. The therapist during this VR simulation can also increase or decrease the stressing factors of the environment based off the patient’s response to what they’re experiencing(McLay 223). The experimenters hypothesized that “patients with combat-related PTSD would be more likely to experience clinically significant improvements in VR-GET than treatment as usual(TAU)(McLay 224).

” To participate in the experiment the patients had to have CAPS scores of 40 or higher and then their medical records were reviewed. CAPS is the Clinician Administered PTSD Scale. The experiment was conducted over a 10 week period with a follow up assessment 10 weeks after the experiment ended and it was considered a success if the it showed a clinically meaningful improvement, which means 30% or greater, reduction of PTSD symptoms with CAPS(McLay 224).

They then went through their experiments and were assessed after the 10 week period. The results showed that of all 10 participants who had participated in the VR-GET, seven of them showed a 30% or greater improvement in CAPS and of the 10 who participated in the TAU treatment only one of the returning nine showed a 30% or greater improvement on the CAPS (1 did not show up to complete the post assessment until later)(McLay 226). The results show that the VR-GET treatment works better than the TAU treatment by a significant amount.

Though the researchers said that this should also be based off the patient’s needs since everyone responds to treatments differently and that there will probably be no “one-size-fits-all approach” due to the fact previously stated. A research team of 5 that conducted a PTSD survey on soldiers with amputated limbs or spinal injuries in a rehabilitation facility in Sri Lanka. The treatment for soldiers in the war in Sri Lanka is more physically based then mentally and it is a known fact that there is a higher risk of PTSD in soldiers who have been in battle(Abeyasinghe 377).

PTSD is prevalent in about 30% of war veterans, male and female both( Abeyasinghe 377). The study was one of the first done in Sri Lanka since no one has thought to do it previously and was carried out in 2009. They used a questionnaire that was based on the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders; the questionnaire was made based on the Impact of Event Scale and PTSD symptom scale(Abeyasinghe 377). The questionnaire was translated into Sinhala and it was pre-tested in other injury groups and then from that, they refined the questionnaire to fit their needs and gave that to the spinal injuries and amputees(Abeyasinghe 377).

The research they did was a cross sectional study, which means that they used different people who had similar interests to the study, and then got willing participants to take part in the research. The results showed that of the 96 participants, 40 of them indicated a diagnosis of PTSD(Abeyasinghe 378). That means that 41. 7% of participants were diagnosed with PTSD and are not being treated for it and would not be if they had not taken the survey to find out.

They did this study with Vietnam veterans and soldiers who went to Afghanistan and found that 30% of those soldiers also had PTSD and were not being treated for it until afterwards also(McLay 379). This study shows that even though we give our soldiers the medical attention they need, they are not getting all of it and that should be fixed. There was an experiment done about the medical research done on twins, combat exposed and non-combat exposed, along with comparing previous studies of PTSD to their medical research. They used PTSD patients and a control group.

For the twins they are using the ones who have PTSD and the ones who do not and then comparing their MRIs(Pitman 772). The MRIs show that the combat exposed twin who has PTSD have an enlarged hippocampal area and that the combat unexposed twin had a high risk factor for PTSD because the twin had PTSD. Their hippocampal area was also enlarged when compared to the control twins who had no PTSD and a low risk factor(Pitman 772). The article goes through every part of the brain and compares the scans of the combat exposed and combat unexposed twin groups, control and experimental, comparing the area of study, like the prefrontal cortex.

They used previous neuroimaging literature that stated that the prefrontal cortex reduces in size with PTSD and did sMRIs to find that patients with PTSD had a reduced volume in their rostral(pregenual) vmPFC and in the dorsal anterior cingulate cortex(dACC). Which is the area of the brain that corresponds to Brodmann area and can also be called anterior mid-cingulate cortex(Pitman 772-773). It goes through every biological aspect you could think of and speculates off of the research previously done to the medical tests they have conducted to show how PTSD affects the brain, hormones, genes, and animal studies.

Then their conclusions at the end to tell you how this will help future medical treatments of PTSD. There was a study done about how the medical drugs that have been developed for PTSD are very lacking in the ability to help PTSD patients. Records show that patients who receive pharmacological treatments like SSRIs paroxetine and sertraline barely ever exceed 60% and even less patients(20-30%) achieve clinical remission(Bailey 221).

Even placebo-trials of other medications for PTSD have failed and recent studies of medications that are approved have failed to show desired results in patients(Pitman 222). The article is basically going over the effects of the drugs that are usually used to treat PTSD like noradrenergic, serotonergic, endogenous cannabinoid and opioid systems along with hypothalamic-pituitary adrenal (HPA) axis and then from figuring out what works with these and what does not, a possible future pharmacological intervention that could actually work and show results(Pitman 222).

They then go into detail of each drug, explaining what it is made up of and how it does and does not work in relation to PTSD, including studies that have been done previously, charts, references to other works and explanations for the large words and confusing terminology. The conclusion of the article states that biological markers alone are not sufficient by themselves, especially since treatment is limited to symptom management rather than fixing the biological cause(Pitman 227).

Since there is not one drug that works specifically for PTSD, by using existing knowledge and research they can come up with treatments that relate to PTSD(Pitman 227). To conclude, there is a lot of research done on PTSD, statistics, experiments, biological aspects, pathophysiological aspects and so much more.

PTSD is a very new field of study in medicine and it is not known where it comes from exactly, whether its genes or just the body’s coping mechanism for events to stressful for the mind but either way it is something that is increasing in the world’s population with wars, natural disasters, physical/sexual abuses, etc. and it needs to be addressed. More and more people are suffering without a way to fix it and it is taking a toll on the mental health of the population. Works Cited

Range of early years settings academic essay help: academic essay help

*Mother and toddler group-this is a place where toddlers can socialise with other children of their own age whilst the mother and father can stay,play and learn more ways to look after and help with their childs development *Pre school-Is a private nursery,one that is paid for by the parents and children from 3 years can get 15 hours free a week by the goverment. They do not do compulsory hours and the child does not have a primary school place already.

Some children may go to a school nursery in the morning and a private nursery in the afternoon. Day care-Day care is for children of different ages from 3 months to 5 years,they have a different classes for different ages. The parents can drop their child off and pick them up when they wish. Some parents may only take their child for a couple of hours a day so that their child socalises and interact with children of their own age.

Creche-This is a drop in centre style childcare parents dont have to pay a monthly fee they only pay for the service when they need. Creches are located in different places ie gym,shopping centre church. *Reception-is a class is the first stage of infants school *Child minders are there to help parents who work long hours they pick or drop the child off to school or home *Childrens centre/Sure start centre are in place to help parents with all sorts of issues ie help with parenting,provide childcare and do courses for parents.

Analysis of an Artwork: Vanitas by Jean de Valdes Leal write my essay help: write my essay help

Introduction There are many works of art that focus on the materialistic aspect of mankind, as well as life and death. However, few works merge these themes together seamlessly into one, in a way that makes sense and seems effortless. Vanitas by Juan de Valdes Leal (Getlein, 15) is a work that achieves the combination of the materialistic theme with the theme of life and death. Leal is able to illustrate elements concerning both the fleeting moment of life along with the subsequent uselessness of materialistic possessions within one’s lifetime. Vanitas is an oil painting composed by Juan de Valdes Leal, in 1660.

The work currently resides in the Wadsworth Atheneum in Hartford, Connecticut. Formal Analysis of Artwork Vanitas offers two conceptually unified themes. One theme is the combination of materialistic objects and the things that mankind seeks after to ‘complete their life’. The second theme suggests the passage of time. The unity of the materialistic theme is accomplished through the grouping of materialistic objects such as wealth, knowledge, and power through such items as collection of wealth, books to impart knowledge, and crowns and scepter showing authority.

While, the illustration of passing time is signified by the pocket watch, sundial, a diagram of the passing of seasons, and a skull, which represents death. The work is unified by the use of an earth tone color palate; in shades of red, black, beige, and ochre. Due to this color palate, there is an antique feel to the work. This theme is further suggested by the collection of some things that seem like artifacts, such as the candlestick, a globe, crowns and scepter, as well as the painting of The Last Judgment partially hidden behind the curtain.

Our eyes are directed through this work in two ways, the first, and most obvious, is the use of color and light. Our eyes are drawn to begin in the lower right of the work. First we see the coins, candlestick, and jewels; then our eyes are pulled along to the left and upward in the painting by the lightness of the flowers and books, on to the globe, things of the earth and knowledge. Finally we are drawn up to the painting of The Last Judgment and the suggestion of moving toward heaven.

Another way we are guided through this work is through the use of lines. I found that the lines in this work were more implied lines, a specific example would be the man standing in the background pointing. The hand he is gesturing to the painting with is blurred. The blurred line of his pointing arm appears a suggested line, but the hand he is holding the curtain back with is focused and appears to be pointing up to the heavens. This further solidifies the theory that we are being drawn up to the heavens.

The colors that are used to draw our eyes through the painting give us the impression of light, otherwise known as illusionistic light. This technique of creating the impression of light is done with the utilization of lighter colors. In this particular painting the base is light and you are drawn up into the darkness of the top of the painting. Another principle of design found in Vanitas is asymmetrical balance. There is balance at the bottom of the work between light and dark.

However, as you travel to the top of the work the large, visually heavy painting on the left side is in stark contrast to the empty space on the right side. This is due to the texture in the form of the painting on the left side as compared to the simple man and dark space behind him on the right side. We are also faced with the visual weight of the work. When the visual weight of a work is seen as distributed throughout with balance, then we understand the work to be visually balanced.

This work seems bottom heavy because there is more light and texture at the bottom of the painting, than throughout the top portion of the work. This might be off putting, but the introduction of bigger blocks of color in the top, and the visually heavy feeling of the darkness, lends to a feeling of the opposition between the foreground and background. This is an element that lends a feeling of balance front to back, as opposed to top to bottom. It feels visually balanced as far as working with scale and proportion.

Another view of scale and proportion can be seen in the way that Leal uses hierarchical scale to illustrate how the things of the earth are less important than what happens in the afterlife. He does this by showing all the possessions one desires of the world such as money, power, and knowledge. As you take in the materialistic things of the world, you are then led up to the top portion of the work where we are shown religious concepts such as the Last Judgment.

Overall, I felt this work was engaging in its subject matter, interesting in the depiction of themes, and visually pleasing through its color palate use. The elements of light and dark, as well as color and balance work, together well to make this painting flow in its presentation of the themes at hand. Through the use of these principles Leal was able to tie in the themes of life and death with the theme of the pursuit of materialistic rewards, and how they should be counterbalanced against higher thinking and religious principles.

Discuss the Images In Sympathy That Reveal The Pain Of Slavery aqa unit 5 biology synoptic essay help: aqa unit 5 biology synoptic essay help

When the wind stirs soft through the springing grass, Alliteration used twice using the letters W and S. I know why the caged bird beats his wing Till its blood is red on the cruel bars The poet is using imagery and a rather painful one by describing the bars of the cage covered with the bird’s red blood which is describe the struggle the bird is going through to be free. For he must fly back to his perch and cling When he fain would be on the bough a-swing

The poet describing why he must get out the bird must fly back to where he belongs to the tree branch where he will be happy and he will start swinging on the branch. And a pain still throbs in the old , old scars And they pulse again with a keener sting I know why he beats his wing! The poet tells us that it is not the first time that he beats his wings against the bars, Because there is pain pounds in his old scares. When his wing is bruised and his bosom sore, When he beats his bars and he would be free The poet uses alliterations here with the letters w and b.

He wants the reader to pay more attention to what the bird is going through and the fact that his wing his bruised when he beats the bars trying to be free. It is not a carol of joy or glee, But a prayer that he sends from his heart’s deep core, But a plea, that upward to heaven he flings A metaphor is used to describe the imprisoned bird which is comparing him with a human being that prays and unlike every other bird he does not sing he prays from his heart and requests for freedom and this metaphor is used to show how strongly the bird feels about wanting and needing his freedom.

Literary Criticism of The Namesake essay help writer: essay help writer

Allusions to Nikolai V. Gogol and his short story “The Overcoat” permeate Jhumpa Lahiri’s novel The Namesake, beginning with Gogol’s being the name the protagonist is called through most of the book. Yet few of the reviewers of the novel mentioned Nikolai Gogol at all in their discussions of the novel, except to describe the protagonist Gogol’s loathing of his name, or to quote without comment or explanation Dostoevski’s famous line, “We all came out of Gogol’s Overcoat.

” So far, no one has looked beyond the surfaces to examine the significance of the allusions to Gogol that are so much a part of the fabric of Lahiri’s novel. Without the references to Nikolai Gogol, it is easy to read the novel as simply another account of the difficulties of a first-generation American trying to “find himself,” nicely written, but not particularly thought-provoking. It may seem merely unexamined documentation of the confusion of its main character, a confusion which itself has become a bit of a cliche.

The conventional wisdom about first generation Asian Americans is that an awareness of two cultures is a kind of curse which makes them unable to understand who they “really” are, as if identity were nothing more than cultural identification. Read with an understanding of the significance of the Gogol story, however, the novel is much more clearly an elucidation of the causes and meaning of that confusion, which comes not only from having a multiple cultural identity, but from some of the ways in which people in modern American society tend to view identity.

In particular, the allusions to Gogol, along with the motif of naming and Lahiri’s own unique literary style, seem to suggest that some of the characters’ unnecessary unhappiness arises from the tendency to identify oneself with the aspects of selfhood that William James called the material self, one’s surroundings, clothing, food, and possessions, and the social self, the loves and friendships that surround us. Furthermore, in a mobile society like modern America, unfortunately, the relationships of the social self are apt to be transitory, which seems to be part of the protagonist’s problems in The Namesake.

In addition, although James includes the immediate family as part of the material self, the protagonist does not seem to realize the extent to which this is true until too late, which is also not uncommon. In any case, what is often left underdeveloped is the essential self, the organizing consciousness that strives to understand the meaning and patterns of the events of one’s life in this world, that searches for continuity, or that seeks a way to make peace with the irrational.

At first it seems that neither the hapless Akaky Akakyvitch of Gogol’s story nor his eccentric creator can have anything in common with the bright, handsome, conforming Gogol Ganguli of Lahiri’s novel, or this fantastic, grotesque, and very Russian nineteenth-century short story with the seemingly realistic novel about a twentieth-century Indian-American’s search for an identity in American society. Nevertheless, “The Overcoat” is about identity, among other things.

The protagonist’s name, Akaky Akakyevitch, suggests a contradictory identity in itself, being a saint’s name and yet sounding like a Russian baby-talk word for feces; and of course the name is also simply a repetition of his father’s name. Akaky is a non-entity. A scrivener, he delights in copying out other people’s writing, and yet is strangely unable and unwilling to try to write anything of his own, or even to change a word in the original text when he is specifically asked to.

As a text, he isn’t anyone; he is simply copies of what is written by others. But this copying is bliss. His very lack of identity is the source of his happiness. This changes when is obliged to buy a new overcoat, a costly overcoat, and becomes another person. Or rather, he becomes his overcoat. He and his new overcoat are even invited to a party in its honor by the assistant head clerk of his department. He becomes a new man, noticing women, for instance, when before he would forget where he was while crossing the street.

As he is coming back from this uncharacteristic outing, his overcoat is stolen. When he reports the loss to a local dignitary (on his co-workers’ advice–no idea is his own), he is bullied and insulted for his temerity in approaching such an important person. Tellingly, the Very Important Person demands, “Do you realize, sir, who you are talking to? ” (Gogol 263), as if he didn’t know who he was himself, without its being reconfirmed by other’s fear of him.

Exposed to the cold once again, the overcoatless Akaky then catches a fever and dies, but this is not the end of the story. Shortly after Akaky’s death, a “living corpse” who looks like Akaky begins haunting the same square in which Akaky was robbed, but this time as a stealer of overcoats rather than as a victim. One of this Akaky’s victims is the same Very Important Person who bullied him, who had been mildly regretting his harshness, and who is now frightened into real repentance.

The last we hear of Akaky and his ghost is when a policeman sees a burly man whom he takes to be the ghostly overcoat thief, accosts him, and finds instead a man who is clearly not Akaky, but may be the original thief who robbed him. It’s a strange story, suggesting very non-American ideas about identity and the undesirability of having a fixed identity. The overcoat that Akaky buys at such cost seems to be both the material self and the social self, both of which he previously lacked, and which he then mistakes for who he is.

Vladimir Nabokov even suggests that for Akaky, the coat is like a mistress or a wife–some one/thing that defines him as a normal member of society and yet paradoxically causes him to lose his essential self. One can read the story as a kind of parable about identity theft and shifting identities, in which Akaky goes from being no-one, to being an overcoat, to being a ghost, and finally to being, perhaps, a version of the very person who robbed him, or at least into something that can be mistaken for him.

Charles Bernheimer has suggested that the story reflects Nikolai Gogol’s own horror of having a fixed identity. One of the reasons that Gogol was unable to finish Dead Souls, Bernheimer says, was that “for Gogol to write The Book would be equivalent to a fixing of his personality, an act of definition that would subject his secret soul to understanding, to penetration and violation by the other” (54). Richard Moore suggests as well that Akaky’s copying is parallel to Gogol’s own writing in which he assumes a series of voices.

There is a way in which Akaky, then, is a version of his creator. Moreover, the ending is deliberately ambiguous so as not to impose a meaning, an identity, on the story itself. The true protection seems to lie in not being known, not being knowable, and yet, some kind of outward identity is necessary too. “The Overcoat” is a meditation on identity and loss, but exactly what it is “saying” about these abstractions is ambiguous, because the story is clothed in language and structured to evoke meanings and evade them at the same time.

The meaning of the story is not just in the plot; in fact, Vladimir Nabokov suggests that to the extent that the story has a meaning, the style, not the plot, conveys it. The story combines voices and tones and levels of reality. Nabokov says, “Gogol’s art discloses that parallel lines not only meet, but they can wiggle and get most extravagantly entangled, just as two pillars reflected in water in the most wobbly contortions if the necessary ripple is there” (58). Multiple, contradictory realities and identities exist as once.

Like a Zen paradox, the story does not have a fixed meaning, but serves rather to create a space in which the reader can experience his own private epiphany. It is this ambiguity that draws Ashoke Ganguli, Gogol Ganguli’s father, to the story in the first place. As he reads the story on the almost fatal train ride that becomes a turning point in his life, Ashoke thinks, “Just as Akaky’s ghost haunted the final pages, so did it haunt a place deep in Ashoke’s soul, shedding light on all that was irrational, that was inevitable about the world” (Lahiri 14).

Lahiri does not tell us any more than this about what exactly it is that he understands about the irrational and the inevitable, because she, like Gogol, is working to evoke meanings rather than convey them. But perhaps one thing that Ashoke responds to in the story is the sense that both reality and identity are multiple, existing on many planes at the same time. Life is not a simple, rational, sequential experience. Ashoke gains some unarticulated knowledge from the story that enables him to be many people at once and accept the contradictions of his life.

He himself is both the dutiful son who returns to India every year to see his extended family and the man who left this hurt and bewildered family behind to begin a life in another country, both a Bengali and the father of two Americans, both the respected Professor Ganguli and the patronized foreigner, both Ashoke, his good name, and Mithu, his pet name. His world is not just India and America but the Europe of the authors he reads, his time both the twentieth and the nineteenth centuries. A person is many people, just as Akaky is all of the documents he copies and no one in himself.

For Gogol Ganguli, however, the several identities that he takes on in the course of the novel are a source of pain, perhaps in part because he passively accepts them one after the other, often conjoined to a relationship with a woman, apparently confusing a series of material and social selves for who he is. Moreover, because these outer selves are sequential rather than simultaneous, they provide him with no sense of continuity, which is part of their function in the lives of more contented and secure people. And as in Nikolai Gogol’s short story, the meaning of

Lahiri’s novel seems to lie not so much in the plotline as in the style. It is a type of realism that assumes that to show reality, one must abandoned the tight causal plot of realism to show the randomness and irrationality of the events that define the characters’ lives. In addition, the present tense prose, which at first may seem to be merely trendy and irritating, also creates the effect of “suppressing the shared past that connects writer and reader,” as Ursula Le Guin has observed with some asperity about present tense prose in general (74).

In this novel, however, the effect seems deliberate, as the characters are indeed cut off from their pasts–by physical distance, in the case of Ashoke and Ashima, or by the inability to understand the significance of the past, in the case of Gogol Ganguli and his wife Moushimi. Thus it seems appropriate that the readers are cut off from this past as well. Lahiri’s dispassionate, elusive style is one of the many items to come out of Gogol’s overcoat. From him through Vladimir Nabokov and the modernists she has taken the idea that the style is the meaning, not merely the means of conveying it.

The way in which she writes also comes through a tradition of American writers as well, particularly Hemingway and Raymond Carver, who acutely observe the details of physical reality as a way of implying the characters’ inner struggles (“Big Two Hearted River” and “Cathedral,” for example). Yet this style is blended with Gogol to create a hybrid entity, Russian, American, and Indian, through which Lahiri creates vivid characters whose identities are nonetheless unknowable. Lahiri layers on detail after detail, until we can see the last eyelet in Ashoke’s shoes.

But something essential is always left out. We learn the names of all the people who attend Ashima’s parties. We don’t know what Ashima or Ashoke like about these friends or what makes them more than names. We know that the first girl Gogol has sex with was wearing “a plaid woolen skirt and combat boots and mustard tights” (105), but we don’t know her name or what she looked liked or even the details of her body that a man would be more likely to remember than the girl’s clothing.

We know what Gogol reads as a boy and the names of his boyhood friends, but we don’t know what he thinks about these books or likes about these friends. We know what Gogol and his wife Moushumi say when they are chattering at yuppie dinner parties, but not what they say to each other when they are arguing or when they are expressing their love for each other. We sometimes learn what the characters feel, although more often, we are given a catalog of the details of their surroundings which they are noticing while they are having the feeling.

And we almost never know what the characters are thinking, about who they are to themselves as they experience the rush of sounds and sensations that are their lives. Introspection, even if it were presented as interior monologue, would suggest that this voice was who the character “really” was. The effect is both eerie and deliberate, and perhaps suggests the ways in which essential identity, the self as a continuous organizing consciousness, is beyond the power of words to describe. We can only know the surface.

A sense of what lies beyond the surface can only be evoked and illuminated. Four Perspectives Continued from Gogol’s Namesake: Identity and Relationships in Jhumpa Lahiri’s The Namesake Author: Judith Caesar The novel is told through the sensibilities of four different characters, Gogol Ganguli, his mother Ashima, his father Ashoke, and his wife Moushumi, all of whom reveal different aspects of the material world and the personal relationships which are a part of each character’s outer identity.

Of these people, Ashoke alone seems to have found the balance among the various aspects of self that enable him to live comfortably in a foreign country which his children will experience differently than he does. He has his family back in India, a network of Bengali friends whom he has known since coming to America, a house that he has lived in for years, and familiar Indian customs blended with American ones until the blending itself becomes familiar, all of which provide an outer protection for an inner self.

The material world of America seems to be a source of unhappiness to Ashima (it is her consciousness, not Ashoke’s, that frequently notices American habits with distaste). Thus throughout the book, she struggles to recover the material and social selves of her life in India and yet somehow adapt herself to life in the country to which she has come. For both Gogol and Moushumi, the process of finding a way to live comfortably with what seems to them a double identity, two very different outer worlds, is even more complex, since, like other young Americans, they tend to confuse the outer identity with who they are.

In part, they do this because modern consumer culture tends to encourage people to view themselves as their material selves, which makes finding a sense of self even more challenging for a person raised among different cultures and subcultures, especially if he concentrates on the question, “Which am I? ,” rather than realizing that he is both all and none of them. Ashoke Ganguli seems to want to help his son discover a way in which to live with the complexity of identity.

To begin with, following Bengali custom, he attempts to give him two identities, one identity, his daknam or pet name, who he is to the people who have known and loved him all his life, and another name, his bhalonam, his good name, who he is to the outside world. This will embed in him the knowledge that he is at least two people, who he is to his family and the people who care about his, and who he is to outsiders. Perhaps he also wishes to convey the idea that identity is multiple and many faceted, like reality. It is not one thing or another, but simultaneity, as his own life has been.

But the good name Ashoke later selects, Nikhil, the five-year old Gogol and his school reject; and then the eighteen-year-old Gogol rejects the name Gogol and becomes his good name, Nikhil, to everyone except sometimes his parents. Ashoke has given his son two names, two identities, but Gogol must find their meaning for himself in the country and the time in which he has been born. And with his acceptance and rejection of his two names, he begins a pattern of first accepting and then rejecting outer identities that seem imposed on him by others and which he is seems unable to distinguish from his essential self.

He seems to think he must be one thing or another, Bengali or American, rather than accepting ambiguity and multiplicity. The name Gogol means very different things to Gogol and Ashoke. To Ashoke, the name Gogol is first of all a reminder of the way in which the reading of Gogol’s short story saved his life, how it was his dropping of the page from the story that alerted rescuers that he was still alive after the train wreck and made them stop and pull him out of the wreckage where he would otherwise have perished.

It is a rebirth of himself in a different form, as a person who wants to leave India and travel to other places, to form an identity for himself different from the one created by his life in India. And so, in a way, is the birth of his son. But Gogol is also a connection to his own family, to his grandfather who told him to read the Russian realists, and whom he is going to see at the time of the train wreck. There is an identity here that transcends culture, as generations of Indians (ultimately, Gogol Ganguli becomes the fourth) find a sense of life’s essence in an English translation of a Russian work.

But to Gogol Ganguli, Gogol is simply a strange name that he has been saddled with by accident. It makes him too different. (And it probably doesn’t help that when pronounced correctly, the name sounds like the English word “goggle”). When he is in high school and supposed to study Gogol’s story in English class, he refuses to read it. And strangely, instead of leading a discussion of the story itself, his teacher tells them about Gogol’s life, focusing on Gogol’s inner torment and his death by self-starvation. Gogol the writer is reduced to what was most bizarre about his personal life, for the delighted horror of American teenagers.

He is treated in exactly the way the living Gogol most feared. He becomes his difference, not his genius. And ironically, because of Lahiri’s style, the teacher himself becomes nothing more than his clothing and his mannerisms. To Gogol Ganguli, then, Gogol becomes the identity of a foreign madman who never experienced sex or any of the other initiations that lead to an adult identity for modern Americans. And yet he is still ambivalent. As Lahiri explains, “To read the story, he believes, would mean paying tribute to his namesake, accepting it somehow.

Still, listening to his classmates complain, he feels perversely responsible, as if his own work were being attacked” (92). Throughout the novel, many of the most significant conversations between Gogol Ganguli and Ashoke begin with Nikolai Gogol, as Ashoke attempts to connect with his son through Gogol the same way that the Russian writer connected him to his grandfather. But Gogol Ganguli rejects these gestures, not recognizing them for what they are. When Gogol Ganguli is fourteen, his father gives him a hard-bound copy of Gogol’s short stories; Gogol thanks him politely and then continues listening to his Beatles’ album.

When Ashoke quotes to him, “We all came out of Gogol’s Overcoat,” Gogol Ganguli asks, “What’s that supposed to mean? ” His father doesn’t answer, but merely tells him it will make sense to him someday (78). Characteristically, Lahiri doesn’t tell us how it makes sense to Ashoke, or how it will later make sense to his son. Later, when Gogol is no longer officially Gogol but Nikhil, Ashoke does tell him directly part of the personal significance of the name to him, how it was by dropping the page of Gogol that he was rescued the night he almost died.

When Gogol asks his father if he then reminds him of that night, Ashoke replies, “You remind me of everything that followed” (124). For Ashoke, Gogol is a new life, a rebirth, the creation of another life in another country, both his own life and his children’s. While Gogol Ganguli is disturbed by this knowledge, Lahiri doesn’t tell us precisely what he understands from it, except to imply, perhaps, that he feels to some degree guilty about having changed his name to Nikhil. For at eighteen, Gogol rejects the name, and with it, the trans-cultural identity that his father tried to give him.

Although Nikhil is an Indian name, it enables him to try on a sophisticated identity he thinks he wants, sexy, cool, “normal. ” (He is “Nick” in dialogue later in the novel, especially when he is talking to Americans who are not the children of immigrants). Nikhil is his overcoat which makes the ways in which he is different from other Americans invisible. Thus it is as Nikhil that he first kisses a girl, thinking afterward as he tells his friends about it, “it hadn’t been Gogol who kissed Kim. Gogol had nothing to do with it” (96). It is Nikhil whom he becomes at college and as Nikhil that he has his first girlfriend.

Yet despite their apparent intimacy, he never introduces the girlfriend Ruth to his parents, because “He cannot imagine being with her in a house where he is still Gogol” (114). And Ruth herself is part of a series of identities which Gogol tries on, in this case, probably, the identity of typical Yale student. She is never precisely who she is in herself, since we never know the traits he values in her or what they talk about or who he is to her. The relationship dissolves when she goes to England and comes back full of British mannerisms and expressions which have no place in his life.

Thus, a person who had once seemed the emotional center of his life moves out of it forever, beginning a pattern which will continue throughout the course of the novel. Perhaps it is not particularly unusual that he seems to have no lasting friendships to give him a sense of continuity either; his emotional life centers on his lovers, and when each woman ceases being his lover, she moves out of his life entirely, taking with her the self he was with her. The overcoat, the name Nikhil, seems to represent part of the material self, along with the personal possessions, the clothing, the food, the houses and apartments. The transient love affairs like that with Ruth through which Gogol becomes a series of alternate identities are also the overcoat. Or to be more exact, his relationships provide him with possible identities which he passively accepts, at least temporarily. But to him, unlike his father, these identities come one at a time and are mutually exclusive and transitory. They are not what protect him from the outside world, but rather a disguise that he confuses for himself.

This becomes even more clear when time shifts, and we next see Gogol twelve years later when he is an architect living in New York, where he has gone in part to escape being too geographically close to his family. Although he is now a grown man, he still seems to be going through the adolescent struggle to form an identity for himself separate from the world of his parents. His being an architect seems to be a metaphor for the building of an outer self that he himself has designed. Yet he doesn’t seem to have been able to do that. Tellingly, he wanted to build homes, but ends up designing staircases and closets for offices instead.

Instead of making personal spaces, he creates impersonal public ones; even his own apartment remains as an impersonal space, without decor, without anything of him in it–or perhaps its very absence of personality reflects him and the way in which he lives elsewhere, in other people’s spaces and material and social selves. Maxine, a beautiful, wealthy American woman from an old WASP family has sought him out after they met at a party and absorbed him into her world and her lifestyle. He spends most of his time in the house where Maxine lives with her parents, learning their tastes in food, wine, dress, and conversation.

She has a sense of herself, of the continuity of her life with that of her parents and grandparents that he thinks he will never have, because he doesn’t have a sense of what he might have in common with his parents emotionally or intellectually. At one point, “He realizes that she has never wished to be anyone other than herself … This, in his opinion, was the biggest difference between them” (138). And yet he never actively tries to create another identity for himself, as his parents have done, or to make sense of the one he has by trying to understand more about the permanent relationships in his life, those with his family.

Maxine’s sense of continuity and selfhood enable her to weather unhappy love affairs (she has just gone through one before meeting Gogol) without being devastated by them. Perhaps this is part of what draws him to her. She and her house and her parents’ summer place in New Hampshire and their whole material world are his next identity. He is Maxine Ratcliff’s lover, or, as her parents introduce him, “the architect Max brought up with her” (157). It’s a lovely, expensive, comfortable identity, given to him as a love-token, which he seems to accept without thought.

The only problem is that he cannot reconcile it with his identity as Ashima and Ashoke’s son and thus on some level, it feels like a betrayal. It’s not just a rejection of the home and food and conversational style of his parents, or of personal habits that are not to his personal taste; to him it seems a rejection of them. Thus he imagines hearing the phone ring in the middle of the night at the summer cottage and thinks it’s his parents calling him to wish him a happy birthday, until he realizes that they don’t even know the number.

The call is an imaginary connection to a self he has tried to cut himself away from to become something different from the identity which he thinks has been given him by his parents. It is a reminder of the guilt he feels in rejecting their world and by extension, them. He hasn’t yet realized that instead of being an identity imposed on him from outside, they are part of the pattern of key relationships in his life through which he can define himself. Gogol’s way of living with Maxine and thinking about himself changes when Ashoke dies suddenly and unexpectedly of a heart attack.

The material self is not the real self. And yet it is also necessary, just as Akaky’s overcoat was. The paradox is true in the way the multiple realities and identities of “The Overcoat” are true. Ashoke has created a material self of familiar rituals, places, and foods and social self in his relationships with other Bengali families, both of which have formed a buffer for him, allowing him to live as a complex human being in a country which still seems to feel foreign to him.

When Ashoke dies, all that is left of him are his material and social selves, the anonymous apartment where he was living by himself while on a fellowship at another university, his clothing, which Gogol Ganguli collects from the hospital, his rental car, the meager possessions in the apartment, the more ample possessions in the house he shared with Ashima, the scores of condolence letters that come from colleagues and friends that represent a lifetime’s network of relationships. These things both are and are not Ashoke. They make the absence of his living self in all its potential so much more acute. Perhaps to feel that sense of lost potential, Gogol stays overnight in his father’s apartment, drives the car, and then returns to stay for weeks in the house in which Ashoke lived with Ashima, not only to comfort his mother but to immerse himself as much as he can in who his father was. Lahiri describes all of Ashoke’s possessions and the places he lived in intricate detail, catalog after catalog of specific and vivid descriptions of objects, their shape, color, texture, turning them into a trope for Gogol’s grief.

She describes the objects instead of the grief to show us more powerfully that grief’s intensity, for the grief is beyond words. Only the objects are not. They alone can evoke that an approximation of that grief. She also describes the objects because that is what Gogol focuses on while feeling that grief. Among Ashoke’s possessions is a copy of The Comedians, Graham Greene’s bitter novel about murder and revolution in Papa Doc’s Haiti, in which the characters come to regard the horror of the police state with a mixture of idealism, cynicism, and a strangely energizing despair.

Like “The Overcoat,” it’s a work about the absurdity of the human condition, and it’s a key to understanding something of Ashoke’s sensibility and his rich and complex intellectual life. This is the book he was reading when he died. But Gogol apparently never thinks to read it. After his father’s death, and in part perhaps because of his guilt over the way he had distanced himself from his parents, he separates himself more and more from Maxine and her world, presumably to Maxine’s confusion and distress.

But he himself doesn’t seem to realize why he is doing this. Finally, when the relationship ends, we are told almost nothing about what he thinks or feels. We merely learn what he does and more tellingly what he fails to do. When Maxine comes to visit him in his family home, now a place of mourning of which she is not a part, he “doesn’t bother to translate what people are saying (in Bengali), to introduce her to everyone, to stay close by her side” (182).

It is the same technique Lahiri used to convey Gogol’s desolation at the loss of his father, but now it is used to imply something different, to suggest, perhaps, the difficulty of understanding one’s own motivations, especially concerning deeply felt emotions. The self that he assumed with Maxine is abandoned, an empty shell of a self he can walk away from with few regrets. It is not who Gogol is. Indeed, Gogol defines himself primarily by who he isn’t, by rejecting or refusing to choose potential definitions, as he did when he was a baby and refused to choose the object that was supposed to foretell his occupation in life.

There seems to be in Gogol a reluctance to explore on his own, to make the active choices through which some people can gain a sense of self. After Ashoke’s death, a memory returns to Gogol, a memory of one of the few significant exchanges between father and son Lahiri reports which did not involve a discussion of Nikolai Gogol, perhaps because it suggests an idea about identity so different from that of Gogol, of identity as something to be actively created.

(Yet it too is one of the many simultaneous and contradictory truths about reality and identity). Ashoke takes Gogol Ganguli on a walk on Cape Cod, picking their way over the rocks to the last point of land, the furthest point east, the place where they can go no further, with Gogol literally following in his father’s footsteps. “Try to remember it always,” his father tells him. “Remember that you and I made this journey, that we went together to a place where there was nowhere left to go” (187).

The anecdote is an open metaphor, and although Gogol Ganguli himself doesn’t seem to explore its meaning, the emblematic image seems to suggest the way in which his father had wanted to guide him, to show him that exploration could be exhilarating, that he wasn’t “too little” to discover for himself where he could go and what he could do. It also suggests that the action of seeking can in itself be part of who one is, how one defines himself.

However, at the time, and indeed even as an adult, Gogol doesn’t seem to understand this meaning or this feeling. In fact quite the opposite sensation occurs to him later, when he is in Paris with his new wife Moushumi on what could have been like a honeymoon for them but which is not. He looks at the way in which Moushumi had created a new life in a foreign country for herself when she had lived in Paris before she met him.

He thinks, “here Moushumi had reinvented herself, without misgivings, without guilt … He realizes that this is what their parents had done in America. What he, in all likelihood, will never do” (233). The choice of Moushumi as a lover and then a wife seems to have been part of an unconscious attempt to concretize another identity, an adult identity that would connect him to his childhood world an

Monte carlo simulation university essay help: university essay help

Risk analysis is part of every decision we make. We are constantly faced with uncertainty, ambiguity, and variability. And even though we have unprecedented access to information, we can’t accurately predict the future. Monte Carlo simulation (also known as the Monte Carlo Method) lets you see all the possible outcomes of your decisions and assess the impact of risk, allowing for better decision making under uncertainty What is Monte Carlo simulation? Monte Carlo simulation is a computerized mathematical technique that allows people to account for risk in quantitative analysis and decision making.

The technique is used by professionals in such widely disparate fields as finance, project management, energy, manufacturing, engineering, research and development, insurance, oil & gas, transportation, and the environment. Monte Carlo simulation furnishes the decision-maker with a range of possible outcomes and the probabilities they will occur for any choice of action.. It shows the extreme possibilities—the outcomes of going for broke and for the most conservative decision—along with all possible consequences for middle-of-the-road decisions.

The technique was first used by scientists working on the atom bomb; it was named for Monte Carlo, the Monaco resort town renowned for its casinos. Since its introduction in World War II, Monte Carlo simulation has been used to model a variety of physical and conceptual systems. How Monte Carlo simulation works Monte Carlo simulation performs risk analysis by building models of possible results by substituting a range of values—aprobability distribution—for any factor that has inherent uncertainty.

It then calculates results over and over, each time using a different set of random values from the probability functions. Depending upon the number of uncertainties and the ranges specified for them, a Monte Carlo simulation could involve thousands or tens of thousands of recalculations before it is complete. Monte Carlo simulation produces distributions of possible outcome values. By using probability distributions, variables can have different probabilities of different outcomes occurring.

Probability distributions are a much more realistic way of describing uncertainty in variables of a risk analysis. Common probability distributions include: Normal – Or “bell curve. ” The user simply defines the mean or expected value and a standard deviation to describe the variation about the mean. Values in the middle near the mean are most likely to occur. It is symmetric and describes many natural phenomena such as people’s heights. Examples of variables described by normal distributions include inflation rates and energy prices.

Lognormal – Values are positively skewed, not symmetric like a normal distribution. It is used to represent values that don’t go below zero but have unlimited positive potential. Examples of variables described by lognormal distributions include real estate property values, stock prices, and oil reserves. Uniform – All values have an equal chance of occurring, and the user simply defines the minimum and maximum. Examples of variables that could be uniformly distributed include manufacturing costs or future sales revenues for a new product.

Triangular – The user defines the minimum, most likely, and maximum values. Values around the most likely are more likely to occur. Variables that could be described by a triangular distribution include past sales history per unit of time and inventory levels. PERT- The user defines the minimum, most likely, and maximum values, just like the triangular distribution. Values around the most likely are more likely to occur. However values between the most likely and extremes are more likely to occur than the triangular; that is, the extremes are not as emphasized.

An example of the use of a PERT distribution is to describe the duration of a task in a project management model. Discrete – The user defines specific values that may occur and the likelihood of each. An example might be the results of a lawsuit: 20% chance of positive verdict, 30% change of negative verdict, 40% chance of settlement, and 10% chance of mistrial. During a Monte Carlo simulation, values are sampled at random from the input probability distributions. Each set of samples is called an iteration, and the resulting outcome from that sample is recorded.

Monte Carlo simulation does this hundreds or thousands of times, and the result is a probability distribution of possible outcomes. In this way, Monte Carlo simulation provides a much more comprehensive view of what may happen. It tells you not only what could happen, but how likely it is to happen. Monte Carlo simulation provides a number of advantages over deterministic, or “single-point estimate” analysis: Probabilistic Results. Results show not only what could happen, but how likely each outcome is. Graphical Results.

Because of the data a Monte Carlo simulation generates, it’s easy to create graphs of different outcomes and their chances of occurrence. This is important for communicating findings to other stakeholders. Sensitivity Analysis. With just a few cases, deterministic analysis makes it difficult to see which variables impact the outcome the most. In Monte Carlo simulation, it’s easy to see which inputs had the biggest effect on bottom-line results. Scenario Analysis: In deterministic models, it’s very difficult to model different combinations of values for different inputs to see the effects of truly different scenarios.

Using Monte Carlo simulation, analysts can see exactly which inputs had which values together when certain outcomes occurred. This is invaluable for pursuing further analysis. Correlation of Inputs. In Monte Carlo simulation, it’s possible to model interdependent relationships between input variables. It’s important for accuracy to represent how, in reality, when some factors goes up, others go up or down accordingly. An enhancement to Monte Carlo simulation is the use of Latin Hypercube sampling, which samples more accurately from the entire range of distribution functions.

Importance of steriochemistry in pharmacy research essay help: research essay help

Importance of Stereochemistry in Pharmacy with Special attention to DrugMolecules Introduction The importance of stereochemistry in drug action is gaining greater attention in pharmaceuticalsciemces, and a basic knowledge of the subject will be necessary for clinicians to make informeddecisions regarding the use of single-enantiomer drugs. Many of the drugs currently used in psychiatric practice are mixtures of enantiomers. For some therapeutics, single-enantiomer formulations can provide greater selectivities for their biological targets, improved therapeuticindices, and/or better pharmacokinetics than a mixture of enantiomers.

This assignment reviewsthe importance of stereochemistry with special attention to different drug molecules, thenomenclature for describing stereochemistry and enantiomers, emphasizes the potential biologicaland pharmacologic differences between the 2 enantiomers of a drug, and highlights the clinicalexperience with single enantiomers. In some cases, both a mixture of enantiomers and a single-enantiomer formulation of a drug will be available simultaneously. In these cases, familiarity withstereochemistry and its pharmacologic implications will aid the practicing physician to provideoptimal pharmacotherapy to his or her patients.

Some Basic Concepts Before going into the depth of this discussion let us have some concepts about the basic aspects of stereochemistry which eill ultimately help us to understand the importance of stereochemistry later on. 1 This section contains the basics needed to understand chiral drugs. The most important point is thatchiral drugs have 2 structurally similar forms that can behave very differently in biological systemsdue to their different shapes in 3-dimensional space. These 2 possible forms are termed enantiomers , and the 2 enantiomers of a given chiral drug should be considered 2 different drugs. This topic is discussed further in the next section. Chirality is formally defined as the geometric property of a rigid object (like a molecule or drug) of not being superimposable with its mirror image. Molecules that can be superimposed on their mirror images are achiral (not chiral). Chirality is a property of matter found throughout biological systems, from the basic building blocks of life such as amino acids, carbohydrates, and lipids to the layout of the human body.

Chirality is often illustrated with the idea of left- and right-handedness: a left hand and right handare mirror images of each other but are not superimposable. The 2 mirror images of a chiral molecule are termed enantiomers . Like hands, enantiomers comein pairs. Both molecules of an enantiomer pair have the same chemical composition and can bedrawn the same way in 2 dimensions (e. g. , a drug structure on a package insert), but in chiralenvironments such as the receptors and enzymes in the body, they can behave differently. A racemate (often called a racemic mixture) is a mixture of equal amounts of both enantiomers of achiral drug. Chirality in drugs most often arises from a carbon atom attached to 4 different groups, but there can be other sources of chirality as well. Single enantiomers are sometimes referred to as singleisomers or stereoisomers . These terms can also apply to achiral drugs and molecules and donot indicate that a single enantiomer is present. For example, molecules that are isomers of eachother share the same stoichiometric molecular formula but may have very different structures.

2 However, many discussions of chiral drugs use the terms enantiomer , single isomer , and/or single stereoisomer interchangeably. The 2 enantiomers of a chiral drug are best identified on the basis of their absolute configuration or their optical rotation. Other designations such as D and L (note the upper case) are used for sugarsand amino acids but are specific to these molecules and are not generally applicable to other compounds. The terms d , or dextro, and l , or levo , are considered obsolete and should

Chromotography of Food Dye my assignment essay help london: my assignment essay help london

Today in lab I will separate mixtures of compounds into their constituent components using chromatography paper and an eluting solvent of salt water as well as rubbing alcohol. Materials and Methods: In this lab using the bag of FD&C dyes, bag of M&M’s, 2 packs of Kool-Aid , and a pack of Clover Valley store brand food coloring I am going to place a drop of each dye at the bottom of the chromatography paper. For the experiment with the rubbing alcohol I also placed a drop of each dye, but used a paper coffee filter. In order to get the dye color extracted from the M&M’s and Kool-Aid I added a little additional water.

After applying all of the dyes and allowing them to dry completely I placed the chromatography paper in an eluting solvent of salt water, that I previously prepared and placed the coffee filters in the rubbing alcohol, paying careful attention to make sure that the area that the dye was placed on the paper was above the level of the solvent. I left the chromatography paper in the solvent until all the solvent had been absorbed, approximately 2 to 3 minutes I removed them from the solvent, marked the solvent line and set them aside to dry.

By comparing the color columns of the unknown dye sample and food items, to the color columns of the identified FD&C Food Colors I was able to conclude the following- Unknown dye is a compound of Red 40 and Blue 1 Strawberry Kool-Aid consists of Red 40 Grape Kool-Aid is a compound of Red 40 and Blue 1 Red M&M’s consist of Red 40 Blue M&M’s consist of Blue 1 Yellow M&M’s consist of Yellow 5 Green M&M’s are a compound of Yellow 5 and Blue 1 This lab taught us an approach in how we can separate the properties of a compound with the use of different solvents in an attempt to distinguish their individual properties.

Questions: A. Because the dye from pen would also run with the solvent. B. Because you will not be able to get an accurate equation of compound distance divided by solvent distance if the solvent has reached the end of the paper. C. To make sure that the dye spots don’t wash away in the solvent and are spread throughout the paper during the mobile phase. D. You have to mark the solvent line when you remove the paper from the petri dish because the solvent will continue to spread throughout the paper as it dries.

Hannah’s Ice Creeam assignment help sydney: assignment help sydney

Background Information Ike Telloni always wanted to start his own business; he completed a Commerce program at the University of Ottawa and later moved on to work for the Waterloo Ice Cream Company. Ike worked at the company as a sales representative and then a regional marketing director but after working there for ten years he wanted to find a job where he could be close to family. So he bought a business that was for sale in Elgin Beach’s main street called Hannah’s Ice Cream.

This forty year business was an icon in the town, everyone loved it and reason for that was because of how Hannah (the owner) treated her employees, she made sure they were happy at work and listened to what they had to say. However once the business had landed in the hands of Ike things started to go downhill, revenues and profits were down and the employee turnover was very high. This was because the employees did not work well under Ike’s management method; they found him to be very unfriendly and hard to work for. Being overwhelmed with all the work Ike promoted Nafeeza Shafie, an employee of five years to assistant manager.

Hearing about the competition Ike was facing with the new ice cream shop opening up he approached Nafeeza and asked her to create a marketing plan to win over the town on Canada Day. Nafeeza worked hard and did as she was told and created a whole campaign to get the attention of the community, she had asked Ike to submit the advertisement to the newspaper but he forgot and as a result Hannah’s Ice Cream had nothing to do for the Canada Day celebration letting down the community. Step 1 – Identify and Define the Problem The problem in this situation was Ike’s management style, he did not know how to treat his employees and motivate them.

This was evident when he yelled at his workers because he thought that was the only way they would learn, and loudly criticized their work by calling them names, and to make it worse Ike cancelled the employee bonus programs such as the weekly improvement meetings, picnics and etc. which less motivated the workers to put in extra effort. Another problem Ike had was the fact that he worked at home more than at the actual business and because of this he didn’t know what was going on and he didn’t have a good relationship with the employees.

Also the other ice cream shop opening up in town will cause competition which could be a create problem in the future profits as well as steal Nafeeza the assistant manager. All of these problems resulted in the greatest one of all which was the loss of profits and revenue. Step 2 – Generate and Evaluate Alternative Courses of Action One way to deal with the situation at hand would be to sell the business by doing this Ike will receive some money that he could use however he would not get the total amount he paid for because the business is not as profitable as it was before.

However by selling it does mean Ike would no longer have to deal with any more management issues, but it does show him as giving up and not giving his all. Another drawback of this plan is not only does Ike loose his dream of having his own business but he also will have no other source of income or employment which means he would have to start looking for a new job.

Another course of action that can be taken is Ike can change his management style this will make the employees work harder and be more respectful toward Ike and if the workers are treated right they will be happy which means they will be more productive and that could cause the business to create a greater profit. An issue that arises from this solution is first Ike must realize that the way he is treating the employees is not correct.

Even after he has realized it might be hard for him to change his personality, it could take a lot of time and effort, which Ike has to be willing to put in. One last solution to this problem could be to give more responsibility to Nafeeza by promoting her to manager, this could work because she has been working at Hannah’s Ice Cream for five years and it was said that the other employees respect her and enjoy working with her. Therefore if the employees are comfortable with whom they are working for they will perform better and that will result in the business running better.

However some disadvantages of this solution are Ike might not feel comfortable giving up his position as manager to someone younger than him, also it would cost more money for the business because Nafeeza’s salary would have to increase because she at a higher position with more responsibility. Step 3 – Decide on a Preferred Course of Action The best solution to this problem would have to be for Ike to change his style of management. He will have to work on being more kind and friendly to the employees and make sure he listens to what they have to say.

By Ike doing all this it will make the employees a lot happier which will result in them being more productive and efficient at work and they will want to give it their best because soon realize that their boss is putting in an effort to make it a good workplace for them. This will be effective because as mentioned it was Hannah’s kindness towards the employees that made then work hard and attract customers, therefore if Ike can work on his management style there is no doubt that Hannah’s Ice Cream can get back on his feet and be better than ever.

This is definitively an optimizing decision because after researching and evaluating all the other solutions this seems to be the one that has the most potential that can have the greatest impact on the business with low costs and with a low time period. Step 4 – Implement the Decision Once the best solution has been made a method must be made on how to get it into action. To get this solution working Ike should talk to Nafeeza and apologize to her for his irresponsible behaviour of not getting the advertisement to the newspaper and letting all her hard work go to waste.

After that he should talk to her about how they could work together to change his management style. Ike should always ask Nafeeza her thoughts on how to get the business going again and ask her to help solve the problem because after she is the assistant manager. It will also be idea for Ike and Nafeeza to work on creating another marketing campaign to make up for that last one which did not occur on Canada Day. Next thing Ike should do is call a meeting with all his employees and apologize for his very rude behaviour and let them know that he will be returning all the employee programs such as picnics, extra pay and employee meetings.

Also he should let them know about how he is going to work on getting more profits and as well as ask them for their opinion on how the business can increase their revenues. Some things Ike can do personally to improve his management style is he could take a course at a local university or collage on management so he could better enhance his understanding and improve his skills. Ike should also work on spending more time at the business rather than at home, so that he builds a better relationship with the employees also so that he is more aware of what is going on in the business.

One last thing Ike could do is work on a reward system for his employees so that they are motivated to work hard. Step 5 – Evaluate Results This step is used to see if the chosen solution is achieving the desired results and solving the problem. To make sure the results are achieved for this problem Ike must enrol himself in a management course to improve his management system and continue to hold the employee meetings about two to three meetings a month to discuss on how to improve and make better working conditions.

Ike should also continue to have reward system for his employees so that they are motivated which could be selecting an employee of the month. Another important action Ike needs to do is create the new marketing campaign with Nafeeza so that they can start attracting customers. If the employees are working hard and profits are high Ike should reward them by hosting a picnic for the employees and their families. If these actions are continued by Ike and the employees in a few months the profits and revenue should start to increase and Hannah’s Ice Cream will be as profitable as it was before.

Narrative essay about friend essay help for free: essay help for free

My adventure started when my family and I decided to leave our country. Our destiny was unknown and mysterious, and we didn’t know what the future was holding for us, until destiny managed to bring us to the United States of America. At that time, I was still young, but I realized the greatness of the country that I was headed to. Where people achieved their goals and reached all limit. But I figured there was a big problem, which was the language that I should be adapting to sooner or later.

Actually, I hated English ever since school, because our teacher was very bad looking and smelled like a rotten egg, and most of the time the class was disorganized. Students were very quiet and bored to death. And I felt like my heart was dimed in the darkness every time I walked into the classroom. Before going to school in America, I was scared that I would start whispering to myself or shouting loudly and felt my skin was cold and my surface was very smooth, whenever I thought that I can’t adapt to the culture and be part of the society at the time.

So I was looking for friends that speak my language to help me in school and guide me of what was going and be left behind. I met my first two friends Jihad who I called “Joy” and Murtadha. My parents and friends tried to convincing me not to be afraid or panic about school and that I was going to pick up language quicker than a sponge would suck water, but my fears overcome these cheers. I felt incapable of control my senses and I would take moment of silence every once in a while, breathing smoothly. I smelled bad wind blowing through my body and body was very heavy that I couldn’t feel my muscle, if like I was almost paralyzed.

And I almost felt like crying. I had a fight with my parent on the first day school in the morning to not go to school, but I was forced to go any ways. At the beginning, although I faced some difficulties in learning new language but by time past and with my friends help, I found solution for my problems and defeated the fears I had at the beginning. Finally, I gained an experience and own new friendship in this adventure. After look at this, I learned that don’t let fear overcome you and all your senses, and try to figure out a solution no matter how big is the problem. And if you need help don’t be scared to ask a good friend.

Frank O’Connor’s ‘My Oedipus Complex’ descriptive essay help: descriptive essay help

Frank O’Connor’s literary piece, ‘My Oedipus Complex’ portrays childhood in a subverted ight. He is exploring exaggerated aspects of mother-child relationships as a reflection upon human nature. Themes and ideas present within the story are of possession, in the protagonist’s view of his mother, and of jealousy. This short story shows the faults and dangers of human nature. Possession is a motif that permeates the text. Through a first person narration, the reader is able to have an insight into the main character’s perspective. “… what mother and I should do during the day.

” This quote shows the world that Larry, the child, exists within. Larry’s life is an exclusion of all things except hi and his mother. The line is an extract of Larry’s play, and imagination involving a dialogue between his ‘feet”. This technique of identifying Larry’s feet with conscience allows for the reader to infer the main character’s thoughts. As well as this, Larry is shown to classify his mother’s attention as his own. “… my time with mother. ” The use of the possessive pronoun in Larry’s inner narration allows the audience to gauge his views.

It shows the demanding nature that Larry feels toward his mother. This story shows the human flaw of possession through the character of Larry. Jealousy is another theme present within the story. Through the introduction of various figures, the attention that Larry recieves is diminished. The entrance of his father is a major disruption to Larry’s life. Described as, “… a stranger, a total stranger… “, the paternal entity is now a source of jealousy. The repeated assertion of unacknowledgement and disassociation is a representation of Larry;s inner turmoil.

Another example of this is the quote, “… Mrs Right right talked of the trouble that she had with her own father, till she put him in the Home. ” This is another representation of Larry’s views and ideas through the use of an indirect medium, i. e. Larry’s feet. The aspect of jealousy is explained and explored in Frank O’Connor’s short story. Through the main characater’s mentality, the short story is able to explore human nature. Frank O’Connor’s piece shows the faults and flaws in human nature

Peter Singer and his “solution” to end world poverty free essay help online: free essay help online

Although being “able but unwilling to donate to overseas aid” may been seen as selfish, it is in no way immoral, as Peter Singer would like to suggest. People should not have to bear the responsibility of having to care for every other human. Although people grow up with different opportunities, the one thing that everyone has in common is potential. Whether someone lived in a poor family or a rich family, there is the possibility of having a successful life if effort is put into their schoolwork/jobs.

Someone from a poor family might have to work harder than someone from an affluent family because they could have problems finding the money to go to college, but this is why there are scholarships. Someone who works hard, goes to school, gets good grades, and becomes very wealthy shouldn’t have to give up the majority of their money. People work hard for their money and should do what they want with it. If money that is normally spent on luxuries went to aid towards impoverished countries, the work ethic of many would people would drastically decline.

A popular ideal of life is to make a lot of money. Most people were brought up at an early age, to be conditioned based on reward and punishment. Doctors and scientists both have considerable amounts of “luxury” money. They went to school for a long time so that they could make a lot of money. That was their incentive. And without incentives, there would be a lack of scientific discoveries, regarding medicine and other useful things. What would be considered a “luxury” to one person, might be considered a necessity to someone else.

Peter Singer believes that “whatever money [is spent] on luxuries, not necessities, should be given away. ” The world, however, is not that black and white. For example, a college student would probably consider a laptop as a necessity because they would access to something portable in which they could write/turn in their essays or conduct their research. A farmer, on the other hand, might consider a laptop to be a luxury because it doesn’t have much to do with his profession/every day lifestyle.

People should always have money saved up in case of stressful times. Nobody plans on being diagnosed with cancer, but it happens. In situations like this, treatment options, like radiation, can be very expensive. Treatment might take several weeks as well. People need to save up money in case emergencies. Sending a young adult to college might be seen as a luxury to one person while being a necessity for someone else. The definition of luxury and necessity change depending on a given situation.

Although sending money/supplies to overseas nations would help alleviate poverty, it would only do so in regard to short term issues, as opposed to long term ones. In Africa, “aid-supported scholarships [helped send… girls to school,” which was great for a short amount of time. Even though the girls graduated, they still wouldn’t “be able to find a job in their own countries. ” They were educated but couldn’t do anything with their knowledge. In a way, the aid was a waste. Almost every stable/affluent country/nation have an “accountable government and an efficient civil service.

” These things alone “help meet social needs. Its people need jobs and the belief in their country’s future. ” Money alone cannot “achieve these goals. ” What is the exact definition of a luxury? A necessity? It’s different for everyone, but Peter Singer is trying to define these two ambiguous words. Work ethic would diminish and the quality of life would deplete due to lack of scientific advancement. There would also be no long term goals being met. Overall, donating most of your money to aid for impoverished countries would do more harm than good.

Robert Frost’s ‘The Tuft of Flowers’ history essay help: history essay help

Robert Frost’s ‘The Tuft of Flowers” is an exploration of human companionship. It discusses amity between men and it’s need for proximity. This is achieved through the conflicting themes of isolation, understanding & kinship, and the paradox that it creates. Robert Frost’s poem shows that companionship does not need a physical aspect or presence. Loneliness is a theme that leads the poem into further ideas. Heavily stressed upon, the audience can feel the protagonist’s isolation. “… as he had been – alone,”

This line emphasises the idea through the use of ellipsis. It is an example of a visual aspect of poetry. The word in the poem is set off-side and this furthers the imagery and meaning of ‘alone’. Solitude is also represented through the motif of death. “… his long scythe whispering to the ground. ” This line personifies the weeding object and gives an allusion to death. The Grim Reaper is referenced here, with a subtle use of anthropromorphism. This quote, with such references to death connotes ideas of isolation.

The separation in the poem is heavily emphasised and allows the poem to develop and expand. Conversely, a contrasting theme in the poem is of understanding and kinship. Through the main character’s and mower’s similarity of thought, this idea is portrayed. “The mower… had loved the them thus, by leaving them to flourish, not for us. ” The motivation of the mower was of beauty and this is reflected in the protagonist’s ideals. The connection between the two is shown. “feel a spirit kindred to my own.

” This line shows the connection the protagonist has made to the mower. The use of the word ‘spirit’ represents the metaphysical aspect and absense of a physical presence. This is an inception of the idea in which, connections between entities do not require presence. The companionship made between these parties has occured from a shared idea or understanding. This is a theme relevant in many texts. C. S. Lewis states, “Friendship is born at that moment when one man says to another: “What! You too?

I thought that no-one but myself… ” ” Understanding and kinship is explored within the poem, showing the need or non-essential aspect of physicality. (incompanionship) Paradoxes in this poem are used to show the related and entwined natures of loneliness and companionship. It reflects the interrelations and interdependancy of the ideas. “And I must be, as he had been – alone,” This description of seclusion is conveyed paradoxically with a comparison and establishment of connection to another being.

Another example that is used to conclude the poem, but also to consolidate the central theme of the poem is, “Men work together… whether they work together or apart. ” This line shows of how people are never alone even in the absense of physical beings. The theme of Robert Frost’s work “A Tuft of Flowers” is of how connections between people do not need proximity or physical closeness. Through exploration of the conflicting themes, isolation and kinship, a paradoxial relationshipship is developed between the themes. Robert Frost shows the intertwined nature of companionship and isolation

Essay Writing at Profs Only

5.0 rating based on 10,001 ratings

Rated 4.9/5
10001 review

Review This Service




Rating:











Leave a Comment

Your email address will not be published.